Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
PLANS - 24-00055 - Chipotle - Shell Only
NWC UNIVERSITY BLVD. & TAMANA DR. SITE UNIVERSITY BLVD. TA M A N A D R . A101 0 SECTION MARKER SECTION / DETAIL COLUMN GRID LABEL VIEW LABEL & NORTH ARROWS LEVEL TARGET ROOM NAME & NUMBER REVISION NUMBER DOOR NUMBER EXTERIOR ELEVATION MARKER X NORTH View Scale View Name1 A101 1 1 1 1 ROOM NAME XXX ROOM NAME XXX 1 A101 ____ 1 A101 ____ DIMENSION TARGET X PROJECT INFORMATION OWNER:ARCHITECT: MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL PLUMBING ENGINEER: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Mattis Partners 1000 2nd Ave, Suite 2420 Seattle, WA 98104 Brian Schwalbach bas@mattispart.com Tel: (206) 641-9500 DCI Engineers 341 W. Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, AK 99503 Juleen Rogness jrogness@dci-engineers.com Tel: (907) 570-1446 BUILDING DEPARTMENT: City of Rexburg Building Department 35 N 1st East Rexburg, ID 83440 Shauna Eaton Tel: (208) 372-2166 FIRE DEPARTMENT: Madison Fire Department 26 N Center St Rexburg, ID 83440 Tel: (208) 359-3010 SEWER UTILITY:City of Rexburg Public Works 35 N 1st East Rexburg, ID 83440 publicworks@rexburg.org Tel: (208) 359-3020 NATURAL GAS UTILITY: City of Rexburg Gas & Power 35 N 1st East Rexburg, ID 83440 customerservices@rexburg.org Tel: (208) 359-3020 ELECTRICAL UTILITY: City of Rexburg Gas & Power 35 N 1st East Rexburg, ID 83440 customerservices@rexburg.org Tel: (208) 359-3020 TELEPHONE UTILITY: CenturyLink REGULATORY AGENCIES & UTILITIES ABBREVIATIONS GRAPHIC SYMBOLS KEY PLAN WATER UTILITY: City of Rexburg Public Works 35 N 1st East Rexburg, ID 83440 publicworks@rexburg.org Tel: (208) 359-3020 VICINITY MAP Harlan R. Faust, Architect 14344 Y Street, Suite 204 Omaha, NE 68137 Contact: Benjamin Fiedler bfiedler@fhaarchitects.com Tel: (402) 895-0878 Fax: (402) 895-9561 SCOPE OF WORK DEFERRED SUBMITTALS SPECIAL INSPECTIONS CIVIL ENGINEER: National Engineering 44 Union Blvd, Suite 509 Lakewood, CO 80228 Edgar Palma epalma@nationalengineering.com Tel: (720) 629-5752 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: Evergreen Design Group PO Box 2193 Garner, NC 27529 Contact: Blake Tomilloso-Rhinehart blake@evergreendesigngroup.com Tel: 800.680.6630 x13 Eagle Rock Engineering & Land Surveying 343 E 4th N #119 Rexburg, ID 83440 Contact: Kurt Roland kroland@eaglerockengineering.com Tel: 208-359-2665 PLANNING DEPARTMENT: City of Rexburg Planning & Zoning 35 N 1st East Rexburg, ID 83440 Katie Jo Saurey planningzoning@rexburg.org Tel: (208) 372-2167 REXBURG ID SHELL NWC UNIVERSITY BLVD. & TAMANA DR. REXBURG, ID 83440 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 COVER SHEET G000 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 TRS TENANT'S RAILING SUPPLIER TS TENANT'S SAFE SUPPLIER TSS TENANT'S SMART SAFE SUPPLIER TSV TENANT'S SIGN VENDOR TUV TENANT'S UV SUPPLIER TYP. TYPICAL U.N.O. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UPS UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY V.I.F. VERIFY IN FIELD VAR VARIES W/ WITH WA WASHROOM ACCESSORIES WCS TENANT'S WALK-IN COOLER SUPPLIER WHS WATER HEATER SUPPLIER WS TENANT'S WINDOW SHADE SUPPLIER SIM. SIMILAR SPS SODA POP SUPPLIER SS SUPPORT SIGNAGE SSS CCTV AND SAFE/CASHBOX STR STRUCTURE T TENANT TAB TENANT'S TEST & BALANCE VENDOR TBD TO BE DETERMINED TCC TENANT'S CABLING CONTRACTOR TDC TENANT'S DUCT CLEANER TEMS TENANT'S ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SUPPLIER THS TENANT'S HARDWARE SUPPLIER TLS TENANT'S LIGHT/LAMP SUPPLIER TMB TENANT'S MENU BOARD SUPPLIER TMS TENANT'S MILLWORK SUPPLIER TP TENANT'S PHONE SUPPLIER KES KITCHEN EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER MAX. MAXIMUM MECH MECHANICAL MFR MANUFACTURER MIN. MINIMUM MISC. MISCELLANEOUS MSS MUSIC SYSTEMS SUPPLIER N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT NO. NUMBER O.C. ON CENTER OSB ORIENTED STRAND BOARD POS POINT OF SALE PREP PREPARATION PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE QT QUARRY TILE R RADIUS RTU ROOF TOP UNIT EA. EACH EL ELEVATION (VERTICAL HEIGHT) ELEC ELECTRIC(AL) ELEV ELEVATION EQ EQUAL EXT EXTERIOR FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANEL FRT FIRE RETARDANT-TREATED GA GAUGE GALV GALVANIZED GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GYP GYPSUM HES HVAC EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER HS HOOD SUPPLIER HVAC HEATING AND VENTILATING INT. INTERIOR CENTER LINE (E) EXISTING CONSTRUCTION (N) NEW CONSTRUCTION @ AT Ø DIAMETER OR ROUND AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR ALUM ALUMINUM ARCH ARCHITECTUR(URAL) ASS ALARM SYSTEM SUPPLIER BD BOARD BLDG BUILDING CMT CEMENT CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CO2 CO2 SUPPLIER CO2AS CO2 ALARM SUPPLIER CS CHEMICAL SUPPLIER DIM. DIMENSION(S) NORTH NTSG000 VICINITY MAP2 NORTH 1" = 50'-0"G000 KEY PLAN1 REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR SUMMARY OF REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS SHEET INDEX & REVISIONS X SHEET IS NEW OR HAS BEEN REVISED O SHEET HAS BEEN ISSUED WITH NO REVISION SHEET NO. SHEET DESCRIPTION PERMIT G000 COVER SHEET X G001 PROJECT DATA & LIFE SAFETY PLAN X G002 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS X G010 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS X G011 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS X G012 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS X G013 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS X G014 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS X G015 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS X 1 CIVIL COVER X 2 G-1 X 3 C-1 X 4 C-2 X 5 D-1 X 6 D-2 X 1 OF 4 GI LAYOUT DRAWING X 2 OF 4 GI LID PRODUCTION DRAWING X 2 OF 6 GI BASE PRODUCTION DRAWING X 4 OF 4 GI BASE STEEL DRAWING X LP-1 LANDSCAPE PLANTING X LP-2 LANDSCAPE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS X SP101 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN & DETAILS X SP102 TRASH & RECYCLING ENCLOSURE PLAN AND DETAILS X A101 ARCHITECTURAL SHELL FLOOR PLAN X A201 ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PLAN X A301 ELEVATIONS - EXTERIOR X A401 BUILDING SECTIONS X A411 WALL SECTIONS X A412 WALL SECTIONS X A421 SECTION DETAILS X A422 SECTION DETAILS X A431 PLAN DETAILS X A601 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULES X A602 STOREFRONT DETAILS X S001 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND, AND ABBREVIATIONS X S002 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES CONTINUED X S101 STRUCTURALFOUNDATION AND STUD AND SHEAR WALL PLAN X S102 STRUCTURAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN X S200 STRUCTURAL FOUNDATION DETAILS X S201 STRUCTURAL STUD AND SHEAR WALL DETAILS X S202 STRUCTURAL WOOD FRAMING DETAILS X P010 PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS X P100 PLUMBING SITE PLAN X E010 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS X E105 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN X E115 ELECTRICAL SITE POWER PLAN X NEW CONSTRUCTION SHELL BUILDING FOR FUTURE TENANT IMPROVEMENT GROUP TENANT USE PROPOSED USE:FUTURE RESTAURANT A-2 CODE REVIEW CODE AUTHORITIES TENANT 2,325 SF 1/2 DIAGO NAL DISTANCE = 36'-7 1/2" 73'-3" DIAGONAL DISTANCE 39'-8 1/2" BETWEEN EXITS P ROVIDED INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE V-B 6,000 SF EXIT WIDTH REQUIRED (SECTION 1005): EXIT WIDTH PROVIDED: NUMBER OF EXITS REQUIRED (SECTION 1006.2): NUMBER OF EXITS PROVIDED: DISTANCE BETWEEN EXITS REQUIRED (SECTION 1007): DISTANCE BETWEEN EXITS PROVIDED: 6'-0" 12'-6" 36'-7 1/2" 39'-8 1/2" 3 2 NO 40'-0" 20'-8" 1 STORY(IES) 1 STORY2,325 SF USE AND OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (CHAPTER 3) OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (SECTION 302): TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION (CHAPTER 6) CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION (TABLE 601): FIRE SPRINKLERS: GENERAL BUILDING HEIGHTS AND AREAS (CHAPTER 5) TABULAR BUILDING HEIGHTS AND AREAS (TABLE 504.3, 504.4, & 506.2): GROUP A-2, TYPE A-2 V-B ACTUAL BUILDING HEIGHTS AND AREAS MEANS OF EGRESS (CHAPTER 10) ESTIMATED OCCUPANT LOAD (TABLE 1004.5): ASSEMBLY W/O FIXED SEATS (UNCONCENTRATED) 735 SF / 15 SF = 49 OCCUPANTS KITCHEN, COMMERCIAL AREA 1,250 SF / 200 SF = 7 OCCUPANTS RESTROOM / CIRCULATION AREA 230 SF / NA = 0 OCCUPANTS 56 OCCUPANTS MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 PROJECT DATA & LIFE SAFETY PLAN G001 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"G001 LIFE SAFETY PLAN1 BUILDING CODE: 2018 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE MECHANICAL CODE: 2018 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE PLUMBING CODE: 2017 IDAHO PLUMBING CODE ENERGY CODE: 2018 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE FUEL GAS CODE: 2018 FUEL GAS CODE ELECTRICAL CODE: 2017 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FIRE CODE: 2018 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE ACCESSIBLITY: 2009 ANSI A117.1 ACCESSIBILITY CODE 2010 AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN 303 CHANGES IN LEVEL 303.2 VERTICAL.CHANGES IN LEVEL OF 1/4 INCH HIGH MAXIMUM SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE VERTICAL. 303.3 BEVELED.CHANGES IN LEVEL BETWEEN 1/4 INCH HIGH MINIMUM AND 1/2 INCH HIGH MAXIMUM SHALL BE BEVELED WITH A SLOPE NOT STEEPER THAN 1:2. 303.4 RAMPS.CHANGES IN LEVEL GREATER THAN 1/2 INCH HIGH SHALL BE RAMPED. CHANGES IN LEVEL 2 1 BEVELVERTICAL 1/ 2 " M A X 1/ 4 " 1 / 4 " 1/ 4 " M A X 67-IN DIAMETER SPACE T-SHAPED SPACE FOR 180° TURNS 304 TURNING SPACE 304.2 FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES.CHANGES IN LEVEL ARE NOT PERMITTED. 304.3.1 CIRCULAR SPACE. THE TURNING SPACE SHALL BE A SPACE OF 67 INCHES DIAMETER MINIMUM. THE SPACE SHALL BE PERMITTED TO INCLUDE KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE. 304.3.2 T-SHAPED SPACE.A T-SHAPED SPACE THAT FITS WITHIN AN AREA 64 INCHES WIDE AND 60 INCHES DEEP, WITH TWO ARMS AND ONE BASE 40 INCHES M INIMUM IN WIDTH. EACH ARM SHALL EXTEND 12 INCHES MINIMUM FROM EACH SIDE OF THE BASE AND THE BASE SHALL EXTEND 20 INCHES MINIMUM FROM EACH ARM. THE SPACE SHALL BE PERMITTED TO INCLUDE KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE ONLY AT THE END OF EITHER THE BASE OR ONE ARM. 304.4 DOOR SWING.DOORS SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SWING INTO TURNING SPACES. 67 " M I N 67" MIN 40 " M I N MIN 20 " 12" MIN 40" 12" MIN 60 " M I N CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE 305 CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE 305.2 FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES. CHANGES IN LEVEL ARE NOT PERMITTED. 305.3 SIZE.THE CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE SHALL BE 30 INCHES MINIMUM BY 52 INCHES MINIMUM. 305.4 KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE.UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE SHALL BE PERMITTED TO INCLUDE KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE. 305.5 POSITION.UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE SHALL BE POSITIONED FOR EITHER FORWARD OR PARALLEL APPROACH TO AN ELEMENT. 305.6 APPROACH.ONE FULL UNOBSTRUCTED SIDE OF THE CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE SHALL ADJOIN AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OR ADJOIN ANOTHER CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE. 305.7 MANEUVERING CLEARANCE. WHERE A CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE IS LOCATED IN AN ALCOVE OR OTHERWISE CONFINED ON ALL OR PART OF THREE SIDES, ADDITIONAL MANEUVERING CLEARANCE SHALL BE PROVIDED. 305.7.1 PARALLEL APPROACH. ALCOVES SHALL BE 60 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM WHERE THE DEPTH EXCEEDS 15 INCHES. 305.7.2 FORWARD APPROACH.ALCOVES SHALL BE 36 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM WHERE THE DEPTH EXCEEDS 24 INCHES. 30 " 52" MANEUVERING CLEARANCE IN AN ALCOVE > 2 4 " 36" > 1 5 " 60" POSITION OF CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE 52 " 30" FORWARD PARALLEL 30 " 52" FORWARD PARALLEL 306 KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE 306.2 TOE CLEARANCE 306.2.1 GENERAL.SPACE UNDER AN ELEMENT BETWEEN THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND AND 9 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL BE CONSIDERED TOE CLEARANCE. 306.2.2 MAXIMUM DEPTH.TOE CLEARANCE SHALL EXTEND 25 INCHES (635 MM) MAXIMUM UNDER AN ELEMENT. 306.2.3 MINIMUM REQUIRED DEPTH.THE TOE CLEARANCE SHALL EXTEND 17 INCHES MINIMUM UNDER THE ELEMENT. 306.2.4 ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE.SPACE EXTENDING GREATER THAN 6 INCHES BEYOND THE AVAILABLE KNEE CLEARANCE AT 9 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED TOE CLEARANCE. 306.2.5 WIDTH.TOE CLEARANCE SHALL BE 30 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM. 306.3 KNEE CLEARANCE. 306.3.1 GENERAL.SPACE UNDER AN ELEMENT BETWEEN 9INCHES AND 27 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL BE CONSIDERED KNEE CLEARANCE. 306.3.2 MAXIMUM DEPTH.KNEE CLEARANCE SHALL EXTEND 25 INCHES MAXIMUM UNDER AN ELEMENT AT 9 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. 306.3.3 MINIMUM REQUIRED DEPTH.THE KNEE CLEARANCE SHALL BE 11 INCHES DEEP MINIMUM AT 9 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND, AND 8 INCHES DEEP MINIMUM AT 27 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. 306.3.4 CLEARANCE REDUCTION.BETWEEN 9 INCHES AND 27 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND, THE KNEE CLEARANCE SHALL BE PERMITTED TO REDUCE AT A RATE OF 1 INCH IN DEPTH FOR EACH 6 INCHES IN HEIGHT. 306.3.5 WIDTH.KNEE CLEARANCE SHALL BE 30 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM.KNEE CLEARANCE PLAN ELEVATION ELEVATION AT LAVATORY PLAN ELEVATION TOE CLEARANCE 17" TO 25" 30 " 6" MAX 9" 25" MAX 30 " 27 " M I N 11" MIN 9" M I N 8" MIN 11" MIN 9" M I N 29 " M I N 27 " M I N 8" MIN 307 PROTRUDING OBJECTS 307.2 PROTRUSION LIMITS.OBJECTS WITH LEADING EDGES MORE THAN 27 INCHES AND NOT MORE THAN 80 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL PROTRUDE 4 INCHES MAXIMUM HORIZONTALLY INTO THE CIRCULATION PATH. 307.3 POST-MOUNTED OBJECTS.FREE-STANDING OBJECTS MOUNTED ON POSTS OR PYLONS SHALL OVERHANG CIRCULATION PATHS 4 INCHES MAXIMUM WHEN LOCATED 27 INCHES MINIMUM AND 80 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. WHERE A SIGN OR OTHER OBSTRUCTION IS MOUNTED BETWEEN POSTS OR PYLONS AND THE CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN THE POSTS OR PYLONS IS GREATER THAN 12 INCHES, THE LOWEST EDGE OF SUCH SIGN OR OBSTRUCTION SHALL BE 27 INCHES MAXIMUM OR 80 INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. ≥ 8 0 " ≥ 2 7 " 4" MAX LIMITS OF PROTRUDING OBJECTS CLEAR FLOOR SPACE PARALLEL APPROACH HIGH AND LOW SIDE REACH LIMITSHIGH AND LOW FORWARD REACH LIMITCLEAR FLOOR SPACE FORWARD APPROACH 52" 30 " 48 " M A X MIN 15 " 48 " M A X MAX 20" 44 " M A X MAX >20"- 25"10" MAX 30" 52 " MIN 15 " 48 " M A X 10" MAX 48 " M A X 34 " M A X 34 " M A X MAX 24" 46 " M A X 308 REACH RANGES 308.2.1 FORWARD UNOBSTRUCTED REACH.THE HIGH FORWARD REACH SHALL BE 48 INCHES MAXIMUM AND THE LOW FORWARD REACH SHALL BE 15 INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. 308.2.2 FORWARD OBSTRUCTED HIGH REACH. THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL EXTEND BENEATH THE ELEMENT FOR A DISTANCE NOT LESS THAN THE REQUIRED REACH DEPTH OVER THE OBSTRUCTION. THE HIGH FORWARD REACH SHALL BE 48 INCHES MAXIMUM WHERE THE REACH DEPTH IS 20 INCHES MAXIMUM. WHERE THE REACH DEPTH EXCEEDS 20 INCHES,THE HIGH FORWARD REACH SHALL BE 44 INCHES MAXIMUM AND THE REACH DEPTH SHALL BE 25 INCHES MAXIMUM. 308.3.1 SIDE UNOBSTRUCTED REACH.THE HIGH SIDE REACH SHALL BE 48 INCHES MAXIMUM AND THE LOW SIDE REACH SHALL BE 15 INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. 308.3.2 SIDE OBSTRUCTED HIGH REACH.THE HEIGHT OF THE OBSTRUCTION SHALL BE 34 INCHES MAXIMUM AND THE DEPTH OF THE OBSTRUCTION SHALL BE 24 INCHES MAXIMUM. THE HIGH SIDE REACH SHALL BE 48 INCHES MAXIMUM FOR A REACH DEPTH OF 10 INCHES MAXIMUM. WHERE THE REACH DEPTH EXCEEDS 10 INCHES, THE HIGH SIDE REACH SHALL BE 46 INCHES MAXIMUM FOR A REACH DEPTH OF 24 INCHES MAXIMUM. 309 OPERABLE PARTS 309.2 CLEAR FLOOR SPACE.A CLEAR FLOOR OR GROUND SPACE SHALL BE PROVIDED. 309.3 HEIGHT.OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE PLACED WITHIN ONE OR MORE OF THE REACH RANGES SPECIFIED. 309.4 OPERATION. OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH ONE HAND AND SHALL NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST. THE FORCE REQUIRED TO ACTIVE OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE 5 POUNDS MAXIMUM. 10" MAX MINIMUM CLEAR WIDTH FOR SINGLE WHEELCHAIR MINIMUM CLEAR WIDTH FOR TWO WHEELCHAIRS CLEAR WIDTH AT 180° TURN 403 WALKING SURFACES 403.3 SLOPE.THE RUNNING SLOPE OF WALKING SURFACES SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:20.THE CROSS SLOPE OF WALKING SURFACES SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:48. 403.5.1 CLEAR WIDTH.EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN 403.5.2 AND 403.5.3, THE CLEAR WIDTH OF WALKING SURFACES SHALL BE 36 INCHES MINIMUM. 403.5.2 CLEAR WIDTH AT TURN. WHERE THE ACCESSIBLE ROUTE MAKES A 180 DEGREE TURN AROUND AN ELEMENT WHICH IS LESS THAN 48 INCHES WIDE, CLEAR WIDTH SHALL BE 42 INCHES MINIMUM APPROACHING THE TURN, 48 INCHES MINIMUM AT THE TURN AND 42 INCHES M INIMUM LEAVING THE TURN. EXCEPTION: WHERE THE CLEAR WIDTH AT THE TURN IS 60 INCHES MINIMUM COMPLIANCE WITH 403.5.2 SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED. 403.5.3 PASSING SPACES. AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE WITH A CLEAR WIDTH LESS THAN 60 INCHES SHALL PROVIDE PASSING SPACES AT INTERVALS OF 200 FEET MAXIMUM. PASSING SPACES SHALL BE EITHER: A SPACE 60 INCHES MINIMUM BY 60 INCHES MINIMUM; OR, AN INTERSECTION OF TWO WALKING SURFACES PROVIDING A T-SHAPED SPACE WHERE THE BASE AND ARMS OF THE T-SHAPED SPACE EXTEND 48 INCHES MINIMUM BEYOND THE INTERSECTION. 32 " M I N 32 " M I N 36 " M I N 36 " M I N 24" MAX 52" MIN 24" MAX ≥ 60" 60 " M I N 42 " M I N X 4 2 " M I N 48" MIN CLEAR WIDTH AT 180° TURN (EXCEPTION) NOTE: DIMENSIONS SHOWN APPLY WHEN X < 48 IN 60" MIN 36 " M I N X 3 6 " M I N NOTE: DIMENSIONS SHOWN APPLY WHEN X < 48 IN PATH CLEARANCES 702 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 702.1 GENERAL.FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS SHALL HAVE PERMANENTLY INSTALLED AUDIBLE AND VISIBLE ALARMS COMPLYING WITH NFPA 72 (1999 OR 2002 EDITION) (INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE, SEE "REFERENCED STANDARDS" IN CHAPTER 1), EXCEPT THAT THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SOUND LEVEL OF AUDIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES COMPLYING WITH SECTION 4-3.2.1 OF NFPA 72 (1999 EDITION) SHALL HAVE A SOUND LEVEL NO MORE THAN 110 DB AT THE MINIMUM HEARING DISTANCE FROM THE AUDIBLE APPLIANCE. IN ADDITION, ALARMS IN GUEST ROOMS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE COMMUNICATION FEATURES SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTIONS 4-3 AND 4-4 OF NFPA 72 (1999 EDITION) OR SECTIONS 7.4 AND 7.5 OF NFPA 72 (2002 EDITION). 703 SIGNS 703.1 GENERAL.WHERE BOTH VISUAL AND TACTILE CHARACTERS ARE REQUIRED, EITHER ONE SIGN WITH BOTH VISUAL AND TACTILE CHARACTERS, OR TWO SEPARATE SIGNS, ONE WITH VISUAL, AND ONE WITH TACTILE CHARACTERS, SHALL BE PROVIDED. 703.4.1 HEIGHT ABOVE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND.TACTILE CHARACTERS ON SIGNS SHALL BE LOCATED 48 INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACE, MEASURED FROM THE BASELINE OF THE LOWEST TACTILE CHARACTER AND 60 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACE, MEASURED FROM THE BASELINE OF THE HIGHEST TACTILE CHARACTERS. 703.4.2 LOCATION.THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ALONGSIDE THE DOOR AT THE LATCH SIDE. AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH ONE ACTIVE LEAF, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE INACTIVE LEAF. AT DOUBLE DOORS WITH TWO ACTIVE LEAFS, THE SIGN SHALL BE LOCATED TO THE RIGHT OF THE RIGHT HAND DOOR. WHERE THERE IS NO WALL SPACE AT THE LATCH SIDE OF A SINGLE DOOR OR AT THE RIGHT SIDE OF DOUBLE DOORS, SIGNS SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE NEAREST ADJACENT WALL. SIGNS CONTAINING TACTILE CHARACTERS SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE OF 18 INCHES MINIMUM BY 18 INCHES MINIMUM, CENTERED ON THE TACTILE CHARACTERS, IS PROVIDED BEYOND THE ARC OF ANY DOOR SWING BETWEEN THE CLOSED POSITION AND 45 DEGREE OPEN POSITION. 703.5 VISUAL CHARACTERS.VISUAL CHARACTERS SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 703.5. 703.6 PICTOGRAMS.PICTOGRAMS SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 703.6. 703.7 SYMBOLS OF ACCESSIBILITY.SYMBOLS OF ACCESSIBILITY SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 703.7. 703.7.2.1 INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY.THE SYMBOL SHALL COMPLY WITH FIGURE 703.7.2.1. 6" 6"6" 1'-0" 1/4" THICK 8" DIAMETER SIGNAGE CLEAR, GRADE II BRAILLE LO W E S T T A C T I L E T E X T 48 " M I N . T O B . O . HEIGHT OF TACTILE SIGN AT RESTROOM HIGHEST TACTILE TEXT 60 " M A X . T O B . O . SYMBOL PROPORTIONS -INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY 703.7.2.1 DISPLAY CONDITIONS -INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY FINISH FLOOR 404 DOORS, DOORWAYS, AND GATES 404.2.3 CLEAR WIDTH.DOOR OPENINGS SHALL PROVIDE A CLEAR WIDTH OF 32 INCHES MINIMUM. CLEAR OPENINGS OF DOORWAYS WITH SWINGING DOORS SHALL BE MEASURED BETWEEN THE FACE OF THE DOOR AND THE STOP, WITH THE DOOR OPEN 90 DEGREES. OPENINGS MORE THAN 24 INCHES DEEP SHALL PROVIDE A CLEAR OPENING OF 36 INCHES MINIMUM. THERE SHALL BE NO PROJECTIONS INTO THE REQUIRED CLEAR OPENING WIDTH LOWER THAN 34 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. PROJECTIONS INTO THE CLEAR OPENING WIDTH BETWEEN 34 INCHES AND 80 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SHALL NOT EXCEED 4 INCHES. 404.2.4 MANEUVERING CLEARANCES.MANEUVERING CLEARANCES SHALL EXTEND THE FULL WIDTH OF THE DOORWAY AND THE REQUIRED LATCH SIDE OR HINGE SIDE CLEARANCE. 404.2.7 DOOR AND GATE HARDWARE. HANDLES, PULL, LATCHES, LOCKS, AND OTHER OPERABLE PARTS ON DOORS AND GATES SHALL BE 34 INCHES MINIMUM AND 44 INCHES MAXIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND. 404.2.10 DOOR AND GATE SURFACES.SWINGING DOOR AND GATE SURFACES WITHIN 10 INCHES OF THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND MEASURED VERTICALLY SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH SURFACE ON THE PUSH SIDE EXTENDING THE FULL WIDTH OF THE DOOR OR GATE. PARTS CREATING HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL JOINTS IN THESE SURFACES SHALL BE WITHIN 1/16 INCH OF THE SAME PLANE AS THE OTHER. CAVITIES CREATED BY ADDED KICK PLATES SHALL BE CAPPED. CLEAR DOORWAY WIDTH FRONT APPROACHES -SWINGING DOORS PULL SIDE PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL 12" OF SPACE IF DOOR IS EQUIPPED WITH BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCHPUSH SIDE NOTE: 48" MIN IF DOOR HAS BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH HINGE SIDE APPROACHES -SWINGING DOORS LATCH SIDE APPROACHES -SWINGING DOORS ADD 6" AT EXTERIOR SIDE OF EXTERIOR DOOR PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE 32" MIN 60 " M I N MIN 18" MIN 24" 48 " M I N 12" MIN NO T E 44 " M I N 60 " M I N 60 " M I N NO T E 44 " M I N MIN 36" MIN 22" MIN 24" MIN 24" 405 RAMPS 405.2 SLOPE.RAMP RUNS SHALL HAVE A RUNNING SLOPE NOT STEEPER THAN 1:12. 405.3 CROSS SLOPE.CROSS SLOPE OF RAMP RUNS SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:48. 405.4 FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES.FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES OF RAMP RUNS SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 302. CHANGES IN LEVEL OTHER THAN THE RUNNING SLOPE AND CROSS SLOPE ARE NOT PERMITTED ON RAMP RUNS. 405.5 CLEAR WIDTH.THE CLEAR WIDTH OF A RAMP RUN AND, WHERE HANDRAILS ARE PROVIDED, THE CLEAR WIDTH BETWEEN HANDRAILS SHALL BE 36 INCHES MINIMUM. 405.6 RISE.THE RISE FOR ANY RAMP RUN SHALL BE 30 INCHES MAXIMUM. 405.7 LANDINGS.RAMPS SHALL HAVE LANDINGS AT THE TOP AND THE BOTTOM OF EACH RAMP RUN. 405.7.1 SLOPE. LANDINGS SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 302. CHANGES IN LEVEL ARE NOT PERMITTED. 405.7.2 WIDTH.THE LANDING CLEAR WIDTH SHALL BE AT LEAST AS WIDE AS THE WIDEST RAMP RUN LEADING TO THE LANDING. 405.7.3 LENGTH.THE LANDING CLEAR LENGTH SHALL BE 60 INCHES LONG MINIMUM. 405.7.4 CHANGE IN DIRECTION.RAMPS THAT CHANGE DIRECTION BETWEEN RUNS AT LANDINGS SHALL HAVE A CLEAR LANDING 60 INCHES MINIMUM BY 60 INCHES MINIMUM. 405.8 HANDRAILS.RAMP RUNS SHALL HAVE HANDRAILS COMPLYING WITH SECTION 505. 405.9 EDGE PROTECTION.EDGE PROTECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED ON EACH SIDE OF RAMP RUNS AND AT EACH SIDE OF RAMP LANDINGS. 405.9.2 CURB OR BARRIER.A CURB OR BARRIER SHALL BE PROVIDED THAT PREVENTS THE PASSAGE OF A 4 INCH DIAMETER SPHERE, WHERE ANY PORTION OF THE SPHERE IS WITHIN 4 INCHES OF THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACE. BOTTOM LANDING RAMP RUN RAMP RUN RAMP RUN TOP LANDING LANDING LANDING RAMP LANDINGS 60" MIN60" MIN72" MIN 36 " M I N 60 " M I N 60 " M I N 60" MIN CURB OR BARRIER EDGE PROJECTION < 4 " 406 CURB RAMPS, BLENDED TRANSITIONS AND ISLANDS 406.2 COUNTER SLOPE.COUNTER SLOPES OF ADJOINING GUTTERS AND ROAD SURFACES IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO THE CURB RAMP SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:20. THE ADJACENT SURFACES AT TRANSITIONS AT CURB RAMPS TO WALKS, GUTTERS, AND STREETS SHALL BE AT THE SAME LEVEL. 406.3 SIDES OF CURB RAMPS.WHERE PROVIDED, CURB RAMP FLARES SHALL NOT BE STEEPER THAN 1:10. 406.4 LANDINGS. LANDINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE TOPS OF CURB RAMPS. THE LANDING CLEAR LENGTH SHALL BE 36 INCHES MINIMUM. THE LANDING CLEAR WIDTH SHALL BE AT LEAST AS WIDE AS THE CURB RAMP, EXCLUDING FLARED SIDES, LEADING TO THE LANDING. 406.5 LOCATION.CURB RAMPS AND THE FLARED SIDES OF CURB RAMPS SHALL BE LOCATED SO THAT THEY DO NOT PROJECT INTO VEHICULAR TRAFFIC LANES, PARKING SPACES, OR PARKING ACCESS AISLES. CURB RAMPS AT MARKED CROSSINGS SHALL BE WHOLLY CONTAINED WITHIN THE MARKINGS, EXCLUDING ANY FLARED SIDES. FLARED SIDES 1:10 MAX SLOPE SLOPESLOPE 36 " M I N SIDES OF CURB RAMPS LANDINGS AT THE TOP OF CURB RAMPS AT LEAST AS WIDE AS CURB RAMP 502 PARKING SPACES 502.1 GENERAL.WHERE PARKING SPACES ARE MARKED WITH LINES, WIDTH MEASUREMENTS OF PARKING SPACES AND ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE MADE FROM THE CENTERLINE OF THE MARKINGS. 502.2 VEHICLE SPACES.CAR PARKING SPACES SHALL BE 96 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM AND VAN PARKING SPACES SHALL BE 132 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM, SHALL BE MARKED TO DEFINE THE WIDTH, AND SHALL HAVE AN ADJACENT ACCESS AISLE. EXCEPTION: VAN PARKING SPACES SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE 96 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM WHERE THE ACCESS AISLE IS 96 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM. 502.3 ACCESS AISLES SHALL ADJOIN AN ACCESSIBLE ROUTE.TWO PARKING SPACES SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SHARE A COMMON ACCESS AISLE. 502.3.1 WIDTH.ACCESS AISLES SERVING CAR AND VAN PARKING SPACES SHALL BE 60 INCHES WIDE MINIMUM. 502.3.2 LENGTH.ACCESS AISLES SHALL EXTEND THE FULL LENGTH OF THE PARKING SPACES THEY SERVE. 502.3.3 MARKING.ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE MARKED SO AS TO DISCOURAGE PARKING IN THEM. ADVISORY 502.3.3 MARKING.THE METHOD AND COLOR OF MARKING ARE NOT SPECIFIED BY THESE REQUIREMENTS BUT MAY BE ADDRESSED BY STATE OR LOCAL LAWS OR REGULATIONS. BECAUSE THESE REQUIREMENTS PERMIT THE VAN ACCESS AISLE TO BE AS WIDE AS A PARKING SPACE, IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE AISLE BE CLEARLY MARKED. 502.3.4 LOCATION.ACCESS AISLES SHALL NOT OVERLAP THE VEHICULAR WAY. ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE PLACED ON EITHER SIDE OF THE PARKING SPACE EXCEPT FOR VAN PARKING SPACES WHICH SHALL HAVE ACCESS AISLES LOCATED OTHER PASSENGER SIDE OF THE PARKING SPACES. 502.4 FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES.PARKING SPACES AND ACCESS AISLES SERVING THEM SHALL COMPLY WITH SECTION 302. ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE AT THE SAME LEVEL AS THE PARKING SPACES THEY SERVE. CHANGES IN LEVEL ARE NOT PERMITTED. 502.5 VERTICAL CLEARANCE.PARKING SPACES FOR VANS AND ACCESS AISLES AND VEHICULAR ROUTES SERVING THEM SHALL PROVIDE A VERTICAL CLEARANCE OF 98 INCHES MINIMUM. 502.6 IDENTIFICATION.PARKING SPACE IDENTIFICATION SIGNS SHALL INCLUDE THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY COMPLYING WITH 703.7.2.1. SIGNS IDENTIFYING VAN PARKING SPACES SHALL CONTAIN THE DESIGNATION "VAN ACCESSIBLE." SIGNS SHALL BE 60 INCHES MINIMUM ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACE MEASURED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SIGN. 502.7 RELATIONSHIP TO ACCESSIBLE ROUTES.PARKING SPACES AND ACCESS AISLES SHALL BE DESIGNED SO THAT CARS AND VANS, WHEN PARKED, CANNOT OBSTRUCT THE REQUIRED CLEAR WIDTH OF ADJACENT ACCESSIBLE ROUTES. NO PARKINGNO PARKINGINTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY IDENTIFICATION SIGN ACCESS AISLE TO BE MARKED INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY IDENTIFICATION SIGN ACCESS AISLE TO BE MARKED VAN 132" MIN AILSE 60" MIN CAR 96" MIN FU L L L E N G T H O F P A R K I N G S P A C E FULL LENGTH OF PARKING SPACEVAN132"CAR96"AISLE60" MINPERPENDICULAR PARKING ANGLED PARKING 505 HANDRAILS 505.4 HEIGHT. TOP OF GRIPPING SURFACES OF HANDRAILS SHALL BE 34 INCHES MINIMUM AND 38 INCHES MAXIMUM VERTICALLY ABOVE WALKING SURFACES, STAIR NOSINGS, AND RAMP SURFACES. HANDRAILS SHALL BE AT A CONSISTENT HEIGHT ABOVE WALKING SURFACES, STAIR NOSINGS, AND RAMP SURFACES. 505.10 HANDRAIL EXTENSIONS.HANDRAIL GRIPPING SURFACES SHALL EXTEND BEYOND AND IN THE SAME DIRECTION OF STAIR FLIGHTS AND RAMP RUNS. 505.10.1 TOP AND BOTTOM EXTENSION AT RAMPS.RAMP HANDRAILS SHALL EXTEND HORIZONTALLY ABOVE THE LANDING FOR 12 INCHES MINIMUM BEYOND THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF RAMP RUNS. EXTENSIONS SHALL RETURN TO A WALL, GUARD, OR THE LANDING SURFACE, OR SHALL BE CONTINUOUS TO THE HANDRAIL OF AN ADJACENT RAMP RUN. 505.10.2 TOP EXTENSION AT STAIRS.AT THE TOP OF A STAIR FLIGHT, HANDRAILS SHALL EXTEND HORIZONTALLY ABOVE THE LANDING FOR 12 INCHES MINIMUM BEGINNING DIRECTLY ABOVE THE FIRST RISER NOSING. EXTENSIONS SHALL RETURN TO A WALL, GUARD, OR THE LANDING SURFACE, OR SHALL BE CONTINUOUS TO THE HANDRAIL OF AN ADJACENT STAIR FLIGHT. 505.10.3 BOTTOM EXTENSION AT STAIRS.AT THE BOTTOM OF A STAIR FLIGHT, HANDRAILS SHALL EXTEND AT THE SLOPE OF THE STAIR FLIGHT FOR A HORIZONTAL DISTANCE AT LEAST EQUAL TO ONE TREAD DEPTH BEYOND THE LAST RISER NOSING. EXTENSION SHALL RETURN TO A WALL, GUARD, OR THE LANDING SURFACE, OR SHALL BE CONTINUOUS TO THE HANDRAIL OF AN ADJACENT STAIR FLIGHT. 34 " T O 3 8 " 34 " T O 3 8 " MIN 12" MIN 12" 34 " T O 3 8 " 34 " T O 3 8 " BEYOND, MIN. ONE TREAD DEPTH 34 " T O 3 8 " TOP & BOTTOM HANDRAIL EXTENSION AT RAMPS TOP & BOTTOM HANDRAIL EXTENSION AT STAIRS MIN 12" MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS G002 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 THIS TENANT SPACE IS REQUIRED TO BE ACCESSIBLE AS SET FORTH IN THE 2017 ICC ANSI A117.1 AND/OR 2010 ADA STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN. IN ADDITION TO ALL 2017 ICC ANSI A117.1 AND/OR 2010 ADA REQUIREMENTS, THIS FACILITY SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL JURISDICTION FOR ACCESSIBILITY AS LISTED BELOW. WHERE INFORMATION LISTED/SHOWN IN THIS SECTION CONFLICTS WITH RELEVANT INTERIOR ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES, THE MORE RESTRICTIVE OF THE REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE FOLLOWED. STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY 1.1 Contract Documents: A. Contractor shall use the following documents in the negotiation and execution of the Work. Contact Owner's office for copies of these documents: 1. Instructions to Bidders. 2. Construction Contract. A. Definitions: 1. The term "Owner" used in these documents refers to the building Owner. 2. The term "Tenant" used in these documents refer to the future restaurant Tenant. 3. The term "Contractor" used in these documents refers to the entity responsible for performing the W ork under Construction Contract for Owner. 1.2 Scope of Work: A. The Work shall include construction of the site and building facilities as shown and specified in these Specifications and Drawings. B. When required and necessary, the Owner will provide a subsurface exploration report as an attachment to the bidding documents. SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.1 Regulatory Requirements: A. Perform all work in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal building codes, plumbing codes, mechanical codes, electrical codes, ordinances and rules and regulations governing food service establishments. B. Comply with local, state and federal requirements governing accessibility. C. Obtain all required demolition and erosion control permits required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 Quality Control: A. Maintain quality control over manufacturers, suppliers, products, services, site conditions and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and applicable trade standards. C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and complying with specified requirements. 1. Request clarification from the Architect before proceeding, where manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Contract Documents. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work, except when more stringent tolerances, codes or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of the specified quality. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed, sized and installed to withstand stress, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. F. All dimensions shall be considered "hold-to" dim ensions unless indicated otherwise (e.g. minimum or maximum dimensions.) 1.3 Testing: A. Employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspections, tests and other services when required. B. Include inspection and tests as indicated in the specification sections, drawings, and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Test concrete in accordance with Section 03300 and drawing requirements. 2. Test structural steel in accordance with Section 05110 and drawing requirements. SECTION 01630 - SUBSTITUTIONS 1.1 General: A. Products, including materials, equipment and systems described in the Contract Documents establish the standards of required function, dimension, appearance, quality and performance of the Work. Base all bids on the "Standards" indicated. B. Requests by the Contractor for changes in products, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents are considered requests for "substitutions:" Substitutions will be considered only under the following conditions: 1. The indicated "Standard" cannot be provided within the Contract Time 2. The indicated "Standard" cannot receive necessary approval by the governing authority. 3. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit as determined by the Architect. SECTION 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.1 Coordination: A. Immediately inform the Architect of discrepancies between the information indicated in the Contract Documents and existing project conditions, and of discrepancies between information indicated on the architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical documents. B. Prior to fabrication and installation of new components, field verify all existing and new dimensions and installation conditions that may affect the Work. Do not scale the drawings to establish locations of items that are not located using dimensions. 1. All dimensions are to rough face of stud or centerline of structure, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Verify that all Subcontractors have reviewed and coordinated locations of their equipment and furnishings exposed to view with the architectural drawings. Review questions with the Architect. C. Coordinate new work indicated on the Contract Documents with new work that may be provided by the Owner and Tenant under separate contracts. D. Coordinate the work of Vendors, Contractors and Subcontractors providing fixtures, furniture and equipment identified as "by Owner" in these drawings and specifications. 1. Notify the Owner in timely fashion if any problems develop with the performance of these Vendors, Contractors or Subcontractors. E. Coordinate the scheduling, sequencing, and the work of all trades and Subcontractors to assure efficient and orderly sequences of installation of interdependent construction elem ents. F. Verify that the utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with the building utility services. Coordinate work of the various specification sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment. G. Coordinate the installation and physical space requirements of plumbing, mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on the drawings. Follow routing shown for piping, ducts and conduit as closely as practical. Install runs parallel with and perpendicular to the line of the building. Utilize spaces as efficiently as possible to maximize accessibility for other work installation and for maintenance and for repair. 1. Conceal piping, ducts and conduit within the construction, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Coordinate locations of registers, fixtures and outlets with finish elements. H. Coordinate completion and cleanup work of all trades and Subcontractors in preparation for Substantial Completion. I. To minimize disruption of Tenant's activities after Tenant occupancy of the property, coordinate access to the property with the Tenant's Construction Manager for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 Submittals: A. Only when indicated in the specifications or drawings, submit shop drawings, product data, and/or samples to the Architect, Design Manager, and Development Analyst for review. All submittals shall be made directly to the Architect by the general contractor. Only submittals for specified products will be accepted unless prior approval has been obtained for a substitution (refer to Section 01630). Shop drawings: Submit electronic copies of each sheet of drawings. Shop drawings are original drawings prepared by the subcontractor or vendor for the purpose of conveying information to the architect and/or engineer on how a building element or product will be constructed in sufficient detail for the architect and/or engineer to determine com pliance with the design intent. In all cases, one copy of the submittal shall be returned to the general contractor. Electronic submittals for shop drawing or product data in either PDF or DWF format are acceptable for review. All submittals, regardless of format, must bear the General Contractor's stamp indicating the submittal has been reviewed and approved. Any submittal not meeting the requirements set forth will be rejected by the Architect. Submittals shall be made with respect to the construction schedule to allow for adequate review time: allow (5) business days for review of submittals for any structural steel and trusses and allow (3) business days for review of submittals in all other divisions. Review timeline will commence from the time the submittal with General Contractor's approval stamp is received by the Architect, Design Manager, and Development Analyst. 1.3 Requests For Information A. In the event that the general contractor, or a subcontractor, at any tier, determines that some portion of the drawings, specifications, or other contract documents requires a clarification or interpretation by the architect, the general contractor shall submit a Request For Information in writing to the architect in an electronic copy. Requests for Information may only be submitted by the general contractor and may only be submitted to the architect. The general contractor shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed from the architect or the architect's consultants. In the Request for Information, the general contractor shall set forth an interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with an explanation of why such an understanding was reached. B. The architect will review all Requests for Information to determine whether they are Requests for Information within the meaning of this term. If the architect determines that the document is not a request for information, it will be returned to the general contractor, un-reviewed as to content, for re-submittal in the proper form and in the proper manner. Responses to Requests for Information shall be issued upon receipt, but no later than five (5) working days of receipt of the Request from the general contractor; unless the architect determines that a longer amount of time is necessary to provide an adequate response. If a longer amount of time is determined necessary by the architect, the architect will, within five (5) working days of receipt of the Request, notify the general contractor of the anticipated response time. If the general contractor submits a Request for Information on an activity with five (5) working days or less of float on the current project schedule the general contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension due to the time it takes the architect to respond to the Request provided that the architect responds within the parameters set forth above. C. Responses to Requests for Information from the architect will not change any requirements of the contract documents. In the event that the general contractor believes that a response to a Request For Information will cause a change to the requirements of the contract documents, the general contractor shall immediately give written notice to the architect and the Owner stating that the general contractor considers the response to be a Change Order. Failure to give such written notice immediately shall waive the general contractor's (or any subcontractor's) right to seek additional time or cost under the Administrative Requirements of these contract documents. SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.1 Provide temporary facilities and controls as shown and specified: A. Codes and Standards: Provide temporary construction facilities and controls complying with all applicable local, State and Federal local laws, regulations and codes and utility company requirements. B. Temporary Heating, Ventilating and Cooling: 1. Provide, pay for and maintain all temporary heating, ventilating and cooling equipment and facilities required during the progress of the work to protect materials, finished work, and equipment against damage from low and high temperatures and humidity. 2. Provide temporary heating, ventilating and cooling when the outside temperature and humidity is low/high enough to damage or affect in any way the performance or quality of material and product stored in the building, in any temporary storage area, or any material or product incorporated into the work. 3. Provide temporary heating, ventilating and cooling when the outside temperature and humidity is low/high enough to significantly slow or hamper effectiveness of workers and to provide suitable working conditions. C. Temporary Electrical Lighting and Power: 1. Provide, pay for and maintain all temporary electrical service for lighting and power required during the progress of the work. Include all necessary wiring, fuses, disconnect switches, safety devices, junction boxes, panels, ground fault protections, and transformer if required. Include cost for providing temporary electric generators in the Contract Sum, if temporary electric service is not available for use during progress of the work. 2. Temporary service and lighting and power items and installations shall conform to the requirements of the NFPA National Electric Code and OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. D. Water: Provide, pay for and maintain all temporary water required during the progress of the work. Include all necessary storage tanks, piping, valves, fittings, hose and hose connections during construction and testing. E. Temporary Toilets: Provide, pay for and maintain temporary toilet facilities for use by the Contractor, Contractor's employees and all Subcontractors and Subcontractors' employees. Comply with all local requirements for installation, use and maintenance of temporary toilet facilities. F. Barriers and Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary construction barriers in accordance with project requirements. Exercise all necessary precautions to protect adjacent properties, outside project contact limits, during progress of the work. Take special precautions to avoid damage to existing overhead and underground utilities and services owned or operated by the Owner or by public or private utility companies. 2. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosures at exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions and protection of materials and to allow for temporary heating, ventilating and cooling. G. Field Office, Telephone and Email: 1. Provide and maintain a temporary field office at the project site during progress of the work. A designated area within the existing building will be available for use as a temporary field office. Verify area size and location with the Owner. 2. Maintain copies of permits, approved shop drawings, specifications, addenda and record documents at field office. 3. Provide temporary telephone service and internet service with email and web camera capabilities to field office throughout progress of the work. 4. Provide weekly photographic documentation of project progression to Owner and Architect. H. Safety and Security 1. Provide and maintain all necessary safety provisions for protection and safety of the project work, workers and general public. 2. Provide and maintain operable fire extinguishing devices in well-marked, accessible locations throughout the project. Provide types, quantities and locations in compliance with governing codes and ordinances. 3. Provide all necessary security barriers and enclosures to protect the work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry of persons, vandalism and theft. Provide doors, when required, with self- closing hardware and locks. I. Cleaning 1. During Construction: Provide an approved on-site container for the use of all Contractors and Subcontractors for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. Remove crates and cartons in which materials, equipment, or fixtures are received to on-site containers daily. a. Maintain the property in a clean and orderly condition. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site on a daily basis and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. 2. Dust Control: a. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums and other similar closed or remote spaces prior to covering or enclosing the space. b. Sweep and vacuum clean interior surfaces before start of surface finishing and painting. Continue cleaning on an as- needed basis until finishing and painting is completed. c. Cleaning operations shall be acceptable to the Owner's Construction Manager. DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 1.1 General: Provide site construction work, including services, utilities, earthwork, paving and landscaping in accordance with the site construction work drawings and details. 2.1 Materials: A. Stencils for pavement markings: Pavement Stencil Company, P: (800) 250-5547, stencils@pavementstencil.com DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 General: Provide cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with the General Structural Notes, structural drawing and details. Follow shell building documents for specifications, joints and geotech. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following: 1. ACI 117 "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 2. ACI 301 "Structural Concrete for Buildings." 3. ACI 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting." 4. ACI 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting." 5. ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." 6. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2.1 Materials: A. Under Slab Vapor Retarder: Stego Industries LLC, 877-464-7834, internet www.stegoindustries.com high density polyethylene Stego Wrap (10 mil) Vapor Retarder meeting or exceeding ASTM E1745 performance criteria for Class C vapor retarders. 1. Stego Tape: High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Pipe boots: Shop or site fabricated from vapor retarder material and seam tape. 3. Stego Mastic: Medium-viscosity, water-based, polymer-modified, anionic bituminous/asphalt emulsion. 4. Stego Crete Claw: High density polyethylene tape and aperture film with pressure sensitive adhesive. 5. StegoTack Tape (double sided): Blend of synthetic rubber and resins. B. Concrete: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33. 3. Water: Clean and potable. 4. Reinforcement: When required, comply with drawings reinforcement requirements. 5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 3000 psi at 28 days. 6. Admixtures: All admixtures shall be approved by the Owner's Construction Manager prior to placement in the concrete mix. C. Topping Concrete: When required to suit installation conditions, Ardex Diama-Top of Ardex Engineered Cements (888) 512-7339, internet www.ardex.com 1. ULTRAFLOR ARDEX DIAMA-TOP, self-leveling concrete repair material. 2. Any pinholes that need to be filled shall be filled with ARDEX DIAMA-FILL filling compound for polished concrete, concrete terrazzo and other cementitious wear surfaces applied at the appropriate time during the polishing process. 3. The primer for areas to receive ARDEX DIAMA-TOP will be ARDEX EP 2000 Substrate Preparation Epoxy. 4. Installation shall be performed by factory-trained professional applicators in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.1 Installation A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect and repair vapor retarder sheets in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Provide a single layer of vapor retarder material over level compacted slab base. 2. Lap joints and seams 6 inches and seal with seam tape. 3. Seal all penetrations & perimeters, and repair damaged areas before concrete placement. B. Reinforcement: Place and inspect all reinforcing steel before concrete is placed. C. Concrete Placement: 1. Place cast-in-place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 305R and 306R recommended practices for hot weather and cold weather concreting. Do not place concrete when temperature is below 40 degrees F. 2. Wet cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, using moist curing or moisture-retaining covers. D. Finish: Except where additional floor finish is scheduled, provide a smooth steel trowel finish. 1. Exposed concrete used as a finish floor surface shall have a smooth finished surface, uniform in texture and appearance and free of trowel marks and other defects affecting ease of maintenance. 2. Grind smooth surface defects as directed by the Owner's Construction Manager. E. Testing: When required, comply with drawings and specification sections testing requirements. F. Topping Concrete: Prepare concrete floor slab substrate surfaces, prime substrate surfaces, mix, install and finish topping concrete in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions. SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 1.1 Preparation: A. Protection of existing construction: Use all necessary care and appropriate means and methods to protect and prevent damage to existing construction and property not part of the Contract Work. Repair and refinish or replace construction and property damaged during construction work, at Contractor's expense. 1.2 Selective Demolition: Provide selective demolition as shown and specified. A. Preparation: 1. Coordinate work of this Section with work of various Contractors and Owner's staff. 2. Maintain protected access at all times. 3. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures at exterior openings. 4. Erect and maintain dust-proof interior partitions to prevent spread of dust or fumes. 5. Erect and maintain barricades, enclosures, bracing, shoring, lights, warning signs and guards necessary for worker and public safety and protection of property. 6. Disconnect, remove and cap designated utility services. Identify and mark locations of disconnected and capped utilities at the project site and on Project Record Documents. 7. Notify and coordinate with the Owner's Construction Manager and the building Owner for any demolition occurring outside the lease limit. 8. Coordinate hours of operation and construction access with the Owner's Construction Manager and the building Owner. B. Selective Demolition 1. Remove existing construction to accommodate new construction as indicated. 2. Perform selective demolition in an orderly, systematic and careful manner with least possible disturbance to public and adjacent property. Use of explosives is prohibited. 3. Immediately remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials, except as indicated otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on the project site. 1.3 Cleaning A. Final Cleaning: Perform final cleaning upon completion of project work. 1. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, tools, equipment and temporary construction facilities from the site. 2. Clean exterior grounds; remove stains, spills and foreign materials from paved areas, power wash and sweep clean. Rake clean landscaped surfaces of the grounds. 3. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to remain. 4. Clean all finished surfaces. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from exposed interior and exterior surfaces. a. Clean all plumbing, fire protection and electrical fixtures and equipment including ceiling area elevated ductwork and lighting fixtures. b. Clean permanent equipment filters and replace temporary disposable filters in mechanical units used during construction. c. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if mechanical units were operated without filters during constructio n. 5. Clean interior and exterior glazing and mirrors, polish transparent and glossy surfaces and clean floors with appropriate materials and equipment. 6. Remove waste, foreign material and debris from roofs, areaways and drainage systems. 7. Before Tenant occupancy, conduct an inspection, with the Owner, of exposed interior and exterior surfaces at all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean. 1.4 Starting and Adjusting: A. Prior to Substantial Completion, coordinate the start-up, test and balance, placement in operation and adjustment all systems, controls and equipment to verify proper operation. All systems shall be complete and operating prior to final inspection. 1.5 Contract Closeout: A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit one operation and maintenance manual, bound in 8-1/2" x 11" text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. 1. Subdivide the binder contents internally with permanent dividers logically organized as described below. Provide tab titles clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. 2. Provide a table of contents with each product or system description identified. 3. Provide a directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the project Architect/Engine er, Contractor, Subcontractors and major equipment suppliers. 4. Prepare operations and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. Identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of project Subcontractors and suppliers. For each category, identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for each equipment item and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions for identifying detrimental agents. 5. Submit operations and maintenance data to the Owner with final application for payment in accordance with Exhibit C of the Construction Contract. B. Record/As Built Documents: 1. Prepare and maintain on site one set of the following record/as built documents: a. Contract Documents. b. Construction Documents. c. Change orders and other modifications to the Contract. d. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. e. Construction schedule. 2. Store record/as built documents separate from do cuments used for construction. 3. Record actual revisions to the Work, concurrently with construction progress. 4. Legibly mark and record a description of actual products installed at each specification section, including the following: a. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. b. Approved product substitutions or alternates utilized. c. Changes made by addenda, change orders, and other modifications. 5. Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including the following: a. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first main floor datum. b. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. c. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. d. Field changes of dimension and detail. e. Details not on original Contract Document drawings. 6. Submit record/as built documents to the Owner with final application for payment in accordance with Exhibit C of the Construction Contract. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. Compile warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents. 2. Submit duplicate copies of warranties and bonds to the Owner with final application for payment in accordance with Exhibit C of the Construction Contract. D. Maintenance Materials and Spare Parts: 1. Provide extra maintenance materials and spare parts in quantities indicated in the specification sections. 2. Place in location as directed by the Owner's Construction Manager. C. Submit each request for substitution to the Architect. Identify the product, manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, installer or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Identify related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide documentation as directed by the Architect. D. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate written request, when requested directly by subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of the Contract Documents. E. Substitute products, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, and installers shall not be used for the Project without Tenant and Architect's written acceptance. DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 1.1 General: Provide unit masonry assemblies as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following: 1. ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02 "Specifications for Masonry Structures." 2. NCMA "TEK Bulletins." 3. BIA "Technical Notes on Brick Construction." 2.1 Materials: A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Size and thickness as shown on drawings. 1. ASTM C 90, load-bearing, normal weight, natural color CMU, properly cured at time of delivery, linear shrinkage not to exceed 0.065%. 2. Provide special shapes where required. 3. Provide exterior wall CMU containing an integral polymeric water-repellent admixture. a. Manufacturer: W. R. Grace "Dry-BlockR System Block Admix " B. Brick: 1. Manufacturer: a. Endicott, (402) 729-3315, www.endicott.com (Iron Spot Brick), or as approved by architect b. Belden Brick Company, (330) 451-2031, www.beldenbrick.com (White Brick), or as approved by architect 2. Type: a. "Face Brick C216" complying with ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBS. No efflorescence when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. b. "Thin Brick" complying with ASTM C1088. No efflorescence when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. 3. Size: Modular size, laying three courses to 8" vertically. 4. Color: "Alaska White Veloour" or "Manganese Ironspot, Velour" as noted on Exterior Elevations a. Provide special shapes where required. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS G010 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 D. Masonry Veneer Walls: 1. Metal framed walls: Tie exterior masonry veneer wythe to back-up wall with individual metal ties screwed to metal stud framing. 2. Space ties 16" on center vertically and horizontally. 3. Maintain veneer wall cavity free of mortar droppings during masonry installation. E. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units: Install ACMU in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and the following: 1. Draw ACMU from more than one pallet at a time during installation. F. Reinforced Concrete Masonry 1. Reinforce and fill CMU/ACMU wall and column masonry where indicated. Fill all cores solid with concrete fill. Comply with NCMA TEK Bulletins 3-2, 3-3A and 14-2 recommendations. a. Comply with drawing details for reinforcing steel size and spacing. 2. Install bond beams where indicated. Reinforce and fill units solid with concrete fill. Comply with drawing details for reinforcing steel size and spacing. G. Repair, Pointing and Cleaning 1. In process cleaning: Wipe off excess mortar as the work progresses. Dry brush with bristle brushes exposed masonry at the end of each day's work. Remove mortar spatters and joint ridges. 2. Clean all exposed masonry. Cleaning agents subject to Architect's approval. Before applying any cleaning agent to the entire wall, clean a sample wall area of approximately 20 square feet in a location acceptable to the Architect. Do not proceed with final cleaning until the sample area has been allowed to dry a minimum of 3 days and the test area cleaning approved. Protect all windows, doors, louvers, metal lintels and other corrodible parts. Damaged materials and work replaced at Contractor's expense. 3. Dry clean exposed surfaces to remove large particles of mortar using hardwood wood paddles and scrapers. Metal tools not acceptable. 4. Presoak exposed masonry surfaces by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. 5. Apply cleaning solutions and clean masonry in accordance with the cleaning material manufacturer's cleaning instructions. 6. Muriatic acid cleaning of masonry not permitted. H. Architectural Concrete Masonry: 1. Keep ACMU walls clean during installation. Remove excess mortar on daily basis using brushes, rags or burlap squares. 2. Clean completed walls with detergent masonry cleaner recommended by the ACMU manufacturer. Acid cleaning agents, abrasive cleaners, tools or powders and metal cleaning tools and brushes are not permitted. 3. After final clean down and when walls are dry, apply ACMU acrylic finish coating in accordance with ACMU manufacturer's application instructions. C. Mortar Materials: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or III, natural color. 2. Masonry cement: ASTM C91, Type indicated, natural color. 3. Aggregate: ASTM C144, clean masonry sand. 4. Water: Clean, fresh and potable. 5. Provide all exterior wall masonry mortar containing an integral polymeric water-repellent admixture. a. Manufacturer W. R. Grace, "Dry-Block Integral Water-Repellent Mortar Admixture" D. Unit Masonry Mortar Mixes: ASTM C270 proportions by volume. 1. Face brick: Type N mortar. 2. Dye: a. SGS #60A "White" by Solomon Grind Services (White) b. SM #750 "Silverstone" by Spec Mix (Iron Spot) E. Reinforced Unit Masonry Grout Mixes 1. Concrete fill: ASTM C94 3,000 psi concrete. F. Joint Reinforcement, Wall Ties And Anchors: Finish, ASTM A-153 hot-dip galvanized 1. Manufacturer: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2. Horizontal joint reinforcement: Welded ladder type with matching corners and Tee units. a. Single Wythe masonry: 220 Ladder Mesh, standard, single 9 gauge side and cross rods. 3. Anchoring devices: Provide strap anchors, inserts, bolts and rods of type and size indicated. a. CMU to CMU: Strap anchors 1/4" x 1-1/4" x 24" steel with bent ends. b. CMU to structural steel: VBT Vee Byna-Tie with plain steel weld-on anchor rods to receive anchors. 4. Masonry veneer to cold-formed metal framing: DW10-HS Anchor Plate, with adjustable 3/16" cold-drawn steel wire tie sections and 14 gauge screw-on attachment plate. a. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws, 1-1/4" x #10, corrosion-resistant coated. Provide two screw fasteners for each attachment plate. 5. Seismic masonry veneer to cold-formed metal framing: When required, HB-213 w/HB-213S (T-Lok Tie) 14 gauge screw-on Seismic Anchor Plates with 12 gauge Seismic Pintels and 9 gauge Pencil Rods. a. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws, 1-1/4" x #10, corrosion-resistant coated. Provide two screw fasteners for each attachment plate. G. Concealed Masonry Through-Wall Flashing: W. R. Grace "Perm-A-Barrier" self-adhering modified bituminous sheet, 40 mils thick. 1. Termination Mastic: W.R. Grace "Bituthene Mastic." 2. Primer: W.R. Grace "Bituthene P-300 Primer." 3. Termination bars: Extruded aluminum or stainless steel, 1" wide and .098" thick pre-punched at 6" on center, secured with stainless steel drive pins. H. Accessories 1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed billet steel bars of sizes indicated. 2. Wall weeps: QV Quadro-Vent, clear flexible polypropylene co-polymer. 3. Compressible joint material: NS - Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge. 4. Bond breaker strips: ASTM D226 No. 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt. 5. Cleaning agents: a. Face Brick and CMU: ProSoCo, Inc., "Sure Klean New Masonry Cleaners." b. ACMU: ProSoCo, Inc., "Sure Klean Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner." 6. Expansion/Control joint sealants: Polyurethane-based, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920 and Section 07900 requirements. Color matched to adjacent surfaces. 3.1 Installation A. Preparation 1. Wet absorbent face brick masonry units requiring wetting, in accordance with BIA recommendations. 2. Lay concrete masonry units dry. 3. Establish, lines, levels and coursing. Ensure ties, anchors and flashing are correctly installed 4. Mix mortar cementitious materials and aggregate in a mechanical mixer. Add water in amount to provide satisfactory workable consistency of mortar. Retemper mortar as required within two hours of mixing to replace water lost be evaporation. Discard mortar after two and one-half hours of initial mixing. Do not use mortar after it has started to set. B. Installation - General: 1. Build walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown. 2. Cut masonry units using motor-driven masonry saws to provide clean, sharp edges. Cut units to fit adjoining work neatly. Provide 100% solid units where cores would be exposed. 3. Cold weather construction, hot weather construction, and masonry construction tolerances: Comply with unit masonry standard ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 requirements. C. Laying Masonry 1. Layout walls in advance to ensure accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths, and to properly locate openings, movement type joints, returns and offsets. Do not use less than half-size units at corners, jambs and other locations. 2. Lay up walls plumb and true to comply with ACI 530.1 tolerances. Provide square corners and angles, except as otherwise indicated, with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. 3. Pattern bond: Running bond. Do not use units with less than 4" of horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 4. Lay hollow CMU/ACMU with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed CMU webs in mortar in starting courses. Maintain uniform 3/8" joint widths. 5. Lay face brick and solid CMU/ACMU with completely filled bed and head joints. Do not slush head joints. Maintain uniform 3/8" joint widths. 6. Install thin brick in accordance with BIA Technote 28C or appropriate industry standards. Reference system manufacturer's printed instructions, approved submittals and in proper relationship with adjacent construction. 7. Compress and cut joints flush for masonry walls below grade or covered by other materials. 8. Tool joints in all exposed masonry work to a concave joint. 9. Provide interlocking masonry bond in each course at corners and intersecting walls. 10. As the work progresses, build in masonry accessories and related items. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. a. Bed hollow metal frame anchors in mortar and fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solid with fine mortar grout. b. Provide solid masonry bearing for all lintels, beams, joists, plates and load-bearing members. c. Take particular care to embed all conduits and pipes within concrete masonry without fracturing exposed shells and to fit units around switch, receptacle and other boxes set in walls. Where electric conduit, outlets, switch boxes and similar items occur, grind and cut units before building in services. d. Install anchors, plates and related work built into masonry work. e. Install reinforcing steel and concrete fill where indicated. Comply with drawing details. 11. Horizontal joint reinforcing: Provide continuous joint reinforcing at all concrete masonry walls as follows: a. In every second block course, 16" on center vertically, full height of wall and every block course where shown on the drawings. b. Lap reinforcement a full width at the corners and at intersections or use special fabricated sections. c. Fully embed side rods in mortar. 12. Anchoring masonry work: Provide anchoring devices of the type indicated or required. 13. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where indicated. a. When not indicated, at maximum 30'-0" on center. b. Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in masonry and acceptable to Architect. c. Joint sealant color shall match masonry materials sealed. 14. Lintels: Install loose steel lintels furnished under structural steel work where shown. Set lintels in full bed of mortar. 15. Flashing and weeps: a. Install concealed through wall masonry flashing at all wall sills, masonry openings in exterior walls with masonry above head, over all horizontal steel members built into masonry and elsewhere as indicated. Provide "drainage wall system" masonry construction. b. Provide end dams and positive slope to drain. Extend flashing vertically at least 8" and built into or anchor to back-up with a termination bar for a complete watertight installation. c. Flexible Membrane Flashing: 1. Install membrane flashing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Fully adhere flashing to substrate. 3. Lap flashing joints a minimum of 6", seal and roll with a hand roller. 4. Trim bottom edge 1/4" back from exposed face of masonry. 5. Seal edges, seams, cuts and penetrations with manufacturer's recommended mastic. 16. Install weeps in head joints of final course of exterior masonry wythe above flashing. Space weeps maximum of 24" on center horizontally and located to avoid door openings. Install weeps at head joints with outside face of weep material held 1/8" from the finish face of masonry unit. 17. Install compressible joint material at lintels and horizontal steel members. Build in joint fillers and seal with elastomeric joint sealant. DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.1 General: Provide structural steel in accordance with the General Structural Notes and structural drawings and details. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following: 1. AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." 2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice." 3. AWS "Structural Welding Code, D1.1-Steel." 2.1 Materials: A. Materials compliance: When requested, submit acceptable data documenting materials compliance for each type of material required. B. Structural Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, 36 ksi steel. C. Tubular Steel: ASTM A500, 46 ksi yield strength steel, cold-formed welded and seamless. D. Structural pipe: ASTM A53, type and grade selected by the fabricator as required for design loading, standard finish, standard weight (Schedule 40) except as otherwise indicated. E. Grout: ASTM C1107, pre-mixed, shrinkage resistant, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout. F. Shop paint primer: Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. G. Fabrication: Fabricate structural steel in acco rdance with AISC "Specification - Structural Steel for Buildings" and "Code of Standard Practice." Provide welded or bolted connections in accordance with the Structural Drawings co nnection requirements. 1. Welding: Conform to AWS welding standards. Provide only continuous welds, spot welding is not acceptable. Grind all exposed welds smooth. 2. Splicing: Material, if spliced, shall have maxim um one splice per structural member. Perform splicing by full penetration butt-welding using AWS qualified welders and welding methods. 3. Shop painting: Shop paint structural metal members, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded and galvanized surfaces. Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. 3.1 Installation: A. Erection: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC "Specification - Structural Steel for Buildings" and "Code of Standard Practice". 1. Plumb, level and align base plates for structural members with steel shims. 2. Grout structural steel base plates solid that bear on concrete or masonry surfaces. B. Testing: When required, comply with drawings testing requirements. SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 1.1 General: Provide cold-formed metal framing in accordance with the General Structural Notes and structural drawings and details. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following: 1. AISI SG02.2-01 "Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. AWS "Structural Welding Codes, D1.3-Sheet Steel." 2.1 Materials: A. Materials compliance: When requested, submit acceptable data documenting materials compliance for each type of material required. B. Load-Bearing Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM A1003, Gauge, Grade and Type indicated. 1. Components: Provide sizes and shapes indicated. 2. Finish: Galvanized complying with ASTM A653, minimum G60 coating. C. Fabrication: 1. Cold-formed metal framing may be prefabricated into panels before erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. a. Provide one-piece full-length cold-formed metal framing members. Splicing not permitted. 2. Attach and join other components by welding or screw fasteners, as indicated. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted. 3. Cut framing to fit squarely for attachment to perpendicular members or as required for angular fit against abutting members. Hold members securely in position until properly fastened. 4. Saw cut field cut framing. Torch cutting not acceptable. 3.1. Installation: A. Erection: Erect cold-formed metal framing members of gauge and at spacing indicated on the Structural Drawings. Align and secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by welding or screw fasteners at both inside and outside flanges. B. Tolerance Acceptance: Install cold-formed metal framing member as indicated on the plans. Install to 1/16" tolerance. SECTION 06210 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 1.1 General: Provide finish carpentry and millwork as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following: 1. AWI "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards - 1999." B. Doors and door hardware: Install all door hardware furnished under Division 8 specification Sections. C. Submit shop drawings for designated millwork. 1. Include complete details, materials lists and drawings showing fabrication of typical units, unit assemblies, locations and installation details. 2. List proposed cabinet hardware to suit indicated unit use or function. 3. Identify materials required to complete work ready for installation. 4. Obtain shop drawing approval before starting fabrication. 2.1 Materials: A. Plywood: AWI Section 200 1. Concealed use substrates: CDX, D-3 Paint Grade hardwood plywood, with aspen veneer core, 5/8" thick. (OSB only allowed as an alternate by CM) 2. Exposed to view finishes: Random plank matched or slip and swing matched spalted maple veneer on 3/4" Baltic birch core, with mill option sound grade hardwood backer. Spalted maple grain to run horizontally .5 sheen matte clear waterborne finish. Panels to be provided at 47" height, with widths varying from 24" to 95". B. Millwork: Materials and construction as detailed on the Drawings. C. Fabrication: 1. Millwork design and fabrication details shown on the drawings indicate design intent. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard fabrication methods. Indicate all proposed variations from the drawing design and fabrication details on shop drawings. 2. Fabricate millwork in accordance with AWI "Custom Grade" requirements. Where details are not shown, comply with applicable Quality Standards or with alternate details acceptable to Architect as fabricator's option. 3. Fabricate finished work properly framed, closely fit and accurately set to required lines and levels and rigidly secured in place. 4. Fabricate work straight, plumb, level and in true alignment; neatly and accurately fit, scribed and thoroughly secured. Plane and sand miters and other joints. Ease all square edges. Provide millwork clean and free from warp, twist, open joints and other defects. 5. Provide finished woodwork dressed and sanded fre e from machine and tool marks, abrasions, raised grain or other defects on surfaces exposed to view in finished work. D. Finish: Sayerlack Hydroplus Waterborne Clear, 5 sheen. 3.1 Installation A. Install finish carpentry and millwork products plumb, level, true and straight with no distortion. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including countertops) and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry and millwork products to fit adjoining work. 2. Anchor finish carpentry and millwork items to built-in place blocking, furnished under Section 06100, or directly attach to substrate framing. Secure to grounds, blocking and nailers with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. 3. For installation of prefinished millwork wall panels, use finish nails for exposed nailing, installed with pneumatic nailer as per the following guidelines: a. Nailer to be set for countersunk head approximately 1/8" on the face. b. Use 16 ga straight finish nails in 2" length c. Provide "dab" of construction adhesive on backside of panels at regular intervals. d. Random placement preferred, do NOT group nails together. e. No nails closer than 2" from any edge. f. All nails to be no greater than 16-18" apart in any direction. 4. Touch-up shop finished plywood materials marred or damaged during delivery, storage and installation with custom blended polyurethane to equal Minwax "Wipe on Poly". B. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. C. Install plastic laminate countertops, shelving and trim. Provide work level, true to alignment, accurately fit to wall conditions and securely fastened to base units and other support systems as indicated. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION 1.1 General: Provide building insulation as shown and specified. 2.1 Materials: A. Extruded polystyrene foam rigid board insulation: Dow Chemical Co., 866-583-2583, internet www.dowbuildingmaterials.com 1. Type: Dow "Styrofoam" Type IV, 1.6 pcf minimum density, 25 psi compressive strength complying with ASTM C 578, R- value equal 5 per inch of thickness. Provide lengths and widths as required to coordinate with space insulated. 2. Perimeter foundation walls: Styrofoam SE, R-value equal 5 per inch of thickness. B. Glass fiber batt/blanket insulation: Owens Corning Corp., (800) 438-7465, internet www.owenscorning.com. 1. Type: Owens Corning " Thermal Batt" Type I unfaced glass fibers and binders formed into flexible blankets or batts complying with ASTM C665. Provide lengths and widths required to coordinate with spaces insulated. 2. Exterior walls: Unfaced, R-21 minimum value A. Vapor barrier membrane: Polyethylene, minimum 6 mils thick, complying with ASTM D 4397, maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. 1. Joint tape: Pressure sensitive tape designed fo r sealing joints and penetrations of above and below grade vapor barrier sheets. 2. Mounting tape: Double-faced pressure sensitive tape suitable for mounting vapor barriers to steel framing. 3.1 Installation: A. General: 1. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for conditions of installation indicated. Install insulation in single layer of required thickness over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions. Fill all voids. 2. Install exterior wall insulation continuous behind electrical boxes, conduit, piping and ductwork. B. Foundation perimeter walls and slabs: 1. Install rigid foam insulation vertically from top of slab to frost line and horizontally under slabs, extending a minimum 36" in from exterior walls. 2. Protect insulation from displacement and damage during backfilling and slab placement. C. Exterior Walls: 1. Install batt/blanket insulation full height at exterior wall framing. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members and provide a friction fit between edges of insulation and metal framing members. 2. Provide galvanized wire mesh or metal strapping to provide supplementary support when required to maintain insulation in permanent proper location. D. Vapor Barriers: 1. Install a single layer of vapor barrier membrane over the interior of exterior metal wall framing after installation of insulation. Secure with double faced tape at wall framing. 2. Provide single unspliced material height. Horizontal joints not acceptable. Minimize vertical joints. Lap vertical joints and secure in place with joints taped. Provide tape sealed contact with door frames, window frames, piping, conduit, ductwork, registers and the vapor barrier. 3. Seal all cuts and penetrations of vapor barrier membrane with tape before installing surface finishes. SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 1.1 General: Provide metal fabrications as shown and specified. A. Submit shop drawings for the following: 1. Patio Rail systems. a. Show thickness, size, construction and manner of assembling various members, joint locations and railing layout. b. Show true profiles, connections and relationship to adjoining work and methods of anchoring. 2.1 Materials A. Materials compliance: When requested, submit acceptable data documenting materials compliance for each type of material required. B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, 36 ksi steel. C. Stainless Steel: 1. Wall: 18 gauge, ASTM A167, AISI Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish. D. Patio Railing System 1. Submit shop drawings including the following: a. Show thickness, size, construction and welding, as well as assembly drawings. b. Show true profiles, connections of all typical joint configurations c. Show installation (fastening) and proposed grout (non-gypsum base) d. Show gate detail and gate hardware manufacturer and model number e. Patio railing plan, with dimensions and panel assembly locations. 2. Fabrication a. Patio rails and gate shall be fabricated from steel flat bar, 3/8" x 2 1/2", grade A36. b. Corner connector angles shall be 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" x 1/4" steel L angle. c. Gate hinges shall be a self-closing, adjustable tension type. Hinge installation shall be drilled and tapped. Permanently welded are unacceptable. d. Gate stop shall have a rubber cushion stop and be affixed to the active gate. e. All corners and joints shall be seal welded and outside joints ground smooth. f. All welding spatter shall be removed before sand blasting. 3. Finish a. Patio railing shall be painted PPG Durethane, color 518-6 Knight's Armor. Refer to Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings for preparation. E. Exposed Fasteners: 1. Patio Railing: a. All fasteners shall be stainless steel and powder coated to match railing sections. b. Spacer washers separating railing sections shall be 1 1/2" diameter and 1/2" thick they shall be one piece thick washers and not comprised of stacking washers c. Spacer washers shall be used on all straight sections and when railing panels join at 90 degree corner angles. F. Shop paint primer: Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings 3.1 Installation: Comply with the Architectural Drawing details and the following: A. Exposed Fasteners: 1. Flat Metal Panels: Provide 18" vertical and horizontal pattern or spaced equally if 18" pattern does not finish evenly. Exposed fasteners shall remain unpainted in natural factory supplied finish. B. Stainless Steel: 1. Wall: a. Clean stainless steel panel with mineral spirits. b. Install stainless steel panels with Henry 117 oil based adhesive applied to wall with 1/8" notch tooth trowel. c. Trim seams as indicated on the Drawings. No exposed fasteners. C. Patio Railing System: 1. Railing posts shall be set 6" deep into a core drilled hole, 4"-6" diameter 2. Railing posts shall be grouted in using non gypsum quick set grout. 3. Railing posts shall be set in grout plumb and level, with a tolerance of 1/8" in 4 feet. D. Hand-inspect all joints and edges of installed metal materials. Unless otherwise indicated, fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Grind and ease exposed joints, and edges smooth and free of burrs. DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.1 General: Provide rough carpentry work as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following: 1. NIST PS-1-95 "Construction and Industrial Plywood." 2. NIST PS-2-95 "Performance Standards for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels." 3. NIST PS-20-99 "American Softwood Lumber Standard." 4. NF&PA NDS-97 "Wood Construction and Supplement." 5. AWPA "Wood Treatment Standards." 2.1 Materials: A. Lumber: Factory grade-marked, dressed, seasoned dimension lumber, S4S, air-dried, maximum 19% moisture content complying with PS-20, dimensions indicated. 1. Blocking, nailers and similar members: Standard Grade Western Dimension Lumber or Southern Pine species. a. Provide preservative treated lumber, where indicated. B. Plywood: Factory grade-marked, complying with PS-1, square edge, 5/8" thick. 1. APA-RATED SHEATHING EXP1 a. Provide Exterior Grade (EXT) plywood, where indicated. b. Provide fire-retardant treated plywood, where required by Building Code. 2.2 Wood Treatment: A. Preservative Treatment: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber). 1. Pressure preservative treat lumber with water-borne preservatives, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. 2. Treat wood blocking, nailers and similar members in connection with roofing and flashing. 3. Treat wood plates, blocking, furring and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C27 (Plywood). Identify "fire-retardant- treated plywood" with appropriate UL classification marking. 1. Treated materials shall meet "Interior Type A" FR-S ratings of not more than 25 for flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed when tested in accordance with UL 723 or ASTM E84, with no increase in flame spread and evidence of significant progressive combustion upon continuation of test for additional 30 minutes. C. Kiln-dry all treated lumber and plywood materials after treatment to maximum 15% moisture content. 3.1 Installation: A. Lumber: Provide wood blocking, nailers and similar members where shown and where required for attachment of other work and surface applied items. Attach to substrate as required to support applied loading. 1. Use only sound, seasoned materials of longest practical lengths and sizes to minimize joints. 2. Use materials free of warp. Make tight connections between members. NOT USED MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS G011 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 SECTION 07240 -EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (PB) 1.1 General: Provide the exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following: 1. EIMA (EIFS Industry Members Association) Standards and Publications. a. 101.01, 101.02, 101.03, 101.86, 105.01, 200.02. b. EIMA "Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation board." B. Quality Assurance: 1. System components: a. Produced by a single manufacturer or by manufacturers approved by the EIFS system manufacturer. b. Fire performance: Flame spread of 25 or less, smoke developed of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Installer Qualifications: Performed by the system manufacturer or an applicator trained and approved by the system manufacturer. C. Environmental conditions: Comply with manufacturer's requirements. Do not install materials during wet or freezing weather. 2.1 Materials A. Manufacturer: STO Corp., (800) 221-2397, internet www.stocorp.com Strategic Accounts Manager: Ray Redmond, P: (616) 437-2230, rredmond@stocorp.com B. Exterior insulation and finish system: Sto Class PB "StoTherm CI" EIFS. 1. Air/Moisture barrier: Sto Guard system. a. Sto RapidGuard for rough opening protection, sheathing joints and inside and outside corners. b. Sto Guard Mesh: Coated glass fiber fabric reinforcing mesh. c. Sto Gold coat: Waterproof Fluid Applied Air/Moisture Barrier 2. Primer/adhesive and base coat: Sto Primer/Adhesive-B, one-component, polymer modified, cement-based factory blended primer/adhesive used to attach insulation board to prepared sheathing substrates and as a base coat in Essence claddings. 3. Insulation board: ASTM C578 Type 1, nominal 1.0 lb/ft³ expanded polystyrene meeting EIMA Guideline specifications for EPS insulation board. 4. Finish coating: Sto Essence DPR, ready-mixed 100% acrylic-based, textured wall coating. a. Fine Sand Finish. b. Color as indicated on the Architectural drawings from manufacturer's full color range or match custom color. 5. System warranty: 10 year labor and material. C. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, white or gray in color. D. Water: Clean, potable and free of foreign matter. E. Reinforcing mesh: Sto open-weave glass fiber fabric with alkaline resistant coating. 1. Standard mesh: Sto Mesh, nominal 4.5 oz/yd² fabric. 2. Ultra-High impact mesh: Sto Armor Mat, nominal 15 oz/yd² ultra-high impact fabric. 3. Specialty mesh: a. Sto Detail Mesh, nominal 4.2 oz/yd² flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric. b. Sto Corner Mat, nominal 7.8 oz/yd² pre-creased, heavy-duty, glass fiber fabric. F. Joint sealants: Polyurethane base elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920 and Section 07900 requirements. 1. Adhesion: Evaluated in accordance with ASTM C1382. 2. Color: Matching EIFS finish coating color, and visually acceptable to the Architect. G. Accessories: Provide plastic stops and trim where indicated. Materials shall be compatible with EIFS materials and acceptable to EIFS manufacturer. 1. Starter Track: Rigid PVC plastic track with weepholes and drip edge. 3.1 Mixing A. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Mix with a clean, rust-free high speed mixer to a uniform consistency. 2. No rapid binder, anti-freeze or accelerator additives permitted. 4.1 Installation A. Preparation: 1. Coordinate installation of roofing membrane, windows, doors and other wall penetrations to provide a continuous exterior wall air/moisture barrier. 2. Coordinate installation of windows, doors and window and door flashing to provide a continuous exterior wall air/moisture barrier. 3. Install copings and joint sealants immediately after installation of the EIFS, when EIFS coatings are dry. B. Installation: Install Sto Guard air/moisture barrier system and exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, complying with governing regulations and industry standards applicable to the work. 1. Back wrap exposed board edges with mesh. 2. Provide double wrap or corner mat reinforcing at all inside and outside corners. 3. Provide expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrates and systems required, and visually acceptable to the Architect. 4. Provide drainable starter track horizontal edge trim as base of wall, above windows and doors openings and beneath windows with concealed flashing. C. Insulation and adhesive application: 1. Install insulation board with long edge horizontal using running bond pattern. Off set insulation joints with substrate joints. Stagger joints and interlock joints at corners. 2. Apply adhesive to insulation board with a stainless steel trowel notched trowel, providing vertical uniform ribbons of adhesive when board is installed. Mount insulation board on substrate. Level, align and tamp insulation in place. Provide uniform contact and bond with joints tightly butted. Rasp edges and high areas as required to produce a level, lane surface. D. Base coat and reinforcing mesh application: 1. Apply detail mesh at corners of windows, doors, and all penetrations through the EIFS. 2. Standard mesh: Apply base coat over insulation board to a uniform 1/8 inch thickness, including high impact mesh where indicated. Embed standard reinforcing mesh into wet adhesive, lap edges at seams. Smooth surface until mesh is not visible. Allow to base coat to dry. 3. Ultra-High impact mesh: Apply base coat over insulation board to a uniform 1/8 inch thickness. Fully embed ultra-high impact reinforcing mesh into wet adhesive, butt edges at seams. Smooth surface until mesh is not visible. Allow to base coat to dry. Locate at 4'-0" wide perimeter of the rear service door to 6'-0" above grade and as indicated on Architectural drawings. E. Apply finish coating continuously in one operation to the entire wall surface. Provide a uniform finished appearance. Level and texture to the specified finish texture. F. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and joints within the system using elastomeric joint sealants, in accordance with drawing details and sealant manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION 07250 - WEATHER BARRIERS 1.1 Section Includes A. Weather barrier membrane B. Seam Tape C. Flashing D. Fasteners 1.2 References A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-wo ven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls. 8. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials B. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test C. TAPPI 1. Test Method T-410; Grams or Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method) 1.3 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide commercial weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. 1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Refer to Section 01400 Quality Requirements. B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 1.5 Scheduling A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly. B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation. 2.1 Manufacturer A. DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, D19805; (800) 448-9835; http://constructiontyvek.com 2.2 Materials A. Basis of Design: Hi-performance, spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPont Tyvek CommercialWrap and related assembly components. B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: 0.001 CFM/feet squared at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96 Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: 2.7 oz/yard squared, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs/inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A. 7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, Flame Spread 10, Smoke Developed 10. 2.3 Accessories A. Seam Tape: 3 inch wide, DuPont Tyvek Tape for commercial applications. B. Fasteners: 1. For steel frame construction - DuPont Tyvek Wrap Cap Screws, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: 1-5/8" rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4" or 2" metal gasketed washer. 2. For wood frame construction - Tyvek Wrap Caps, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: #4 nails with large 1- inch plastic cap fasteners. 3. For masonry construction - masonry tap-con fasteners with Tyvek Wrap Caps as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: 2 inch diameter plastic cap fasteners. C. Adhesives: 1. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 2. Products: a. Liquid Nails LN-109 b. Polyglaze SM 5700 c. Denso Butyl Liquid d. 3M High Strength 90 e. SIA 665 f. Adhesives recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D. Primers: 1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. 2. Product: a. 3M High Strength 90 b. Denso Butyl Spray c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 e. ITW TACC Sta' Put SPH f. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer. E. Flashing: 1. DuPont FlexWrap, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations. 2. DuPont Straightflash, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc. DuPont Straightflash VF, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: dual-sided straight flashing membrane materials for brick mold and non-flanged windows and doors. 3.1 Examination Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 3.2 Installation - Weather Barrier A. Install weather barrier per regional requirements in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. C. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12" of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level. E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. G. Overlap weather barrier 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches. H. Weather barrier Attachment: 1. For steel or wood frame construction - Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12-18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally. 2. For masonry construction - Attach weather barrier to masonry. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, spaced 12-18 inches vertically on center and 24 inches maximum horizontally. Weather barrier may be temporarily attached to masonry using recommended adhesive, placed in vertical strips spaced 24 inches on center, when coordinated on the project site. I. Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont StraightFlash to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchors. 3.3 Seaming A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.4 Opening Preparation (for use with non-flanged windows - all cladding types) A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.5 Flashing (for use with non-flanged windows - all cladding types) A. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont FlexWrap a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. Apply primer as required by manufacturer. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont FlexWrap edge within side edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press into place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont StraightFlash at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start DuPont StraightFlash at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. E. Install DuPont FlexWrap at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. F. Coordinate flashing with window installation. G. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head. leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. H. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DUPont StraightFlash over the 45-degree seams. I. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. J. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. 3.6 Protection A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage. SECTION 07540 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (PVC) ROOFING 1.1 General: Provide the thermoplastic membrane (PVC) roofing system as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following: 1. ASTM D5036 "Application of Adhered Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing." 2. FM 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Adhered or Mechanically Attached Single Ply Membrane Roof Systems." 3. NRCA "Single-Ply Roofing Membrane." 4. UL "790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials." B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced roofing installer approved by roofing system manufacturer and with not less than five years of successful experience installing membrane roofing systems similar to those required for this project. C. Deliver, store and handle roof system materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to avoid damage and deterioration. 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling and protection during installation. D. Install roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's specific environmental requirements and conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. 1. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces from damage and soiling during roofing system installation. 2. Provide special protection on completed roofing work. 3. Protect paving and structure walls adjacent to hoists before starting work. 4. Do not overload the building structure with storage of materials or installation equipment on the substrate decking. E. Warranty 1. Contractor and roof system installer shall jointly warrant roofing materials and installation for a period of two years from the date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall include roofing membrane, flashing, roof insulation, roofing accessories and sheet metal work provided under Section 07600. 2. Manufacturer's warranty: Submit executed copy of roofing system manufacturer's 15 year total system warranty, including labor and materials for the entire roof system. Including perimeter edge metal, Section 07600 Flashing & Sheet Metal 2.1 Materials A. Manufacturer: Duro-Last Roofing, Inc, (614) 370-5569, Mike Suman, www.duro-last.com 1. Basis of Design Product Roofing System a. Thermoplastic single ply membrane roofing system: DL Membrane (PVC) fully adhered, smooth surface, UL Class A fire-rated single ply membrane roofing system. b. Thermoplastic fiber reinforced PVC membrane, not less than 40 mils (.040), complying with ASTM D4434 and membrane manufacturer's published physical properties. B. Comparable Alternate Roof Manufacturers: 1. Versico Roofing Systems, (815) 341-3770, Chris Shermach, chris.shermach@versico.com a. VersiFlex PVC Adhered System 2. Other comparable alternates can be considered when approved by Arch PM and Chipotle DM/CM. C. The roof covering design must resist a wind load of 100 mph, Exposure C and shall resist impact damage based on results of tests based on the results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, CGSB 37- GP-52M or FM 4470 1. Insulation cover board: Georgia-Pacific Corp. (800) 284-5347, internet www.gp.com, "Dens-Deck" nonstructural fiberglass- faced, silicone-treated gypsum core panels, 1/2" thickness. 2. Roof insulation: Rigid closed cell polyisocyanurate boards approved by the membrane manufacturer; complying with ASTM C1289, Type II, minimum 20 psi compressive strength, aged R-value equal 5.6 per inch of thickness. a. Provide a double layer installation. Minimum total R-value as indicated on plans. b. Specified perimeter edge metal shall be compliant with International Building Code ANSI / SPRI ES-1, ER2 testing requirements. 3. Flashing: Roof system manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, and color as sheet membrane. Specified perimeter edge metal will be compliant with International Building Code ANSI / SPRI ES-1, RE2 testing requirements. 4. Membrane Bonding Adhesive: Roof system manufacturer's standard membrane bonding adhesive. 5. Insulation and Cover Board Adhesive: Dow Chemical Company, (888) 868-1183, internet www.flexibeproducts.com, "INSTA-STIK Professional Roof Insulation Adhesive", a single component, moisture cured polyurethane adhesive. 6. Fasteners: Roof system manufacturer's standard fasteners for project conditions indicated. 7. Accessories: Roof system manufacturer's recommended pourable sealers, preformed penetration flashing, preformed corner flashing, seam caulk, termination bars and o ther accessories required for substrate surfaces and installation conditions indicated. 8. Traffic walkways: Duro-Last Roof Track II walkway pads. SECTION 07720 - ROOF SCUTTLE & LADDER SAFETY POST 1.1 General: Provide roof scuttle and safety post as shown & specified. A. Coordination: Before starting work, verify with the Tenant's Construction Manager and the Owner the following: 1. Verify that other trades with related work are complete before installing roof scuttle(s). 2. Mounting surfaces shall be straight and secure; substrates shall be of proper width. 3. Refer to the construction documents, shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Coordinate installation with roof membrane and roof insulation manufacturer's instructions before starting. 2.1 Materials: A. Manufacturer: The Bilco Company, (203) 934-6363, internet www.bilco.com or approved equal. 1. Roof Scuttle: Type S-50 metal roof scuttle, size 3'-0" width x 2'-6" length (length denotes hinge side). The roof scuttle shall be single leaf and come pre-assembled from the manufacturer. Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. 2. Safety Post: Model 4 ladder safety post. The ladder safety post shall come pre-assembled from the m anufacturer. Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. 3.1 Installation: A. Verify that roof scuttle & ladder safety post installation will not disrupt other trades. Verify that the substrate is dry, clean, and free of foreign matter. Report and correct defects prior to any installation. NOT USED SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 1.1 General A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to following: SMACNA "Architectural sheet Metal Manual- 1993." B. Installation: Performed under Section 07540 work. 1.2 Manufacturer A. Manufacturer: Duro-Last Roofing, Inc, / Exceptional Metals, Inc. (800) 248-0280, Jason Dark, www.duro-last.com 2.1 Materials: A. Coping made of 24-gauge galvalume, cover provided with Kynar architectural finish providing a 35 year finish warranty. Meets ANSI/SPRI ES-1 2003 method RE-2 testing requirements. Color to match adjacent wall finish. B. Vinyl backed scupper. Scupper profile & size indicated Fig 1-20. C. Galvanized steel: ASTM A653 commercial quality sheet steel with 0.2% copper, G90 hot-dip galvanized. Gage indicated. 1. Scuppers: Minimum 16 gage. 2. Coping/Wall caps: Minimum 18 gage. D. Aluminum sheet: ASTM B209 alloy 3003, temper as required for forming and performance. Thickness indicated. 1. Conductor Boxes: Minimum 0.040"thickness. 2. Downspouts: Minimum 0.025"thickness. E. Joint sealers: One-component silicone elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C920. Color matched to sheet metal finish. F. Metal accessories: Provide sheet metal fasteners, clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material installed, non-corrosive, size and gage as required for performance and acceptable to the Architect. G. Fabrication: Shop fabricate sheet metal work to comply with profiles and sizes indicated and to comply with standard industry standards as shown by SMACNA in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 1. Conductor boxes: SMACNA Chapter 1 - Roof Drainage Systems. Profile and size indicated Fig 1-25. 2. Scuppers: SMACNA Chapter 1 - Roof Drainage Systems. Profile and size indicated Fig 1-20. 3. Downspouts: SMACNA Chapter 1 - Roof Drainage Systems. Profile and size indicated. Installation Fig. 1-31 with strap hanger Fig. 1-35. 4. Formed coping/wall caps: SMACNA Chapter 3 - Copings. Design Fig 3-1. Profile and size indicated with Fig. 3-3 butt joints and concealed back-up plates. Install formed copings with continuous cleat fasteners similar to Fig 3-1 at exposed face and screw fasteners with washers space maximum 24" on center at roof side. 3.1 Installation: A. Preparation: Coordinate sheet metal work with other work for the correct sequencing of items which make up the entire roof system of weatherproofing and rain drainage: B. Installation: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations, drawing details and approved shop drawings for installation of the work. 1. Anchor sheet metal items securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions whenever possible. Install joint sealants where required. 2. Set units true to lines and levels indicated. Install work with sealed laps, joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. Bed flanges of sheet metal work in thick coat of roofing cement or sealant compatible with roofing membrane. 3. Separate sheet metal work from dissimilar metals and treated wood materials. Provide rosin-sized paper slipsheet over treated wood. 4. Fabricate, support and anchor conductor boxes and downspouts to withstand thermal expansion, stresses and full loading by ice or water without damage, deterioration or leakage. 3.1 Installation A. Preparation 1. Clean substrate surfaces of debris and other substances detrimental to roofing installation. 2. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before starting roofing. Roof deck surface conditions shall comply with manufacturer's requirements and be acceptable to the roofing system installer. B. Installation: 1. General: Provide roofing system materials and installation complying with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and governing codes and regulations. a. Mix and apply roof insulation and cover board adhesive in strict accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's installation instructions. Dispense adhesive at manufacturer's recommended application rate using approved dispensing equipment. 2. Roof Insulation: a. Extend insulation full thickness over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit around obstructions; fill all voids with insulation. Provide saddles and tapered edges as required to provide positive proper drainage. b. Install and secure in place with insulation adhesive, a double layer of insulation units of the required thickness. Run long joints of insulation in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slope, with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints of each layer of insulation. Butt edges to moderate contact. Limit joints between adjacent units to maximum 1/4". 3. Insulation cover board: Install and secure in place with insulation adhesive a single layer of insulation cover board on installed roof insulation. Secure cover board in accordance with membrane manufacturer's recommendations. Stagger joints with joints of roof insulation. 4. Thermoplastic membrane: Comply with membrane manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for handling and installing single ply membrane roofing. a. Unroll and position roofing sheet membrane witho ut stretching. Align top sheet with pr-marked lines on bottom sheet. Allow membrane to "relax" for at least 30 minutes before adhering, splicing and flashing. b. Adhere membrane to insulation cover board with bonding adhesive. Broom bonded membrane to achieve maximum contact. c. Join membrane seams using approved heat welding equipment. Check all splices for voids and repair voids with heat gun and roller. d. When required, mechanically fasten membrane at roof perimeter, curb flashing and similar penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. e. Flash and make weathertight all equipment curbs, pipes, conduits, drains and other penetrations or projections through sheet roofing using roofing system manufacturer's recommended flashing materials, accessories and procedures. 5. Install roof accessories and traffic walkways in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 6. Install sheet metal work furnished under section 07600. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS G012 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 SECTION 07900 – JOINT SEALERS 1.1 General: Provide joint sealers as shown and specified. A. Standards:Comply with ASTM C 920 requirements. B. Application: Performed by skilled, experienced joint sealer applicators. 2.1 Materials: A. Polyurethane sealants: 1. Tremco Commercial Sealants (800) 321-7906, internet www.tremcosealants.com, a. “Dymonic FC” One component, fast skinning, Low Modulus Polyurethane. b. “Dymeric 240 FC” Multi Component, gun grade, chemically curing, tintable fast setting polyurethane sealant. 2. Sonneborn, (724) 756-9582, internet www.sonneborn.com a. Color pack for polyurethane multi component, gun grade chemically curing sealant. B. Silicone Sealants: 1. General Electric Silicones, (800) 295-2392, internet www.gesilicones.com a. “SCS1700 Sanitary – Mold/Mildew Resistant Silicone”, one component 100% silicone, fungicidal based sealant. b. “SCS2700 Silpruf Silicone” one component medium modulus, natural cure silicone all purpose sealant. c. “Silglaze II SCS2800- Glazing Sealant” one component, 100% silicone based sealer. d. “GE Paintable Silicone” one component paintable silicone. e. "SCS1000 Silicone Sealant" one-component acetoxy silicone for general purpose sealing and bonding 2. Dow Corning Silicones, (989) 496-4000, www.dowcorning.com a. “Dow 795” – one component, medium modulus, natural cure silicone. C. Firestopping Sealants: 3M Fire Protection Products, (800) 328-1687, internet www.3M.com/firestop 1. “3M Fire Barrier CP 25WB+ Caulk” or approved equal D. Joint backing: Non-absorptive, non-staining, compressible, non-gassing, polyethylene foam backer rod compatible w/ sealants. 3.1 Installation: A. Preparation: Clean and prepare joints prior to installing sealers: 1. Wipe shipping oils from surfaces to be sealed. Remove protective films and/or install joint backer rod if joint is larger than 1/4” in width. B. Installation: Install joint sealant materials in strict accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 1. Apply sealants in a uniform, continuous bead without gaps or air pockets. Hand tool and finish all joints so that a smooth, small, lip free uniform line is created along the substrate being shot. Remove any excess materials from tooled edges and ends of joint. 2. Install joint sealants to a depth no more than ½ the width of the joint. 3. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. 4. Immediately, after sealant application, and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 5. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. 4.1 Sealant Schedule: A. Dining area: • Provide a continuous bead of white GE SCS1702 silicone at the following locations: 1. Perimeter of aluminum storefront/windows/entrances to sheetrock walls. 2. Hollow metal door frames to painted walls - if needed. • Provide a continuous bead of Dow 795 silicone at the following locations: 1. Sill of aluminum storefronts to concrete or tile floor. Color to be determined per store to match storefront (Charcoal/Anodized Aluminum/Dark Bronze). B. Exterior Joints: • Provide a continuous bead of Tremco Dymeric limestone urethane sealant at the following locations: 1. Sidewalk/concrete expansion joints. • Provide a continuous bead of Dow 795 silicone or Tremco Dymeric 240 FC at the following locations: 1. Hollow metal door frames. 2. EIFS to abutting services. 3. Penetrations in EIFS. 4. Face brick or block control joints. 5. Perimeter of Aluminum Storefronts. Colors to be determined per store to match adjacent material colors. Verify with Architect. a. For "Fog" EIFS use Tremco - "Natural White" b. For "Knight's Armor" EIFS use Sonneborn - "Charcoal Gray" #276-U c. For white brick use Tremco - "China White" • Provide a continuous bead of aluminum GE SCS1009 silicone at the following location: 1. CO2 fill port stainless box. 2. Faucet for hose. (Please note: color to be dete rmined. Verify with Architect) DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.1 General: Provide steel doors and frames as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following: 1. ANSI A250.8-1998 "Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. ANSI A250.11-01 "Erection Instructions for Steel Frames." 3. SDI 122-99 " Installation for Standard Steel doo rs and Frames. B. Manufacturer: A member of the Steel Door Institute (SDI). 2.1 Materials: A. Steel Doors: 1. Interior: Heavy-duty Level 2, physical performance B, Model 2 seamless construction, ASTM A1008, 18 gauge cold-rolled steel face sheets, manufacturer's standard core. 2. Exterior: Extra heavy-duty Level 3, physical performance A, Model 2 seamless construction, ASTM A1008, 16 gauge cold- rolled steel face sheets; tops and bottoms closed with flush galvanized steel caps, manufacturer's standard plastic foam insulating core. B. Steel Frames: ASTM A1008, 16 gauge cold-rolled steel. 1. Provide combination buck, jamb and trim type frames for 1-3/4" thick doors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interior and exterior frames: Set-up welded type with mitered corners, reinforced, fully seam welded with exposed welds ground smooth. C. Door and frame fabrication: 1. Provide cutouts for mortised hardware, accurately located and made to fit hardware. Provide closer reinforcement for all doors with surface mounted door closers. 2. Punch frames and factory install rubber door silencers. 3. Provide minimum three anchors of suitable design for each jamb. 4. Provide floor clip on bottom of each jamb. Provide angle spreaders at bottom of each set-up frame. D. Shop painting: Clean and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units. Apply one baked-on shop coat of rust-inhibitive prime paint in accordance with ANSI A250.10, unless doors and frames are used at the restrooms or as indicated on door hardware and finish schedule. Provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 3.1 Installation: A. Install frames plumb, level, rigid, and in true alignment as recommended in ANSI A250.11. B. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fastened to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance as recommended in SDI 122. 1.3 Summary: A. Section Includes: 1. Kawneer Architectural Aluminum Storefront Systems, including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims and anchors, and perimeter sealing of storefront units. a. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Storefront include: • Trifab 601T Storefront System - 2" x 6" nominal dimension; Thermal; Center-Set • Trifab VG 451T Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set 2. Kawneer Aluminum Entrances, glass and glazing, and components a. Types of Kawneer Aluminum Entrances include: • 500 Swing Door; Wide stile, 5" vertical face dimension, 1-3/4" depth, high traffic applications or as indicated on Drawings. 3. Kawneer Tube for Feature Exterior Slat Wall 4. Alternate Storefront Systems only when approved by Arch PM and Tenant DM. a. YKK • YES 60 TU Storefront System - 2" x 6" nominal dimension; Thermal • YES 45 TU Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set b. Oldcastle • Series 6000XT Storefront System - 2" x 6" nominal dimension; Thermal • Series 3000 Thermal MultiPlane Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set c. US Aluminum • Series FT601 - 2" x 6" nominal dimension; Thermal • Series FT451 - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set d. EFCO • Series 406 (T) Storefront System - 2" x 6-1/2" nom inal dimension; Thermal • Series 403 (T) Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nom inal dimension; Thermal e. Wausau • TU24650 Storefront System - 2" x 6-1/2" nominal dim ension; Thermal • TU24000 Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dim ension; Thermal 1.4 Performance Requirements: A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed storefront system shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction; 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to the Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed (MPH): Determine to meet local codes listed on A000 b. Importance Factor: (1.00) c. Exposure Category (A, B, C, D): Determine to meet local codes listed on A000 B. Storefront System Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding inward and outward wind load design pressures meeting local codes listed on sheet A000. 2. Air Infiltration: a. Air Infiltration for storefront frame system: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft. sq. at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf. b. Air Infiltration for storefront entrances: For single acting offset pivot or butt hung entrances in the closed and locked position, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential o f 6.24 psf (300 Pa) for single doors and 1.567 psf (75 PA) for pairs of doors. A single 3'0" x 7'0" entrance door and fram e shall not exceed 0.50 cfm per square foot. A pair of 6'0" x 7'0" entrance doors and frame shall not exceed 1.0 cfm per square foot. 3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no defection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur. 5. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the thermal transmittance (U-factor) shall be not more than: a. Glass to Exterior - 0.47 (low-e) 6. Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the condensation resistance factor shall not be less than: a. Glass to Exterior - 70 frame and 69 glass (low-e) 7. Sound Transmission Class (STC) and Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): When tested to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM E90, the STC and OITC Rating shall not be less than: a. Glass to Exterior - 38 (STC) and 31 (OITC) 1.5 Submittals: A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and installation instructions for each type of aluminum frame storefront system and storefront entrance doors indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, and attachments to work, operational clearances and installation details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of hardware and accessories involving color section. 1.6 Quality Assurance A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of providing aluminum framed storefront system that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion of rest reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum framed storefront system and storefront entrance doors through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum framed storefront system and are based on the specific system indicated. Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.7 Project Conditions: A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of a aluminum framed storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 Warranty A. Manufactures Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from Date of Substantial Completion of the project provided however that the Limited Warranty shall begin in no event later than six months from date of shipment by manufacturer. 2.1 Manufacturers: A. Manufacturer: Kawneer Company Inc., Contact: Doug Hess, Phone: 317-771-9265; email:doug.hess@arconic.com 1. Basis-of-Design Product Storefront Framing: a. Trifab 601T (thermal) Storefront System • 2" x 6" System Dimensions • Glass: Exterior (Center-Set) b. Trifab 451T (thermal) Storefront System • 2" x 4-1/2" System Dimensions • Glass: Exterior (Front-Set) 2. Basis-of-Design Product Storefront Entrances: a. The door stile and rail face dimensions of the 500-Wide Stile entrance door will be as follows or as indicated on Drawings: Door: 500; Vertical Stile: 5"; Top Rail: 5"; Bottom Rail: 10" b. Major portions of the door members to be 0.125" nominal in thickness and glazing molding to be 0.05" thick. c. Glazing gaskets shall be either EPDM elastometric extrusions or a thermoplastic elastomer. d. Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening. 3. Basis-of-Design Product Feature Exterior Slat Wall: a. Kawneer Tube #027881 (1" x 3"), capped at top and bottom b. Architectural Fabrication Alternate Exterior Slat Wall only when approved by Arch PM and Tenant DM. B. Alternate Storefront Systems only when approved by Arch PM and Tenant DM. 1. YKK a. YES 60 TU Storefront System - 2" x 6" nominal dimension; Thermal b. YES 45 TU Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set 2. Oldcastle a. Series 6000XT Storefront System - 2" x 6" nominal dimension; Thermal b. Series 3000 Thermal MultiPlane Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set SECTION 08413 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.1 General: Provide aluminum entrances and storefronts as shown and specified. 1.2 Related Documents: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. Standards: Materials and construction shall conform to the following: 1. AAMA SFM-1-87 "Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual." 3. US Aluminum a. Series FT601 - 2" x 6" nominal dimension; Thermal b. Series FT451 - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal; Front-Set 4. EFCO a. Series 406 (T) Storefront System - 2" x 6-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal b. Series 403 (T) Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal 5. Wausau a. TU24650 Storefront System - 2" x 6-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal b. TU24000 Storefront System - 2" x 4-1/2" nominal dimension; Thermal 2.2 Materials: A. Provide aluminum entrances and storefront matching the existing building aluminum entrances and storefronts, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aluminum Frame Extrusions: Alloy and temper reco mmended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper. C. Aluminum Storefront Entrance Extrusions:Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum-framed glass door m anufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.090" wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum window and door members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions, or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non- migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement. H. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-section dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standard Data. 2.3 Storefront Framing System: A. Thermal Barrier: Thermal Break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. 1. Kawneer IsoLock Thermal Break with a 1/4" separation consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane, which is mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum storefront sections. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bearing fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposed shall be stainless steel. D. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. E. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. F. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, constructio n activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation. 2.4 Glazing Systems: A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800 - Glazing. B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows: 1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated. a. Color: Black 2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. a. Color: Matching structural sealant. 2.5 Entrance Door Systems: A. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08710 Door Hardware. 2.6 Accessory Materials: A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in section 07900 - Joint Sealers 2.7 Storefront Framing Fabrication: A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensatio n within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. C. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures. D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturers standard installation instructions. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 Storefront Entrance Door Fabrication: A. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. B. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter framing. 1. Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration plug we lds and 1-1/8" long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord. 2. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance. 3. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. 4. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal fro m view. C. Weather Stripping: Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in door panels or frames as indicated on manufactures drawings and details. 2.9 Aluminum Finishes: A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Factory Finishing: 1. Kawneer Permafluor (70% PVDF), AAMA 2605, Fluoropolymer Coating (Color: Charcoal or as noted on Drawings) 2. Finishing for alternate storefront specifications to be verified by Arch PM and Tenant DM a. YKK "Charcoal" UC99477, Superior Painted Finishes b. All others to be verified with samples and submittals to Arch PM 2.10 Brake Metal Trim: A. Shop Drawings: Show layout and elevations, dimensions and thickness of panels, connections, details and location of joints, sealants and gaskets, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, trim, flashings, and accessories. 1. Show actual field measurements on shop drawings. 2. Differentiate between shop and field fabrication. 3. Indicate substrates and adjacent work with which the fabrications must be coordinated. 4. Include large-scale details of anchorages and co nnecting elements. 5. Include large-scale or schematic exploded or iso metric diagrms to fully explain flashing at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10) 2.11 Formed Metal Fabrications - General: A. Shop assembly: Preassemble items to greatest extent possible. Minimize field splices and field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for transportation and handling. Mark items clearly for assembly and installation B. Coordinaton: Match dimensions and attachement o f formed metal items to adjacent construction. Produce integrated assembles. Closely fit joints; align edges and flat surfaces unless indicated otherwise. C. Forming: Profiles indicated. Maximize lenghts. Fold exposed edges to form hem indicated or ease edges to radius indicated with cocealed stiffener. Provide flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain seperation at bends. D. Reinforcement: Increase metal thickness; use concealed stiffeners, backing materials or both. Provide stretcher leveled standard of flatness and stiffness required to maintain flatness and hold adjacent items in flush alignment. E. Anchors: Straps, plates and anchors as required to support and anchor items to adjacent construction. F. Supports: Miscellaneous framing, mounting, clips, sleeves, fasteners and accessories required for installation. G. Welding and brazing: Weld or braze joints continuously. Grind smooth, fill or dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces. Do not discolor metal. Grind Smooth, polish, and restore damaged finishes to required condition. 1. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 2. Welded joints. a. Carbon Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. b. Stainless Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.6/D1.6M 3. Brass/Bronze Brazed Joints: a. Perform torch brazing in accordance with AWS C3.4M/C3.4 b. Perform induction brazing in accordance with AWS C3.5M/C3.5 c. Perform resistance brazing in accordance with AWS C3.9M/C3.9 H. Performance requirements; 1. Thermal Movements: a. Allow for thermal movements in exterior metal fabrications due to temperature changes. Prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. b. Temperature Change Range: 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F (100 degrees C), on material surfaces. 2. Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 2.12 Formed Metal Fabrications - Sheet Metal A. Closures, Trim, and Fill Panels: 1. Form Closures from type and thickness of metal indicated. 2. Conceal fasteners when possible. 3. Drill and tap holes for securing to other surfaces. 4. Provide gaskets where indicated or needed for continuous seal at adjacent surfaces. 5. Miter or cope at corners and reinforce with bent metal plate. Form tigh joints. 2.13 Materials A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections exposed to view on finished units. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating. 14 gauge min. thick base material. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Use one of the following: 1. Stainless steel complying with ASTM A276/A276M, ASTM A480/A480M, or ASTM A666. 2. Steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M. 3. Steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dipped galvenized to ASTM A123/A123M Coating Grade 35 4. Interior locations: Carbon steel; zinc coated in accordance with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5. 5. Exterior Locations or in contact with Stainless Steel: a. Bolts: Stainless steel; ASTM F593, Group 1 (A1) b. Nuts: Stainless steel; ASTM F594. 6. Structural Anchors: Provide anchors where work is indicated to comply with design loads. a. Type: Provide chemical or torque controled expansion anchors. b. Capacity: When tested according to ASTM E488/E488M; four times the load imposed when installed in concrete. 7. Nonstructural Anchors: Provide powder-actuated fasteners where work is not indicated to comply wit design loads. Provide size and number required for load, installation, and as recommended by manufacturer, unless indicated otherwise. D. Fasteners, General: Same basic metal and alloy as formed metal sheet unless indicated otherwise. Do not use metals incompatible with the materials joined. E. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain airtight; as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 2.14 Finishes A. Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM AMP 500-06 1. Complete mechanical finishes befor fabrication. After fabrication, finish joints, bends, abrasions and surface blemishes to match sheet. 2. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage. 3. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless indicated otherwise. 4. Appearance: Limit variations in appearance of adjacent to one-half the range represented in approved samples. noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Install components in the range of approved samples to minimize contrast. B. Galvanized Steel Finishes: 1. Repair Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M 2. Color: As shown on the drawings. 3. Factory Prime: Apply shop primer to pepared surfaces of items where field painting after installation indicated, unless indicated otherwise. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA1 4. High Performance Organic Coatings: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer system. 3.1 Examination: A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight framed aluminum storefro nt system installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Installation: A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing aluminum framed storefront system, aluminum swing storefront entrance doors, accessories, and other components. B. Install aluminum framed storefront system and storefront doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members and door threshold in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction. D. Install aluminum framed storefront system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within sliding door to the exterior. Refer to section 07900 - Joint Sealers. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. F. Install aluminum storefront framing system glass and glazing, in accordance with section 08800 and the manufacturer's requirements. 3.3 Adjusting, Cleaning, and Protection: A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS G013 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 SECTION 085619 - PASS-THRU WINDOW 1.1 General: Provide door hardware as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following: 1. ASTM A240 - Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 2. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 5. ASTM B580 - Standard Specification for Anodic Oxide Coatings on Aluminum. 6. ASTM B680 - Standard Test Method for Seal Quality of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum by Acid Dissolution. 7. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 8. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. 9. ASTM E774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 10. Aluminum Association AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 25 years successful experience continuously manufacturing pass-thru windows. 2. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have five years experience manufacturing and fabricating windows of similar type and scope as those specified in this section. 3. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. a. Finish areas designated by Architect. b. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. c. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 2.1 Materials: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Arch PM to verify required manufacturer per Tenant's assignment. 1. Quikserv; Toll Free: 1-800-388-8307; Email: sales@quik-serv.com; Web: https://www.quikserv.com/ 2. ReadyAccess; Toll Free: 1-800-621-5045; Email: ready@ready-access.com; Web: https://www.ready-access.com/ B. No substitutions allowed. Requirements for manufacturer, design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated on the drawings. 2.2 In-Line Side Sliding Automatic Window and Air Curtain A. Standard Custom Side Sliding Windows -Arch PM to verify manufacturer with Tenant. • Quikserv Custom Automatic Side Sliding Window (Model: SS-4035-E-CHIPOTLE): 45 1/2"W x 41-3/4"H window with 17 3/4" transom height and (2) sidelights at 29 1/4"W x 41 3/4"H, Complete Unit Size 104"W x 59-1/2"H 1. Service Opening: 19"W x 29 3/4"H 2. Finish: Dark Bronze Anodized 3. Glass: 1" Clear Tempered unit + Low E (Solarban 60e) for fixed & moving panel, sidelights and transom 4. 'CHIPOTLE' package includes pre-wired air curtain with relay to sync operation with window. Arch PM to verify if heated or ambient air curtain is required per Tenant assignment; air Curtain mounts to transom. a. Heated Air Curtain: Model QSV1025EJ-040-BK b. Ambient Air Curtain: Model QSK1025AA-BK 5. See elevation for direction of opening. Refer to sliding direction from inside of building when ordering. • ReadyAccess Automatic Side Sliding Window: 47 1/2"W x 43 1/2"H window with 16" tall transom and (2) sidelights at 28 1/4"W x 59 1/2"H; Complete Unit Size 104"W x 59-1/2"H 1. Service Opening: 19"W x 35"H 2. Finish: Dark Bronze Anodized 3. Glass: 3/4" Clear Tempered unit + Low E (Solarban 70XL) for fixed & moving panel, sidelights and transom 4. Arch PM to verify if heated or ambient air curtain is required per Tenant assignment. a. Heated Air Curtain: Model: AA300 (replaces transom) b. Ambient Air Curtain: Model: AA100 (split transom) Refer to exterior elevations for opening direction for ordering. B. Alternate California Code Option • Quikserv Model: SS-4035-E-CHIPOTLE-CALI, same as above except as noted. 1. Service Opening: 28"W x 15-3/8"H, limited to meet CA code. 2. 'CHIPOTLE' package includes pre-wired ambient air curtain with relay to sync operation with window Model: QSK1025AA-BK. Air curtain mounts to transom. • ReadyAccess: Window 47 1/2" W x 35 3/4"H with double-split transom for air curtain and 10" and (2) sidelights at 28 1/4"W x 59 1/2"H; Complete Unit Size 104"W x 59 1/2"H 1. Service Opening:15-1/4"W x 28"H, limited to meet CA code. 2. Ambient Air Curtain, AA100, and relay switch kit included with the West Coast Window package. C. Alternate Impact-Resistant and Florida Product Approved Option, Miami Dade Horizontal Bi-Parting Impact Slider • Quikserv Model: BP-7241E-IP-CHIPOTLE, Complete Unit Size: 72"W x 41"H 1. Service Opening: 29 1/2"W x 27"H 2. Rough Opening: 72 1/2"W x 41 1/2"H 3. Glass: Impact Resistant Glass 4. 'CHIPOTLE' package includes ambient air curtain a. Ambient Air Curtain: Model: QSK1025AA-BK, Part Number: 9345. b. Do not mount directly to window, mount on wall above. 5. Miami-Dade NOA #18-0814.02 2.3 Electrical Requirements A. Quikserv Electrical Windows: 120V / 60 Hz, 20-amp branch circuit, single phase. Power supplied through base of window. Conforms to UL Standard 325 -Certified to CAN/CSA C22.2 NO. 247. Confirm with Electrical Drawings. 1. Heated Air Curtain for Custom Side Sliding Window (Model: SS-4035-E-CHIPOTLE) • Separate 230V circuit and Power Supply required for heated air curtain. Air curtain pre-wired through window frame with power supply routed to base of window. Confirm with Electrical Drawings. 2. Ambient Air Curtain for Custom Side Sliding Window (Model: SS-4035-E-CHIPOTLE) and Alternate California Code Option: Model: SS-4035-E-CHIPOTLE-CALI • Separate circuit not required. Window pre-wired to power and sync operation with air curtain. 3. Ambient Air Curtain for Alternate Impact-Resistant and Florida Product Approved Option (Model: BP-7241E-IP-CHIPOTLE): • Connect to main control board on window to power and synchronize operation with opening and closing of window. B. ReadyAccess Electrical Windows: 115V / 60 Hz, 15-amp dedicated circuit required. Run power to header on fixed panel side. 1. AA300 Heated Air Curtain • Separate 208V /60 hz /40-amp single phase circuit required. 2. AA100 Ambient Air Curtain (Standard and CA window) • Separate 120V / 60hz / 15-amp single phase circuit required. Run power to center of window above header. 3.1 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install pass-thru windows plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent Work. C. Install thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. D. Install pass-thru window components weathertight. E. Anchor pass-thru windows securely in place to supports. Use attachment methods permitting adjustment for construction tolerances, irregularities, alignment, and expansion and contraction. F. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect. G. Coordinate installation of related sheet metal flashing as specified in Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 07 91 23 - Backer Rods. SECTION 08800 - GLAZING 1.1 General: Provide glass and glazing as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following: 1. CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 (1-91)"Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials." 2. GANA "Glazing Manual - 1990." B. Quality Assurance: 1. Codes and standards: Provide type of glass and glazing products that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. Comply with all applicable codes, standards and regulations that control safety glazing materials and installation. 2. System Performance: Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and, where applicable, impact loading, without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of glazing sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. 3. Installation: Performed only by experienced glaziers. C. Warranty: 1. Insulating glass: Five years from date of installation against defects that materially obstruct vision through the glass or affect thermal and physical integrity. 2.1 Materials: A. Glass: 1. Float Glass (FG): 1/4" thick clear float glass. 2. Tempered Glass (TG): 1/4" and 1/2" thick clear, tempered safety glass, free-of-tong marks. 3. Insulating Glass (IGL): 1" thick clear, low-e tempered sealed glass; 1/4" thick interior and exterior glass lites with 1/2" aluminum desiccated dual sealed air space; with the following characteristics: a. Low-emissivity coating on #2 surface. b. Visible Light Transmittance: 64% - 70% c. Visible Light Reflectance - Outdoors: 9%-11% d. Solar Energy Transmittance: 32%-34% e. Solar Energy Reflectance-Outdoors: 30%-34% f. U-Value - Winter Night: 0.29 g. U-value - Summer days: 0.28 h. Solar Heat gain Coefficient: 0.25-0.39 i. Shading Coefficient: 0.43-0.45 j. Manufacturers/Products: 1. AGC/Comfort Ti-AC40, or similar to meet code 2. Sun Guard/SN-68, or similar to meet code 3. PPG/Solarban 60, or similar to meet code 4. Viracon/VE1-2M, or similar to meet code 4. Spandrel Glass (SG) 1/4" Spandrel Ceramic Glass, (Color: GrayBlack or as noted on drawings). Old Castle Building Envelope, (419) 666-2000, Contact: Doug Dewar 5. Frosted Window Film: 3M Dusted Crystal Translucent Window Film. Apply on the interior side fo glazing. B. Glazing Materials: 1. Glazing Sealants: Provide elastomeric glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated; compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, complying with ASTM C920. 2. Glazing Tape: Provide preformed, non-staining and non-migrating elastomeric tape, as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, complying with ASTM C 1281. 3. Glazing gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on aluminum stops and neoprene, vinyl or EPDM glazing gaskets. 4. Provide setting blocks, spacers and edge blocks of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, and compatible with surfaces contacted in installation. C. Fabrication: Factory fabricate and size all glass. 3.1 Installation A. Preparation: 1. Field verify measurements and conditions of installation. 2. Examine all details. Provide proper fitting to details indicated. 3. Glazing channel dimensions shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate glazing materials thickness, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required for conditions at time of installation. B. Install glass and glazing in accordance with the GANA "Glazing Manual" and glass manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Install insulating glass units to comply with Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA) recommendations. C. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Provide spacers as required. D. Install glazing sealants, tapes and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set glass without springing and install securely to prevent rattling or breakage. E. Protect glass from breakage during remaining construction. Do not remove non-permanent labels until final acceptance. DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1.1 General: Provide gypsum board systems as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following: 1. GA 214-90 "Levels of Gypsum Board Finish." 2. GA-216 "Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board." 3. USG "SA923 Drywall/Steel Framed Systems." 2.1 Materials: A. Manufacturer: United States Gypsum Co. (USG), (800) 874-4968, internet www.usg.com. B. Metal framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 645 for materials and sizes. 1. Partition metal framing: a. Studs: Galvanized steel, C-shaped, sizes indicated, 20 gauge "ST20" b. Runners: Match studs, type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs. Provide flexible ceiling runners for full height metal stud framed partitions continuous from floor to underside of structural members or deck above. C. Ceiling and Soffit metal framing/suspension systems: 1. Small areas: Metal stud framing of appropriate size and gauge for spans indicated. 2. Large areas: Furring channel "Grillage" or "Direct Suspension System" designed for concealed support of gypsum board ceilings, of proper type for use indicated. 3. Furring members: 20 gauge, galvanized steel screw type, hat-shaped furring. D. Gypsum board panels: USG "Sheetrock" complying with ASTM C1396, tapered edge face panels, 48" wide, in maximum lengths available to minimize end joint conditions, 5/8" thick. 1. General use panels: Sheetrock Regular panels. 2. Fire rated panels: Sheetrock Firecode Core panels. 3. Water-resistant: panels: Sheetrock HUMITEK panels. E. Cement board: USG DUROCK Cement Board, 5/8" thick x manufacturer's standard width, complying with ANSI A118.9, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. F. Fasteners: USG Type "S" bugle head screws for metal framing, USG Type "W" bugle head screws for wood framing, manufacturer's recommended length for panel thickness indicated. G. Trim: Galvanized steel with knurled and perforated flanges. USG Dur-A-Bead corner bead, No. 200B casing bead metal trim, No. 093 Control Joint. H. Joint treatment: USG Joint Treatment System, utilizing "Sheetrock Brand Joint Tape", and "Sheetrock Brand Setting-Type (DURABOND)" compound for tape bedding and topping. I. Adhesives: USG "Sheetrock Brand Setting-Type (DURABOND) 210 or 90" compound for tape bedding and to pping. J. Acoustical sealant: USG Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant, water-base type, gunnable sealant for sealing sound-rated gypsum board systems. K. Sound attenuation insulation: USG Thermafiber unfaced 3-1/2" thick, mineral fiber insulating batts/blankets; standard lengths and widths required to coordinate with spaces insulated. 3.1 Installation A. Install metal wall and partition framing and ceiling suspension/ support systems in accordance with USG Bulletin SA 923 and complying with ASTM C754. 1. Ceiling suspension/ support systems: Metal furring system/direct suspension or steel stud framing system. 2. Wall and partition framing: a. Install steel studs per schedule or at spacing indicated with bottom and top runner tracks anchored to substrates. Provide flexible ceiling runner tracks at full height partitions. b. Terminate partition stud system 4" above ceilings, except where indicated to be extended to structural support or roof deck above. Brace tops of partition framing to structure or roof deck at maximum 4'-0" on center spacing. c. Frame openings more than 2'-0" wide with two 20 gauge studs at each jamb. d. Coordinate the installation of supplementary blocking and nailers, provided under Section 06100 work, to support shelving, millwork, toilet accessories, and similar work that cannot be adequately supported by gypsum board alone. B. Application and Finishing: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and Gypsum Association GA 216 "Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board." 1. Screw fasten all gypsum board panels. 2. Metal Trim: Install metal corner beads at external corners of gypsum board work and metal trim wherever edge of gypsum board would be exposed. Use longest practical lengths. 3. Control Joints: Locate and install in accordance with USG Bulletin SA923 "Good Design Practice" recommendations. C. Acoustical Treatment: 1. Where sound-attenuation insulation is indicated, seal gypsum board construction at perimeters, control joints, junction boxes, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. 2. Install sound attenuation insulation at scheduled partitions and ceilings. Install insulation in single layer of required thickness. Extend full thickness over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tight around obstructions. Fill all voids. 3. At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between edges of gypsum board and fixtures, cabinets, ducts, and other flush or penetrating items, with continuous bead of acoustical sealant. 4. Seal sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely close up openings and joints with a bead of acoustical treatment. D. Finishing: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for mixing, handling, and application of materials. Apply treatment at joints both directions, at flanges of trim accessories, penetrations of gypsum board (electrical boxes, piping, and similar work), fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as indicated. Apply in manner that will result in each of these items being concealed when applied decoration has been completed. 2. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated. 3. Interior Exposed Gypsum Board Finish: LEVEL 4 FINISH. a. Locations: Typical for all walls and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated b. Finish interior gypsum board by applying the following joint compounds in four coats (not including pre-fill of openings in base), and sand between coats and after last coat: c. Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint or taping compound. d. Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type topping compound. e. Fill (Third) Coat: Setting-type topping compound. f. Finish (Fourth) Coat: Skim coat entire surface. 4. Interior Concealed Gypsum Board: Level 3 Partial Finishing. a. Finish concealed gypsum board construction that requires finishing same as exposed gypsum board construction, except the third coat and sanding can be omitted. E. Cement Board: Install cement board as a 16" high base at all kitchen and kitchen cook line wall types as indicated on drawings. SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 1.1 General: Provide door hardware as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following: 1. ANSI A117.1-2009 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ANSI/BHMA A156 Series Builders Hardware B. Quality Assurance: 1. Codes and standards: Provide hardware complying with local Building Code requirements and the Tenant's standards for keying and security systems. 2. Project scheduling: Performed by an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 3. Package each item of hardware and each lockset, complete with all screws, anchors, installation instructions and templates. Identify package indexing with corresponding item number of the hardware schedule. 4. After hardware schedule acceptance, provide necessary templates or physical hardware to required trades for cutting, reinforcing, or preparing their products to receive hardware. Furnish templates to metal door manufacturer's. 2.1 Materials: A. No substitutions allowed. Requirements for manufacturer, design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated on the drawings. B. Review the keying system with the Tenant and provide the type required. 3.1 Installation A. Install each hardware item in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Securely fasten all attached parts. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush. Verify operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding or sticking, without excessive clearance. B. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as required for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in DHI "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" unless otherwise required to comply with requirements of governing codes and regulations. Conform to ANSI A117.1 and ADA Accessibility Guidelines. 1. Top Butts: 5 inches; top of butt from head of frame. 2. Middle Butts: 3'-2", centerline from finish floor. 3. Bottom Butts: 5 inches; finish floor to bottom of butt. 4. Locks: centerline from finish floor per hardware schedule. 5. Levers: 3'-2", centerline from finish floor. 6. Pulls: centerline from finish floor per hardware schedule. 7. Pushes: centerline from finish floor per hardware schedule. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS G014 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS 1.1 General: Provide paints and coatings as shown and specified. A. Provide surface preparation, prime, intermediate and finish coatings for interior and exterior and existing scheduled surfaces and items. B. Provide Tenant-selected finishes and colors for all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1.2 Related Documents: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.3 Summary: A. This section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 1.4 Quality Assurance: A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator that has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Provide lead free prime and finish coatings. All top coatings shall be mold and mildew resistant. 1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling: A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or tile of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. 1.6 Project Conditions A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 32 degrees C) unless otherwise stated on the technical data bulletin. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F (7.2 and 35 degrees C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, o r at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 2.1 Manufacturers: A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturer is referred to in the paint schedule by use of shortened versions of the name, which is shown below: 1. PPG Industries, Inc. 2. Materials - No substitutions allowed. 2.2 Paint Materials, General A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality "professional" paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. Colors: Color guided selected by Tenant and will be strictly adhered too, unless otherwise noted. C. Exterior Coatings: Exterior Ferrous Metals: • Preparation: Remove all visible oil, grease, soil, rust and all other soluble contaminates from steel surface. Uniformly roughen surface with 150-grit paper. Remove all dust before solvent cleaning by the use of stiff bristle brush. • Prime: (1) coat PPG; 4216PF Series Pitt-Tech Plus Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils. • Finish: (2) coats PPG; 4216PF Series Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils. • Application: Conventional or HVLP (high volume low pressure) Exterior and Interior Gas Piping: • Preparation: Remove all visible oil, grease, soil, rust and all other soluble contaminates from pipe surface. Remove all dust before solvent cleaning by the use of stiff bristle brush. • Prime: (1) coat PPG; 4216PF Series Pitt-Tech Plus Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils. • Finish: (2) coats PPG; 4216PF Series Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (90 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 to 4.0 mils. • Application: Conventional or HVLP (high volume low pressure) Exterior Patio Railing: • Preparation: Remove all visible oil, grease, soil, loose paint, rust and all other soluble contaminates from steel surface. Remove all dust before solvent cleaning SSPC-SP1 by the use of stiff bristle brush. SSPC-SP3 may be required as a more aggressive preparation to remove loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint and other loose detrimental foreign matter from the surface. Performance is better with more aggre ssive preparation. • Prime: (1) coat PPG; 95-3300 Durathane DTM Urethane Mastic (250 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 to 5.0 mils. • Finish: (1) coat PPG; 95-3300 Durathane DTM Urethane Mastic (250 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 to 5.0 mils. • Application: Conventional or HVLP (high volume low pressure) be done with conventional spray or airless equipment or brush or roller. Exterior CMU Primer: • Preparation: Mortar should cure for at least 30 days and preferably 90 days prior to priming. Fill block with an appropriate block filler. Surfaces previously coated with water thinned cement-based paint must be prepared with extra care. If the material appears to be adhering tightly, a masonry sealer may be applied to seal the surface. Check adhesion by applying a piece of masking tape. If the sealer peels off and has loose particles, remove all chalking or crumbling material, re-seal and re-check adhesion. Surfaces to be coated must be dry, clean, sound, and free from all contamination including loose and peeling paint, dirt, grease, oil, wax, concrete curing agents and bond breakers, chalk, efflorescence, mildew, rust, product fines, and dust. Remove loose paint, chalk, and efflorescence by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, and/or pressure washing. Putty all nail holes and caulk all cracks and open seams. Sand all glossy, rough, and patched surfaces. Feather back all rough edges to sound surface by sanding. • Prime: (2) Coats PPG; Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Hi Fill Latex Block Filler • Application: Brush, Roll or Spray Exterior Traffic Safety Marking: • Preparation: All surfaces must be clean, dry and free from oil, grease, antifreeze, loose sand, aggregate and chipping/peeling existing striping. Any curing compounds used on new concrete must be mechanically abraded off prior to striping. When striping on freshly sealed surfaces use caution as some sealers can affect the curing and adhesion of traffic paint. When in doubt, always test adhesion. For complete drying and minimum dirt retention when striping parking lots, the lots should be closed to traffic for two hours minimum after painting. New asphalt and concrete should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 14 days to maximize adhesion and durability. Owner Option 1: • Finish: (1) coat PPG; A-2886B Type II, White Zone Marking - Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.6 mils. Owner Option 2: • Finish: (1) coat PPG; A-2886B Type II, Yellow Zone Marking - Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.6 mils • Application: plying a test strip to determine dry to no- pickup time when the humidity is higher than 65%. Cone whenever necessary. • Do not heat paint in striping system above 60 C. • Do not apply when temperatures are below 3 C. • Do not apply when rain is forecast. • Do not apply when temperatures are near or below the dew point or rain is forecast within 1 hour. • Do not thin more than 5% with acetone and then use immediately. • Do not apply if temperature is expected to fall below freezing for 6 hours after application of paint. • Application Equipment: Apply with a high quality brush, roller, or by airless spray equipment. • Airless Spray: Pressure 2000 psi, tip 0.015” - 0.021”Spray equipment must be handled with due care and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. High-pressure injection of coating s into the skin by airless equipment may cause serious injury. • Brush: Polyester/Nylon Brush • Roller: All-purpose nap roller cover. DIVISIONS 11 - 14 - NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10700 - EXTRUDED ALUMINUM CANOPY 1.1 General: Provide canopies as shown and specified. A. Standards: Materials and installation shall conform to the following: 1. AWS, D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel 2. AMMA, Aluminum Finishes AAMA 2604 (FGIA 2604) - Powder Coat B. Quality Assurance 1. Shop Drawings: To be created under the guidance of a professional engineer. Site Specific stamped drawing may be required by the manufacturer based on location. Drawings must indicate size, material and finish. Include plan, elevations and sections to clearly outline the canopy locations. Include installation procedures, details of joints, attachments and clearances. a. Submit within 15 days after contract award. 2. Color charts showing manufacturer's full range o f colors from standard line including Tenant's custom "charcoal" color match to prototypical window mullion system. 2.1 Manufacturers: A. Architectural Fabrication, Inc. - Manufacturer is located at 2100 E. Richmond Avenue, Fort Worth, TX 76104. P: (800) 962-8027. E: chipotle@arch-fab.com, W: www.arch-fab.com B. Substitutions are acceptable assuming they comply with this specification, are submitted based on Quality Assurance and Division1 - Section 01100 requirements and have minimum 10 years experience, and only when approved by Arch PM and Tenant DM. 1. Awnex, Contact: Katie Dicks, P: 770-704-7140 x151, E: katie@awnexinc.com 2. Uni-Structures, Contact: Dana Fredericks, P: 678-974-1773 3. API, Contact: Jade Moore-Esposito, P: 813-925-0144, E: jesposito@americanproducts.com 2.2 Materials: A. Specifications are based on Architectural Fabrication, Inc. - Helios Canopy Patent #9,976,310 1. Framing: Gutter fascia, tube, angles: 6063-T6 alloy extruded aluminum. Gutter to be notched in the back to allow steel support arms to pass through. 2. Decking: Extruded aluminum 8" wide deck pan in 6063-T6 or 6063-T5 alloy (Roll form is not acceptable) 3. Steel Support Arms: 3" x 3" x .250" Steel tube support arms w/ 8" w x 5"h x 1/2" thick steel plate welded to the back. Must manufacture steel arm in manner to leave room for LED enclosure at back of canopy. 4. Hardware and Fasteners: Nuts, bolts, washers, clevis pins, screws, anchors and pipe spacers to be zinc plated or galvanized steel required to suit application and per pre-engineered canopy load requirements. Typical wall anchors are minimum Yi" diameter. Touch up paint must be provided for each canopy to allow for potential repairs in the field. 5. Flashing: Shall be minimum 0.040-inch aluminum, fabricated to prevent leakage and sealed with Novaflex metal roof sealant in custom color match. Another equivalent sealant is acceptable. 6. LED Enclosure: Each canopy is to have a preformed aluminum LED enclosure along the back edge of the canopy finished in the same powder coat as the canopy. 1" nominal inside width, and a minimum aluminum sheet thickness of .063". 7. Scuppers: Drainage for canopy is (2) aluminum scuppers located at the front of the canopy per drawings. See finish below for details. 8. Finish: All aluminum shall be powder coat finish per FGIA 2604 (aka AAMA 2604). Steel shall be commercially blasted, then coated with a zinc rich primer, and finally the top coat of super polyester powder (2604 compliant) applied. 3.1 Installation: A. Install canopies per manufacturer's written instructions and videos, and as indicated on architectural drawings B. Locate and place canopies level, plumb and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. C. Use concealed anchors where possible. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items to the factory that cannot be refinished in the field. Make required alterations and refinish e ntire unit or provide new units. E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a co ating of bituminous paint or elastomeric coating on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals. 3.1 Installation: A. Examination: 1. Verify that site environmental conditions are appropriate for application of coatings specified. 2. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive coatings are dry. 3. Ensure that moisture-retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture content within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale, oil, grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions. 5. Correct the above conditions and any other conditions which could impair performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application. B. Preparation: 1. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance. 2. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; seal with shellac or other coating acceptable to paint manufacturer stains and marks that might bleed through paint finishes which cannot be completely removed. 3. Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings which are adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings. 4. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of disodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry. 5. For specific substrate preparation, see individual specifications. 6. Provide necessary staging, ladders, shield, protective coverings and drop cloths. Protect floors, walls and adjacent work and materials. Remove and properly replace temporary protection and coverings removed from any part o f the work or finish. Repair damage at Contractor's expense. C. Application: 1. General: Mix, prepare and apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. b. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. c. Coating surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the coating system descriptions. d. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. e. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, grilles, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 2. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to m anufacturer's written instructions. a. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method. b. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements as directed by Tenant. Paints and coatings work is subject to acceptance by the Tenant. c. Keep brushes and rollers clean, free from contamination and suitable for the finish required. d. Unless otherwise indicated, allow exterior paints to dry for 48 hours and interior paints to dry for 24 hours between coats. e. Sand lightly and remove dust between coats to achieve required finish. f. Finished surfaces shall be uniform in finish and color and free of brush marks, sagging, holidays, corduroy and other imperfections. Coverage and hide shall be complete. g. Edges of paint or finish adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean without overlapping. Cut paint in neatly around glass or other edges. h. Paints and coatings work is subject to acceptance by the Tenant. Correct unsatisfactory work not complying with these specifications as directed by the Tenant. D. Cleaning: 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. E. Protection: 1. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect / Tenant. 2. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 3. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. F. Maintenance: Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Tenant. 1. Provide one gallon of paint and wood stain of each type and color required for maintenance purposes. Provide original, unopened, labeled containers with color samples and a list of project use. D. Color Guide: Refer to drawings for exact location of all colors NOT USED MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS G015 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 WHERE WHAT COLOR SHEEN TAG Exterior Traffic Safety Marking PPG A-2886B Type II, Low VOC Acrylic Fast Dry Solvent PPG White Zone Marking Satin NA Exterior Traffic Safety Marking PPG A-2886B Type II, Low VOC Acrylic Fast Dry Solvent PPG Yellow Zone Marking Satin NA Exterior (Roof Mounted) Gas Piping PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish 4216 Plus HP Series Yellow Semi-Gloss NA Exterior and Interior Gas Piping, Where Exposed PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish 4216 Plus HP Series Match Surrounding Finishes/Verify with Architect Semi-Gloss NA Exterior CMU Primer PPG Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Hi-Fill Latex Block Filler White Flat NA Exterior CMU PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish 4216 Plus HP Series PPG 1001-6 "Knight's Armor" Semi-Gloss NA Exterior Ferrous Metals PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish 4216 Plus HP Series PPG 1001-6 "Knight's Armor" Semi-Gloss NA Exterior Stucco and EIFS Patio and Wet Areas PPG Perma-Crete High Build Acrylic Topcoat 4-22 Series PPG 1001-6 "Knight's Armor" Flat NA Exterior Stucco and EIFS Patio and Wet Areas (Alternate) PPG Perma-Crete High Build Acrylic Topcoat 4-22 Series PPG 1010-2 "Fog" Flat NA Exterior Stucco and EIFS Patio and Wet Areas (Alternate) PPG Perma-Crete High Build Acrylic Topcoat 4-22 Series PPG 1058-7 "Autumn Ridge" Flat NA Patio Railing Durethane DTM Urethane 95-3300 Series PPG 1001-6 "Knight's Armor" Gloss NA AG L E R O C K N G I N E E R I N G SU R V E Y E D B Y : DR A W N B Y : PR O J E C T N O . AP P R O V E D B Y : DE S C R I P T I O N DA T E RE V I S I O N S 1 2 3 4 5 6 AT T E N T I O N Th i s d o c u m e n t o r a n y p a r t t h e r e o f i n d e t a i l o r d e s i g n c o n c e p t is t h e p r o p e r t y o f E a g l e R o c k E n g i n e e r i n g a n d s h a l l n o t b e co p i e d i n a n y f o r m w i t h o u t t h e w r i t t e n a u t h o r i z a t i o n o f E a g l e Ro c k E n g i n e e r i n g . E SH E E T N O . SH E E T N A M E CI V I L P L A N N I N G S U R V E Y I N G ID A H O F A L L S ( 2 0 8 ) 5 4 2 - 2 6 6 5 RE X B U R G ( 2 0 8 ) 3 5 9 - 2 6 6 5 PR E P A R E D F O R : MA T T I S P A R T N E R S CH I P O T L E S I T E P L A N A. S N A R R L. L U S K P. S N A R R 23 1 6 2 16 4 1 0 1- 1 9 - 2 4 1 CO V E R CO V E R CIVIL SITEWORK FOR: PART OF THE NORTHWEST 1/4 OF THE SOUTHEAST 1/4 OF SECTION 36, TOWNSHIP 6 NORTH, RANGE 39 EAST, BOISE MERIDIAN, CITY OF REXBURG, MADISON COUNTY, IDAHO APPROVED BY: ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER APPROVED BY: LUMEN APPROVED BY: INTERMOUNTAIN GAS CHIPOTLE SITE PLAN January 2024 Designed By: AGLE ROCK NGINEERING CIVIL PLANNING SURVEYING IDAHO FALLS (208) 542-2665 E REXBURG (208) 359-2665 S Y E L L O W S T O N E H W Y PROJ E C T LOCA T I O N UNIVERSITY BLVD W E S N APPROVED BY: CITY OF REXBURG IDAHO FALLS REXBURG BLACKFOOT CHUBBUCK TWIN FALLS SUN VALLEY CASCADE McCALL BOISE MOSCOW COUER d' ALENE RUPERT SALMON AMMON ST.ANTHONY ISLAND PARK POCATELLO MOUNTAIN HOME RIGBY IONA SHELLEY SHEET INDEX SHEET No.SHEET NAME SHEET TITLE 1 COVER 2 G-1 NOTES 3 4 C-2 OVERALL SITE PLAN 5 GRADING & STORM PLAN 6 D-1 DETAILS D-2 DETAILS 2 G- 1 NO T E S AG L E R O C K N G I N E E R I N G SU R V E Y E D B Y : DR A W N B Y : PR O J E C T N O . AP P R O V E D B Y : DE S C R I P T I O N DA T E RE V I S I O N S 1 2 3 4 5 6 AT T E N T I O N Th i s d o c u m e n t o r a n y p a r t t h e r e o f i n d e t a i l o r d e s i g n c o n c e p t is t h e p r o p e r t y o f E a g l e R o c k E n g i n e e r i n g a n d s h a l l n o t b e co p i e d i n a n y f o r m w i t h o u t t h e w r i t t e n a u t h o r i z a t i o n o f E a g l e Ro c k E n g i n e e r i n g . E SH E E T N O . SH E E T N A M E CI V I L P L A N N I N G S U R V E Y I N G ID A H O F A L L S ( 2 0 8 ) 5 4 2 - 2 6 6 5 RE X B U R G ( 2 0 8 ) 3 5 9 - 2 6 6 5 PR E P A R E D F O R : MA T T I S P A R T N E R S CH I P O T L E S I T E P L A N A. S N A R R L. L U S K P. S N A R R 23 1 6 2 16 4 1 0 1- 1 9 - 2 4 GIDUOYEROFEBLL A C DIG LINE 1-800-342-1585 ELECTRICAL NOTES: 1.ALL TRAFFIC SIGNAGE SHALL BE DESIGNED, CONSTRUCTED AND PLACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CURRENT MANUAL OF UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (MUTCD) WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTIONS: 2.ALL STOP AND YIELD SIGNS USED IN ANY SUBDIVISION SHALL BE A MINIMUM 30”X 30”. ENGINEER GRADE SHEETING SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED. 3.ALL ROAD NAME AND STREET SIGNS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM 4” LEGEND. BOTH BACKGROUND AND LEGEND SHALL BE REFLECTIVE STANDARD COLORS WITH WHITE LEGEND AND GREEN BACKGROUND EXCEPT PRIVATE ROADS, WHICH WILL HAVE A BLUE BACKGROUND. 4.SUBSTRATE MATERIAL SHALL BE ALUMINUM; NO FIBERGLASS OR PLASTIC WILL BE ACCEPTED. 5.THE MINIMUM SIZE FOR SPEED LIMIT SIGNS SHALL BE 24”W X 30”L WITH BLACK LEGEND ON WHITE BACKGROUND. 6.POSTS SHALL BE METAL AND SHALL BE ANCHORED WITH A “SOIL TYPE” ANCHOR. NO CONCRETE SHALL BE USED AS AN ANCHOR. POSTS SHALL BE 2”X 2” SQUARE AND SHALL MEET BREAK-A-WAY STANDARDS OF THE STATE OF IDAHO. NO U-CHANNEL SHALL BE USED. 7.THE MINIMUM HEIGHT OF SIGNS SHALL BE 6' FROM THE ROAD SURFACE TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SIGN. 8.MAINTENANCE OF ALL STREET AND TRAFFIC SIGNS WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE DEVELOPER UNTIL THE STREETS ARE OFFICIALLY ACCEPTED FOR MAINTENANCE BY THE CITY OF REXBURG. SIGNAGE NOTES: GENERAL NOTES: 1.ALL NEW ELECTRICAL FACILITIES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CURRENT ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER SERVICE POLICY. 2.DEVELOPER SHALL BEAR ALL COSTS TO RELOCATE OR REMOVE EXISTING POWER POLES, LIGHT POLES, ANCHOR GUYS AND MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL FACILITIES. 3.ALL PVC ELECTRIC CONDUITS SHALL BE PVC SCHEDULE 40. ALL FIBERGLASS CONDUITS SHALL MEET ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER'S MARKING AND STRENGTH RATING REQUIREMENTS. CONDUIT DIAMETERS SHALL MEET ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER'S DESIGN. ALL ELBOWS SWEEP RADII SHALL BE 36”, 48” OR 60” DEPENDING ON ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER'S DESIGN. 4.ALL PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CONDUITS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE DEVELOPER. 5.TRENCH EXCAVATION AND CONDUIT PLACEMENT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER SERVICE POLICY SPECIFICATIONS AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH OSHA STANDARDS. CONDUIT TRENCH DEPTHS SHALL BE BETWEEN 36” AND 48” (NOT TO EXCEED 60”) AND INCLUDE THE REQUIRED SAND PLACEMENT BELOW AND ABOVE THE PLACED CONDUIT. 6.THE ENGINEER SHALL PROVIDE ALL STAKING AND LAYOUT OF NEW ELECTRICAL FACILITIES INCLUDING POWER POLES. 7.THE CONTACTOR SHALL RETAIN AND PROTECT ALL EXISTING POWER POLES AND ELECTRICAL FACILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION. 8.THE DEVELOPER SHALL COORDINATE ALL ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION WITH ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER. 9.CLEARANCE BETWEEN OVERHEAD POWER AND NEW BUILDING STRUCTURES SHALL BE MAINTAINED MEETING THE CURRENT ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER SERVICE POLICY. 10.SEE ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN FOR OFF-SITE AND ON-SITE ELECTRICAL LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION DETAILS. IN THE EVENT THE FIBER OPTIC UTILITY ELECTS TO USE THE SAME TRENCH, THEY MUST MEET NESC UNDERGROUND UTILITY CLEARANCES. 11.A 15 FOOT WIDE PUBLIC UTILITY EASEMENT IS PERPETUALLY RESERVED WITHIN EACH LOT ALONG ALL ROAD FRONTAGES FOR THE USE OF PUBLIC UTILITIES WITHIN THIS SUBDIVISION. NO PERMANENT STRUCTURES, SIDEWALKS, AND DRIVEWAYS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OVER SAID EASEMENT (OTHER THAN CROSSINGS) IN ORDER FOR THE UTILITY COMPANIES TO MAINTAIN. FIRE DEPARTMENT NOTES: 1.TURNING RADIUS (CUL-DE-SACS/HAMMERHEADS) SHALL MEET IFC D103.4. DEAD ENDS SHALL REQUIRE A 96' DIAMETER CUL-DE-SAC FOR TURNING EMERGENCY VEHICLES. THE CUL-DE-SAC DESIGN FOR THIS SUBDIVISION IS DESIGNED WITH A 98' DIAMETER TURNAROUND FROM BACK OF CURBS (96' TURNING WIDTH). 2.FIRE CODE SIGNAGE SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE FIRE CODE OFFICIAL. WHEN REQUIRED, SIGNS MEETING IFC D103.6 SHALL BE INSTALLED (REQUIRED UPON OFFICIAL OR WHEN STREETS COMING INTO DEAD ENDS ARE LESS THAN 26' IN WIDTH AND THE TURNING RADIUS DOES NOT MEET 96' DIAMETER). 1.UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON THESE PLANS ALL WORK IS TO BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE TO CURRENT CITY OF REXBURG STANDARD DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN A COMPLETE COPY ON SITE AT ALL TIMES (RESOLUTION 2016-15). 2.ALL DISTANCES AND DATA SHALL BE CHECKED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. IN CASE OF CONFLICT THE ENGINEER SHALL BE NOTIFIED IMMEDIATELY SO THAT CLARIFICATION MAY BE MADE PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK. 3.BASIS OF BEARINGS CITY OF REXBURG CONTROL. 4.ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE NAVD 88 DATUM TO FINISHED SURFACE OR PIPE INVERT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5.GENERAL LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF UTILITIES ARE SHOWN ON THE PLANS. THEY ARE TO BE USED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE APPROPRIATE UTILITY COMPANIES WHEN CONSTRUCTION MIGHT INTERFERE WITH NORMAL OPERATIONS OF ANY UTILITIES. IT SHALL ALSO BE THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO HAVE THE APPROPRIATE UTILITY COMPANY FIELD-LOCATE ANY UTILITY INSTALLATIONS WHICH MIGHT BE AFFECTED BY CONSTRUCTION PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK IN THAT AREA. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING SERVICE OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND FOR RESTORING ANY UTILITIES DAMAGED DUE TO CONSTRUCTION AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. 6.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SECURING SOURCES FOR GRANULAR MATERIAL, DISPOSAL SITES, AND ANY ADDITIONAL MATERIAL THAT MAY BE NECESSARY FOR PROPER CONSTRUCTION OF THIS PROJECT. 7.IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO MAKE ARRANGEMENTS FOR WATER REQUIRED FOR TESTING, COMPACTION AND DUST CONTROL MEASURES. 8.ROCK EXCAVATION MAY BE ENCOUNTERED DURING UTILITY CONSTRUCTION. EVERY EFFORT WAS MADE TO REDUCE UTILITY DEPTH WHILE STILL MEETING REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS. FOR BIDDING PURPOSES CONTACT OWNER FOR TEST HOLE DEPTH OF ROCK. 9.DEMOLITION IS REQUIRED ON THIS PROJECT PRIOR TO JOB START. CONTRACTOR/BIDDER TO WALK JOB AND IDENTIFY DEMOLITION WORK PRIOR TO BIDDING. 10.ALL UTILITY MAIN LINES (WATER, SANITARY SEWER AND STORM DRAINAGE) WITHIN PUBLIC STREETS WILL BE OWNED AND MAINTAINED BY THE CITY AND CONSTRUCTED TO CURRENT CITY OF REXBURG STANDARD DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS; INSPECTED AND CERTIFIED BY AN ENGINEER, LICENSED IN THE STATE OF IDAHO; AND HAVE “AS-BUILT” DRAWINGS PROVIDED TO THE CITY ENGINEER. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS PLAN MAY RESULT IN THE CITY'S WITHHOLDING OF BUILDING PERMITS, CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY, AND WATER OR ELECTRICAL SERVICE. 11.LANDSCAPING SIGNS NOT TO EXCEED 3 FEET IN HEIGHT IN THE CLEAR SIGHT TRIANGLE. 12.THERE SHALL BE A 15-FOOT WIDE PUBLIC UTILITY EASEMENT WITHIN EACH LOT ALONG ALL ROAD/STREET FRONTAGES FOR POWER, PHONE, CABLE, GAS, ETC. (GAS REQUIRES SEPARATE TRENCH). THE EXACT LOCATION OF TRANSFORMERS AND PHONE BOXES WILL BE FIELD DETERMINED BY EACH UTILITY COMPANY AFTER ROADS/STREETS HAVE BEEN CONSTRUCTED TO SUBGRADE AND SIDE SLOPES HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 13.ALL FRONTAGE PUBLIC UTILITY EASEMENTS (PUE) SHALL BE 15 FEET FROM BACK OF SIDEWALK UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 14.LUMEN/CENTURY LINK/SPARKLIGHT USES THE SAME TRENCH AS ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER AND REQUIRES CONDUITS (CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ALL FOR SCHEDULING). POWER DESIGN SHOWN IS PRELIMINARY AND ANY CONSTRUCTION STAKING OF POWER SHALL BE CONFIRMED WITH ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER FOR FINAL LAYOUT. VERIFY CONDUIT SIZE MEETING ROCKY MOUNTAIN POWER DESIGN PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 15.ALL UTILITIES INCLUDING POWER, PHONE, CABLE, ETC. EXCEPT NATURAL GAS MAY BE IN THE SAME TRENCH. NATURAL GAS MUST BE IN A SEPARATE TRENCH. 16.A 12” SPACING SHALL BE REQUIRED BETWEEN DIFFERENT UTILITIES IN THE SAME TRENCH. 17.CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT DIG-LINE AT 811, (800) 342-1585 OR (208) 342-1585 PRIOR TO ANY UTILITY CONSTRUCTION. WATER NOTES: 1.ALL WATER MAINS, SERVICES, AND ALL APPURTENANCES SHALL MEET CURRENT CITY OF REXBURG STANDARD DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THIS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MATERIALS, LABOR, AND INSTALLATION INCLUDING VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SEPARATION DISTANCES AND SLOPE REQUIREMENTS. 2.ALL WATER MAIN LINE SHALL BE CLASS 50 DUCTILE IRON MEETING AWWA C-151. 3.MINIMUM COVER OVER ALL WATER LINES SHALL BE 6 FEET. 4.WATER LINE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM SEPARATION DISTANCE OF TEN (10) FEET FROM ANY SANITARY SEWER OR STORM SEWER MEASURED FROM THE OUTSIDE OF EACH PIPE AS OUTLINED IN THE ISPWC 2020 STANDARD DRAWING SD-407. CROSS AT APPROXIMATELY RIGHT ANGLES WITH FULL PIPE SECTIONS AND MINIMUM OF 1.5 FEET OF VERTICAL SEPARATION. 5.THRUST BLOCKS SHALL BE PLACED AT ALL DIRECTION CHANGES FOR PRESSURE PIPE. 6.FIRE HYDRANTS SHALL HAVE TWO 2-1/2” DIAMETER HOSE NOZZLES AND ONE 4-1/2” DIAMETER HOSE NOZZLE PER CITY STANDARDS. 7.WATER AND SEWER SERVICE LINES ARE SHOWN AT APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS. CONTRACTOR TO CONTACT DIG LINE PRIOR TO ALL EXCAVATION AND FIELD VERIFY LOCATION AND WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS (IF APPLICABLE) FOR ANY ADDITIONAL SERVICES REQUIRED. 8.WATER METERS AND PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES - SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. ALL PLUMBING SHALL MEET THE STATE OF IDAHO PLUMBING CODE. COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS SHALL REQUIRE THE WATER METERS TO BE INSTALLED ON THE INTERIOR AND MOUNTED IN A HORIZONTAL POSITION WITHIN A HEATED MECHANICAL ROOM. 9.CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL FIRE LINES/SPRINKLERS MEETING THE CURRENT VERSION OF THE INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE AND SHALL INCLUDE ALL APPURTENANCES (IF APPLICABLE). 10.IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL REQUIRED BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES ON WATER SERVICES. 11.ALL WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES SHALL BE TESTED FOR PRESSURE, LEAKAGE, AND BACTERIA MEETING CITY AND AWWA STANDARDS AND SHALL BE CLEANED AND DISINFECTED PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY THE CITY FOR DOMESTIC USE. TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA C651 STANDARDS. AWWA STANDARDS REQUIRE EACH STREET TO BE TESTED INDIVIDUALLY FOR PRESSURE, LEAKAGE, AND BACTERIA. STORM SEWER NOTES: 1.ALL STORM SEWER SHALL MEET CURRENT CITY OF REXBURG STANDARD DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THIS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MATERIALS, LABOR, AND INSTALLATION INCLUDING VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SEPARATION DISTANCES AND SLOPE REQUIREMENTS. 2.SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS: WATER LINE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM SEPARATION DISTANCE OF TEN (10) FEET FROM ANY SANITARY SEWER OR STORM SEWER MEASURED FROM THE OUTSIDE OF EACH PIPE AS OUTLINED IN THE ISPWC 2020 STANDARD DRAWING SD-407, CROSS AT APPROXIMATELY RIGHT ANGLES WITH FULL PIPE SECTIONS, AND MINIMUM OF 1.5 FEET OF VERTICAL SEPARATION. 3.STORM DRAIN PIPE SHALL MEET ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: PVC SDR 26 MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM D 3034 FOR DIAMETERS 18” OR LESS, ASTM F 679 FOR DIAMETERS 18” OR GREATER, PVC RIBBED PIPE MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM F 794 MEETING THE CURRENT CITY OF REXBURG STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS. 4.CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM TESTING AND CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS MEETING CITY STANDARDS. SANITARY SEWER NOTES: 1.ALL SEWER MAIN SHALL BE PVC SDR 35 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTMD3034 AND SERVICE SHALL MEET CURRENT CITY OF REXBURG STANDARD DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THIS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MATERIALS, LABOR, AND INSTALLATION INCLUDING VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SEPARATION DISTANCES AND SLOPE REQUIREMENTS. 2.SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS: WATER LINE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM SEPARATION DISTANCE OF TEN (10) FEET FROM ANY SANITARY SEWER OR STORM SEWER MEASURED FROM THE OUTSIDE OF EACH PIPE AS OUTLINED IN THE ISPWC 2020 STANDARD DRAWING SD-407, CROSS AT APPROXIMATELY RIGHT ANGLES WITH FULL PIPE SECTIONS, AND MINIMUM OF 1.5 FEET OF VERTICAL SEPARATION. 3.CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM TESTING AND CLEANING OF SEWER MAINS MEETING CITY STANDARDS. BTM BOTTOM BLDG BUILDING CB CATCH BASIN CL CENTERLINE CONC CONCRETE DIA DIAMETER ELEV ELEVATION EO EDGE OF OIL EX EXISTING FH FIRE HYDRANT FL FLOW LINE FW FACE OF WALK HORZ HORIZONTAL HP HIGH POINT INV INVERT LF LINEAR FEET LP LOW POINT MAX MAXIMUM MH MANHOLE MIN MINIMUM MX MATCH EXISTING OSHA OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY & HEALTH ADMINISTRATION PC POINT OF CURVATURE PT POINT OF TANGENT P.U.E.PUBLIC UTILITY EASEMENT PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE REQ'D REQUIRED MH MANHOLE SD STORM DRAIN SSMH SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE STA STATIONING TR TRANSFORMER TBC TOP BACK OF CURB TBRC TOP BACK RIBBON CURB TYP TYPICAL VERT VERTICAL VG VALLEY GUTTER EX EXISTING XG EXISTING GROUND ABBREVIATIONS: DESCRIPTION PRESSURE LINE (WATER LINE) SANITARY SEWER MAIN LINETYPE GAS LINE FENCE LINE GAS UGP OHP UNDERGROUND POWER LINE OVERHEAD POWER LINE TELEPHONE LINE FIBER OPTICFO PROPOSED/EXISTING ELEVATION PROPOSED/EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT PROPOSED/EXISTING VALVE PROPOSED/EXISTING CURB AND GUTTER PROPOSED/EXISTING STREET LIGHT PROPOSED/EXISTING POWER POLE EXIST.PRO.DESCRIPTION PROPOSED/EXISTING MANHOLE PROPOSED/EXISTING STORM DRAIN INLET PROPOSED ASPHALT DRAINAGE FLOW ARROW LEGEND 0.75% BOUNDARY LINE CENTERLINE SECTION LINE CONCRETE EXISTING GROUND CONTOUR4727 8" W ( 8" SS TBC 72.1 0 XG = 7 2 . 1 0 PROJECT MANAGER..............................................................................KURT ROLAND...................................................(208) 542-2665 OFFICE PROJECT ENGINEER...............................................................................PAUL SNARR......................................................(208) 542-2665 CITY ENGINEER......................................................................................KEITH DAVIDSON...............................................(208) 359-3020 PROJECT CONTACTS: PUBLIC UTILITY EASEMENT STORM DRAIN MAIN ( 12" SD IDAHO DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (DEQ) ...............CARLIN FEISTHAMEL, PE ...................................(208) 528-2650 RIP-RAP DIGLINE (CALL BEFORE YOU DIG).....................................................................................................................................(800) 342-1585 MADISON FIRE DEPARTMENT................................................................STAN CRITTENDEN............................................(208) 359-3010 PROPOSED LIP DOWN 18" CURB & GUTTER GRADE BREAKGBGB PROPOSED WATER METER BOX C-1 COVER EXISTING TRANSFORMER EXISTING ELECTRICAL BOX EXISTING CABLE/TELEPHONE PEDESTAL (12''SS(12''SS(12''SS TOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOETOETOETOETOETOETOETOETOE FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL 4855 4855 4855 4853 4853 4854 4854 4854 4856 48 5 5 48 5 6 48 5 3 4853 4853 IRR 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 6' ' W I G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G (12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' W S 4854 G B G B G B GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) (12' ' S D (12 ' ' S D (12 ' ' S D (12' ' S D (12 ' ' S D B L O C K 1 LOT 5 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS 1.5''W 1.5''W 1.5''W 1.5''W 1. 5 ' ' W 1. 5 ' ' W 1. 5 ' ' W 1. 5 ' ' W ( 1 2 ' ' S D 4 20' BLDG FF: 55.40 24'20'20'24' 13' 24 ' 20 ' 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 2 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 8 9 10 11 11 4 4 3 3 4 17.50' 135.63' 15 7 . 8 3 ' 59 . 3 8 ' 1 6 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 34.11' 66 . 6 8 ' 1 2 2 2 1 10' 44 ' 2 AG L E R O C K N G I N E E R I N G SU R V E Y E D B Y : DR A W N B Y : PR O J E C T N O . AP P R O V E D B Y : DE S C R I P T I O N DA T E RE V I S I O N S 1 2 3 4 5 6 AT T E N T I O N Th i s d o c u m e n t o r a n y p a r t t h e r e o f i n d e t a i l o r d e s i g n c o n c e p t is t h e p r o p e r t y o f E a g l e R o c k E n g i n e e r i n g a n d s h a l l n o t b e co p i e d i n a n y f o r m w i t h o u t t h e w r i t t e n a u t h o r i z a t i o n o f E a g l e Ro c k E n g i n e e r i n g . E SH E E T N O . SH E E T N A M E CI V I L P L A N N I N G S U R V E Y I N G ID A H O F A L L S ( 2 0 8 ) 5 4 2 - 2 6 6 5 RE X B U R G ( 2 0 8 ) 3 5 9 - 2 6 6 5 PR E P A R E D F O R : MA T T I S P A R T N E R S CH I P O T L E S I T E P L A N A. S N A R R L. L U S K P. S N A R R 23 1 6 2 16 4 1 0 1- 1 9 - 2 4 3 C- 1 OV E R A L L S I T E P L A N Fi l e L o c a t i o n : z: \ 2 0 2 3 \ 2 3 1 6 2 c h i p o t l e r e x b u r g \ 3 . 0 d e s i g n \ 3 . 1 c a d \ 3 . 1 3 f i n a l \ 2 3 1 6 2 o v e r a l l s i t e p l a n . d w g Pl o t t e d B y : an g i e Da t e P l o t t e d : Fr i d a y , J a n u a r y 1 9 2 0 2 4 a t 0 4 : 3 5 P M W E S N 020'20'10' SCALE: 1" = 20' ASPHALT PAVING PER DETAIL 9 ON SHEET D-1. 4" SANITARY SEWER SERVICE PER LATEST REVISION OF CITY OF REXBURG STANDARDS. 1.5' LIP UP CURB PER DETAIL 7 ON SHEET D-1. INSTALL STORM DRAIN MANHOLE PER CITY OF REXBURG STANDARDS. PAVING AND DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION ITEMS SEWER CONSTRUCTION ITEMS 1 2 4 6 INSTALL ADA RAMP AND TRUNCATED DOMES PER CITY OF REXBURG STANDARDS. 1 WATER CONSTRUCTION ITEMS 5 CATCH BASIN PER DETAIL 3 ON SHEET D-1. 1 2 7 8 3 9 6' SIDEWALK PER CITY OF REXBURG STANDARDS. 10 1.5' LIP DOWN CURB PER DETAIL 8 ON SHEET D-1. 5' SIDEWALK PER CITY OF REXBURG STANDARDS. TRASH ENCLOSURE 14' D x 20' W (6'-8' HIGH) INSTALL MC-3500 INFILTRATION SYSTEM. SEE DETAILS ON SHEET D-2. SEE STORM TABLES ON SHEET C-2 FOR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS. 1.5" WATER SERVICE PER CITY OF REXBURG STANDARDS. WATER METER TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARD DRAWING 16. LAND USE NOTES: PROPOSED USE: COMMERCIAL PROJECT AREA: 1.25 ACRES BUILDING AREA = 2326 SF CURRENT ZONE: CBC = COMMUNITY BUSINESS CENTER PARKING STALLS REQUIRED: 24 PARKING STALLS PROVIDED: 24 (HANDICAP PARKING STALLS: 2) LANDSCAPE AREA: 0.211 ACRES ASPHALT AREA: 0.39 ACRES 11 TRANSITION CURB LIP UP TO LIP DOWN. UNIVERSITY BLVD SAW-CUT EXISTING CURB & GUTTER FOR COMMERCIAL APPROACH PER CITY OF REXBURG STANDARDS RETAIN & PROTECT PUMP MANHOLE RETAIN & PROTECT EXISTING STORM MANHOLE CONNECT TO EXISTING 6" WATER SERVICE CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY SIZE CONNECT TO EXISTING 6" SANITARY SEWER SERVICE - CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY SIZE LOCATION AND GRADE 6" INV +/- 4842.55 (IF DIFFERENT CONTACT ENGINEER) TA M A N A D R I V E 1500 GALLON GREASE TRAP HS-20 TRAFFIC RATED (OLD CASTLE PRECAST OR EQUAL) 2 4" CONDUIT (SPRINKLER INSTALLATION) CLEANOUT (CO) 3 2" IRR LINE W/METER CO MIN INV 44.88CO MIN INV 47.03 4" SS INV 47.31 (TOP PIPE 51.40) EX SSMH RIM = 4853.71 E INV IN= 4840.91 W INV OUT= 4840.86 348 LF 12" SS @ 0.19% 12" INV 4840.71 6" CONNECTION +/- 4841.71 EX SSMH RIM = 4852.30 E INV IN= 4840.20 N INV IN=4840.15 W INV OUT= 4839.95 2% MIN SLOPE TO TANK 50 LF @ 2% MIN SLOPE RIM = 4853.90 TOP GI TANK=47.47 INV IN= 46.13 INV OUT= 45.88 100 LF @ 2.33% (CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY) STORM POND SEE SHEET C-2 FOR DESIGN (12''SS(12''SS(12''SS TOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOETOETOETOETOETOETOETOETOE FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL 4855 4855 4855 4853 4853 4854 4854 4854 4856 48 5 5 48 5 6 48 5 3 4853 4853 IRR 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 6' ' W I G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G (12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' W S 4854 G B G B G B GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) (12' ' S D (12' ' S D (12 ' ' S D (12' ' S D (12 ' ' S D B L O C K 1 LOT 5 ( 1 2 ' ' S D 4848 4849 4850 4851 4852 4853 4854 4850 (12''SS(12''SS(12''SS TOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOPTOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOETOETOETOETOETOETOETOETOE FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL 4855 4855 4855 4853 4853 4854 4854 4854 4856 48 5 5 48 5 6 48 5 3 4853 4853 IRR 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 6' ' W I G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G (12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' W S 4854 G B G B G B GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) 12 ' ' S D ) (12' ' S D (12' ' S D (12 ' ' S D (12' ' S D (12 ' ' S D B L O C K 1 LOT 5 ( 1 2 ' ' S D TBC/LP: 4853.20 TBC/LP: 4853.20 TBC/LP: 4853.20 TBC/LP: 4853.40 TW: 4855.30 TW: 4855.12 TW: 4855.12 TBC/HP: 4854.85 TBC: 4855.20TBC: 4855.30 TBC: 4854.80 TBC: 4854.70 TBC: 4854.80 TBC: 4855.08 TBC: 4855.00 TBC: 4855.10 TBC: 4855.30 TBC: 4854.96 TBC: 4854.70 TBC/HP: 4854.76 TBW:4855.04+/- TBC: 4855.54+/- TBC: 4854.60 TBC: 4854.60TBC: 4854.30 TBC/HP: 4854.35 TBC: 4853.75 TBC: 4853.50 TBC: 4853.60 TBC: 4853.50 TBC: 4853.50 TBC: 4853.60 TBC: 4853.50 TBC: 4853.50 TBC: 4853.60 TBC: 4853.70 TBC: 4853.70 TBC: 4853.60 TBC: 4853.50 TBC: 4854.80 TBC: 4854.78 TBC: 4854.82TBC: 4855.18 TBC: 4854.80 TBC/HP: 4855.00 TBC: 4855.20 TBC: 4855.20 TBC: 4855.00 TBC: 4854.78 TBC: 4854.82 TBC: 4855.18 TBC: 4855.18 BLDG FF: 55.40 TBC/HP: 4853.90 TBC: 4855.12 TBC: 4855.00 TBC: 4855.20 TW: 4855.30 TW: 4855.30 TW: 4855.30 TBC: 4853.08+/- BTM CC: 4852.76+/-BTM CC: 4852.87+/- TBC: 4853.25+/- TBC: 4854.60 TBC: 4854.60 TBW: 4854.79+/- TBC: 4855.29+/- TBC/HP: 4855.00 TBC/LP: 4854.20 TBC: 4855.12 TBC: 4855.30 TBC: 4854.40 TBC: 4855.15 TBC: 4854.80 TBC: 4854.40 TBC: 4854.50 TBC: 4855.26 TBC: 4855.18 TBC/LP: 4854.15 TBC: 4854.55 TBC: 4854.25 TBC/HP: 4854.65 TBC: 4854.87+/- BTM CC: 4854.59+/- BTM CC: 4854.84+/- TBC: 4855.26+/- OIL: 4853.65 OIL: 4854.20 TBC: 4855.30 CNC/OIL: 4854.50 CNC/OIL: 4854.50 CNC/OIL: 4854.80 CNC/OIL: 4854.80 TBC: 4854.60 101' OF 12" PVC AT 0.22% 61' OF 12" PVC AT 0.22% 16' OF 12" PVC AT 0.62% 71' O F 1 2 " P V C A T 0 . 2 2 % 11' OF 12" PVC AT 0.27% 27' OF 12" PVC AT 0.22% INV=4848.91 INV=4850.60INV=4849.37 45' OF 12" PVC AT 0.22% CB #7 GRATE: 4852.60 12" S INV IN: 4849.33 12" NW INV OUT: 4849.23 CB #6 GRATE: 4853.60 12" NW INV OUT: 4850.60 CB #4 GRATE: 4852.60 12" S INV IN: 4849.57 12" N INV OUT: 4849.47 CB #3 GRATE: 4852.60 12" N INV OUT: 4849.60 CB #2 GRATE: 4852.80 12" N INV OUT: 4849.80 CB #1 GRATE: 4853.55 12" S INV IN: 4849.57 12" N INV OUT: 4849.47 CB #5 GRATE: 4854.05 12" SE INV IN: 4849.07 12" NW INV OUT: 4848.97 TOP WL: 4852.60 TOP WL: 4852.60 TBC/LP: 4854.65 AG L E R O C K N G I N E E R I N G SU R V E Y E D B Y : DR A W N B Y : PR O J E C T N O . AP P R O V E D B Y : DE S C R I P T I O N DA T E RE V I S I O N S 1 2 3 4 5 6 AT T E N T I O N Th i s d o c u m e n t o r a n y p a r t t h e r e o f i n d e t a i l o r d e s i g n c o n c e p t is t h e p r o p e r t y o f E a g l e R o c k E n g i n e e r i n g a n d s h a l l n o t b e co p i e d i n a n y f o r m w i t h o u t t h e w r i t t e n a u t h o r i z a t i o n o f E a g l e Ro c k E n g i n e e r i n g . E SH E E T N O . SH E E T N A M E CI V I L P L A N N I N G S U R V E Y I N G ID A H O F A L L S ( 2 0 8 ) 5 4 2 - 2 6 6 5 RE X B U R G ( 2 0 8 ) 3 5 9 - 2 6 6 5 PR E P A R E D F O R : MA T T I S P A R T N E R S CH I P O T L E S I T E P L A N A. S N A R R L. L U S K P. S N A R R 23 1 6 2 16 4 1 0 1- 1 9 - 2 4 W E S N 020'20'10' SCALE: 1" = 20' 40379 SQFT STORM AREA: 4 C- 2 GR A D I N G & S T O R M P L A N LEGEND: DRAINAGE FLOW RIP-RAP PROPOSED LIP DOWN 18" CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED LIP UP 18" CURB & GUTTER TA M A N A D R I V E UNIVERSITY BLVD NOTES: 1.THE STORM POND IS DESIGNED AT A 3:1 SLOPE. RIP RAP RIP RAP Fi l e L o c a t i o n : z: \ 2 0 2 3 \ 2 3 1 6 2 c h i p o t l e r e x b u r g \ 3 . 0 d e s i g n \ 3 . 1 c a d \ 3 . 1 3 f i n a l \ 2 3 1 6 2 d e t a i l s . d w g Pl o t t e d B y : an g i e Da t e P l o t t e d : We d n e s d a y , J a n u a r y 1 0 2 0 2 4 a t 1 2 : 5 9 P M 5 D- 1 DE T A I L S AG L E R O C K N G I N E E R I N G SU R V E Y E D B Y : DR A W N B Y : PR O J E C T N O . AP P R O V E D B Y : DE S C R I P T I O N DA T E RE V I S I O N S 1 2 3 4 5 6 AT T E N T I O N Th i s d o c u m e n t o r a n y p a r t t h e r e o f i n d e t a i l o r d e s i g n c o n c e p t is t h e p r o p e r t y o f E a g l e R o c k E n g i n e e r i n g a n d s h a l l n o t b e co p i e d i n a n y f o r m w i t h o u t t h e w r i t t e n a u t h o r i z a t i o n o f E a g l e Ro c k E n g i n e e r i n g . E SH E E T N O . SH E E T N A M E CI V I L P L A N N I N G S U R V E Y I N G ID A H O F A L L S ( 2 0 8 ) 5 4 2 - 2 6 6 5 RE X B U R G ( 2 0 8 ) 3 5 9 - 2 6 6 5 PR E P A R E D F O R : MA T T I S P A R T N E R S CH I P O T L E S I T E P L A N A. S N A R R L. L U S K P. S N A R R 23 1 6 2 16 4 1 0 1- 1 0 - 2 4 MIN. GRADE 1/4"/FT.(2%) "E" "D" CAP OR PLUG AND INSTALL SERVICE LINE MARKER PER SD-512 (TYP.) ABSOLUTE MIN. GRADE 1/8"/FT.(1%) 4"-1/8 OR 1/16 BEND AS NEEDED MIN. GRADE 1/4"/FT.(2%) "C" "B" "A" TYPE C TEE OR APPROVED CONNECTION NOTES: TYPE E 45° TYPE A & D TEE OR APPROVED CONNECTION LP 45 ° M A X . 1/8 LONG RADIUS BEND TYPE B 45 ° M A X . GASKET ALL JOINTS CONCRETE COLLAR FINISHED GRADEFRAME & COVER 45° FL O W SHE L F SHE L F SH E L F MANHOLE NOTES: 5" FLEXIBLE RUBBER GASKET PRECAST MONOLITHIC CONCENTRIC CONE SECTION PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLE-BARREL SECTIONS AS REQ'D PREFABRICATED BASE. UNDISTURBED EARTH A 4" A P P R O V E D BE D D I N G 6" MIN31 " 48" DIA 9" M I N RUBBER BOOT .7 5 X D i P I P E 1.PLACE VERTICAL WALL ON UPSTREAM SIDE OF MANHOLE, ROTATED 45 DEGREES. 2.WHERE PVC PIPE IS UTILIZED, INSTALL A RUBBER RING OR GASKET COLLAR WHERE THE PIPE IS IN CONTACT WITH MANHOLE BASE AND/OR MANHOLE CHANNEL, IN ORDER TO INSURE A WATERTIGHT SEAL. 3.UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN, MANHOLES SHALL HAVE 0.1 FALL FROM UPSTREAM INVERT TO DOWNSTREAM INVERT. FOR PIPE SLOPES GREATER THAN 2.5% SLOPE, SEE PLAN & PROFILE. PLAN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE ECCENTRIC MANHOLE SECTION1 NOT TO SCALE 4" SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINES DETAIL2 4" M I N 6" M I N TYPICAL STREET/OPEN FIELD 6' - 0 " M I N . B U R Y ( T Y P . ) NATIVE MATERIAL COMPACTED AS PER CITY REQUIREMENTS AND ISPWC PIPE BEDDING 4" M I N 6" M I N TYPICAL STREET 6' - 0 " M I N . B U R Y ( T Y P . ) FLOWABLE FILL AS PER CITY OF REXBURG SPECIFICATIONS PIPE BEDDING NOT TO SCALE TYPICAL MISC TRENCH DETAIL4 90°90° 90°90° NOT TO SCALE PIPE BEDDING DETAILS10NOT TO SCALE FIRE HYDRANT DETAIL5 1.ALL SERVICE LINES TO BE 4" INSIDE DIAMETER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2.TYPE "C" SERVICE WILL ONLY BE ALLOWED IF SPECIFICALLY APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 3.TYPE "E" ALLOWABLE FOR TRENCHES 15 FT. DEEP OR GREATER WITH PRE-APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER. 4.USE 6" OF TYPE I BEDDING ALL AROUND EACH SERVICE. FINISH GRADE FINISH GRADE MIN. GRADE 1/4"/FT.(2% ) 2-45° BENDS STANDARD TRENCH DETAIL ON PRIVATE PROPERTY STANDARD TRENCH DETAIL ON PUBLIC ROAD 6" M I N 6" M I N 6' - 0 " M I N TYPE 1 AGGREGATE BEDDING (2"x8"x12") CONCRETE BLOCK THRUST BLOCK DO NOT COVER DRAIN HOLES WITH CONCRETE PLACE SAFETY FLANGE OR FLANGE WITH BREAK AWAY BOLTS 2" MIN. 8" MAX ABOVE GRADE HYDRANT SHALL BE FACTORY PAINTED RED STORZ CONNECTION MJ JOINT FLANGED JOINT TEE DI LINE TO CITY MAINLINE THRUST BLOCK VALVE VALVE NUT EXTENSION TO WITHIN 6" OF SURFACE CONCRETE COLLAR FINISHED GRADE VALVE BOX SET TO FINISHED GRADE PIPE BEDDING FOR RIGID PIPE PIPE BEDDING DETAIL FOR FLEXIBLE PIPE SHAPED SUBGRADE GRANULAR FOUNDATION SHAPED SUBGRADE GRANULAR FOUNDATION COMPACT 1" MAX. BACKFILL IN 6" LAYERS TO 95% OR ASTM D-698 COMPACT 1" MAX. BACKFILL IN 6" LAYERS TO 95% OR ASTM D-698 COMPACT APPROVED BEDDING MATERIAL TO 95% OF ASTM D-698 COMPACT APPROVED BEDDING MATERIAL TO 95% OF ASTM D-698 6" M I N 12" MAX3" 6" M I N 12" MAX SHAPED UNDISTURBED SOIL. EXCAVATED FOR BELL HOLES. SHAPED UNDISTURBED SOIL. EXCAVATED FOR BELL HOLES. 6" M I N 12" MAX3" 6" M I N 12" MAX 2" OF PLANT MIX PAVEMENT UNDISTURBED EARTH 9" OF GRANULAR BORROW/PITRUN 3" OF 3/4" GRAVEL ROADBASE 6" 1' 6" AGGREGATE BASE 1'-0" 1'-6" 6" 4"6" 6" 1' 6" AGGREGATE BASE 1'-0" 1'-6" 6" 4" 6" NOT TO SCALE TYPICAL PARKING LOT/ DRIVEWAY SECTION9 NOT TO SCALE LIP DOWN CURB8 NOT TO SCALE LIP UP CURB7 NOT TO SCALE CATCH BASIN3 1 2 " M I N . D I A . GASKET FOR PLASTIC PIPE KNOCKOUTS TYPICAL (4) SIDES 18" DIA. TO RECEIVE UP TO 15" DIA. PIPE 3' - 0 " M I N . 3 1 / 2 " 2" 3 1/2"30" INSIDE DIA. BARREL SECTION 39" 20"3'-0"x6"x3/8" STEEL PLATE 6" C1 SIDEWALK TBC C3 #4 REBAR BY MANUFACTURER ADJUSTING BOLTS C1 CL CL 10" GRATE 9" INLET BOX 12 " 18" LIP UP CURB & GUTTER PLASTIC PIPE REBAR SCHEDULE MARK LOCATION SIZE LENGTH QUANTITY C3 CURB AND BOX 4 2'-0"4 NOT TO SCALE THRUST BLOCKING DETAILS6 B B/ 3 MI N . A TEE BEND/ELBOW REDUCER 22а BEND REDUCERS & 1'-9" 2'-5" 3'-2" 4'-0" 4'-8" 6'-6" DIMENSION FOR THRUST BLOCKING 14" 6" 10" 12" 8" FITTING SIZES 4" 1'-11" 2'-6" 3'-3" 3'-10" 3'-10"5'-5" 2'-0" 3'-4" 4'-0" 2'-8" TEES & PLUGS 1'-2" A 1'-7" B 1'-8" 1'-10" 45° BEND & WYES 2'-5" 3'-0" 4'-9" 3'-8" 2'-2" 3'-10" 4'-11" 4'-8" 3'-0" B 1'-6" 90° BEND A A 1'-7" 2'-1" 2'-9" 3'-5" 3'-3" 3'-5" 1'-9" 1'-9" 2'-2" 2'-7" 0'-10" B A 1'-7" 2'-5" 0'-10" 1'-11" 2'-3" 1'-6" 0'-6" B NOTES: 1.WRAP ALL FITTINGS W/ 8 MIL POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT TO PREVENT CONCRETE FROM ADHERING TO THE FITTINGS. 2.THRUST BLOCKING CONCRETE TO BE MINIMUM 3000 PSI MIX. 3.ALL THRUST BLOCKS ARE TO BE FORMED ON THE VERTICAL PLANES. 4.PLACE THRUST BLOCKS ON ALL WATERLINE BENDS AND TEES. Fi l e L o c a t i o n : z: \ 2 0 2 3 \ 2 3 1 6 2 c h i p o t l e r e x b u r g \ 3 . 0 d e s i g n \ 3 . 1 c a d \ 3 . 1 3 f i n a l \ 2 3 1 6 2 d e t a i l s . d w g Pl o t t e d B y : an g i e Da t e P l o t t e d : We d n e s d a y , J a n u a r y 1 0 2 0 2 4 a t 1 2 : 5 9 P M 6 D- 2 DE T A I L S AG L E R O C K N G I N E E R I N G SU R V E Y E D B Y : DR A W N B Y : PR O J E C T N O . AP P R O V E D B Y : DE S C R I P T I O N DA T E RE V I S I O N S 1 2 3 4 5 6 AT T E N T I O N Th i s d o c u m e n t o r a n y p a r t t h e r e o f i n d e t a i l o r d e s i g n c o n c e p t is t h e p r o p e r t y o f E a g l e R o c k E n g i n e e r i n g a n d s h a l l n o t b e co p i e d i n a n y f o r m w i t h o u t t h e w r i t t e n a u t h o r i z a t i o n o f E a g l e Ro c k E n g i n e e r i n g . E SH E E T N O . SH E E T N A M E CI V I L P L A N N I N G S U R V E Y I N G ID A H O F A L L S ( 2 0 8 ) 5 4 2 - 2 6 6 5 RE X B U R G ( 2 0 8 ) 3 5 9 - 2 6 6 5 PR E P A R E D F O R : MA T T I S P A R T N E R S CH I P O T L E S I T E P L A N A. S N A R R L. L U S K P. S N A R R 23 1 6 2 16 4 1 0 1- 1 0 - 2 4 INSERTA-TEE SIDE INLET DETAIL INSERTA TEE CONNECTION CONVEYANCE PIPE MATERIAL MAY VARY (PVC, HDPE, ETC.) PLACE ADSPLUS WOVEN GEOTEXTILE (CENTERED ON INSERTA-TEE INLET) OVER BEDDING STONE FOR SCOUR PROTECTION AT SIDE INLET CONNECTIONS. GEOTEXTILE MUST EXTEND 6" (150 mm) PAST CHAMBER FOOT INSERTA TEE TO BE INSTALLED, CENTERED OVER CORRUGATION SIDE VIEWSECTION A-A A A DO NOT INSTALL INSERTA-TEE AT CHAMBER JOINTS (X) CHAMBER MAX DIAMETER OF INSERTA TEE HEIGHT FROM BASE OF CHAMBER (X) SC-310 6" (150 mm)4" (100 mm) SC-740 10" (250 mm)4" (100 mm) DC-780 10" (250 mm)4" (100 mm) MC-3500 12" (300 mm)6" (150 mm) MC-4500 12" (300 mm)8" (200 mm) MC-7200 12" (300 mm)8" (200 mm) INSERTA TEE FITTINGS AVAILABLE FOR SDR 26, SDR 35, SCH 40 IPS GASKETED & SOLVENT WELD, N-12, HP STORM, C-900 OR DUCTILE IRON NOTES: ·PART NUMBERS WILL VARY BASED ON INLET PIPE MATERIALS. CONTACT STORMTECH FOR MORE INFORMATION. ·CONTACT ADS ENGINEERING SERVICES IF INSERTA TEE INLET MUST BE RAISED AS NOT ALL INVERTS ARE POSSIBLE. 6 UNDERDRAIN DETAIL A A B B SECTION A-A SECTION B-B NUMBER AND SIZE OF UNDERDRAINS PER SITE DESIGN ENGINEER 4" (100 mm) TYP FOR SC-310 & SC-160LP SYSTEMS 6" (150 mm) TYP FOR SC-740, DC-780, MC-3500, MC-4500 & MC-7200 SYSTEMS OUTLET MANIFOLD STORMTECH END CAP STORMTECH CHAMBERS STORMTECH CHAMBER STORMTECH END CAP DUAL WALL PERFORATED HDPE UNDERDRAIN ADS GEOSYNTHETICS 601T NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE ADS GEOSYNTHETICS 601T NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE FOUNDATION STONE BENEATH CHAMBERS FOUNDATION STONE BENEATH CHAMBERS 5 MC-3500 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PART #STUB B C MC3500IEPP06T 6" (150 mm)33.21" (844 mm)--- MC3500IEPP06B ---0.66" (17 mm) MC3500IEPP08T 8" (200 mm)31.16" (791 mm)--- MC3500IEPP08B ---0.81" (21 mm) MC3500IEPP10T 10" (250 mm)29.04" (738 mm)--- MC3500IEPP10B ---0.93" (24 mm) MC3500IEPP12T 12" (300 mm)26.36" (670 mm)--- MC3500IEPP12B ---1.35" (34 mm) MC3500IEPP15T 15" (375 mm)23.39" (594 mm)--- MC3500IEPP15B ---1.50" (38 mm) MC3500IEPP18TC 18" (450 mm) 20.03" (509 mm)---MC3500IEPP18TW MC3500IEPP18BC ---1.77" (45 mm) MC3500IEPP18BW MC3500IEPP24TC 24" (600 mm) 14.48" (368 mm)---MC3500IEPP24TW MC3500IEPP24BC ---2.06" (52 mm) MC3500IEPP24BW MC3500IEPP30BC 30" (750 mm)---2.75" (70 mm) NOMINAL CHAMBER SPECIFICATIONS SIZE (W X H X INSTALLED LENGTH)77.0" X 45.0" X 86.0" (1956 mm X 1143 mm X 2184 mm) CHAMBER STORAGE 109.9 CUBIC FEET (3.11 m³) MINIMUM INSTALLED STORAGE*175.0 CUBIC FEET (4.96 m³) WEIGHT 134 lbs.(60.8 kg) NOMINAL END CAP SPECIFICATIONS SIZE (W X H X INSTALLED LENGTH)75.0" X 45.0" X 22.2" (1905 mm X 1143 mm X 564 mm) END CAP STORAGE 14.9 CUBIC FEET (0.42 m³) MINIMUM INSTALLED STORAGE*45.1 CUBIC FEET (1.28 m³) WEIGHT 49 lbs.(22.2 kg) *ASSUMES 12" (305 mm) STONE ABOVE, 9" (229 mm) STONE FOUNDATION, 6" (152 mm) STONE BETWEEN CHAMBERS, 6" (152 mm) STONE PERIMETER IN FRONT OF END CAPS AND 40% STONE POROSITY. 90.0" (2286 mm) ACTUAL LENGTH 86.0" (2184 mm) INSTALLED BUILD ROW IN THIS DIRECTION NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL LOWER JOINT CORRUGATION WEB CREST CREST STIFFENING RIB VALLEY STIFFENING RIB B C 75.0" (1905 mm) 45.0" (1143 mm) 25.7" (653 mm) FOOT 77.0" (1956 mm) 45.0" (1143 mm) PARTIAL CUT HOLES AT BOTTOM OF END CAP FOR PART NUMBERS ENDING WITH "B" PARTIAL CUT HOLES AT TOP OF END CAP FOR PART NUMBERS ENDING WITH "T" END CAPS WITH A PREFABRICATED WELDED STUB END WITH "W" END CAPS WITH A WELDED CROWN PLATE END WITH "C" UPPER JOINT CORRUGATION 22.2" (564 mm) INSTALLED CUSTOM PARTIAL CUT INVERTS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. INVENTORIED MANIFOLDS INCLUDE 12-24" (300-600 mm) SIZE ON SIZE AND 15-48" (375-1200 mm) ECCENTRIC MANIFOLDS. CUSTOM INVERT LOCATIONS ON THE MC-3500 END CAP CUT IN THE FIELD ARE NOT RECOMMENDED FOR PIPE SIZES GREATER THAN 10" (250 mm). THE INVERT LOCATION IN COLUMN 'B' ARE THE HIGHEST POSSIBLE FOR THE PIPE SIZE. 2 MC-3500 ISOLATOR ROW PLUS DETAIL INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE STEP 1)INSPECT ISOLATOR ROW PLUS FOR SEDIMENT A.INSPECTION PORTS (IF PRESENT) A.1.REMOVE/OPEN LID ON NYLOPLAST INLINE DRAIN A.2.REMOVE AND CLEAN FLEXSTORM FILTER IF INSTALLED A.3.USING A FLASHLIGHT AND STADIA ROD, MEASURE DEPTH OF SEDIMENT AND RECORD ON MAINTENANCE LOG A.4.LOWER A CAMERA INTO ISOLATOR ROW PLUS FOR VISUAL INSPECTION OF SEDIMENT LEVELS (OPTIONAL) A.5.IF SEDIMENT IS AT, OR ABOVE, 3" (80 mm) PROCEED TO STEP 2. IF NOT, PROCEED TO STEP 3. B.ALL ISOLATOR PLUS ROWS B.1.REMOVE COVER FROM STRUCTURE AT UPSTREAM END OF ISOLATOR ROW PLUS B.2.USING A FLASHLIGHT, INSPECT DOWN THE ISOLATOR ROW PLUS THROUGH OUTLET PIPE i)MIRRORS ON POLES OR CAMERAS MAY BE USED TO AVOID A CONFINED SPACE ENTRY ii)FOLLOW OSHA REGULATIONS FOR CONFINED SPACE ENTRY IF ENTERING MANHOLE B.3.IF SEDIMENT IS AT, OR ABOVE, 3" (80 mm) PROCEED TO STEP 2. IF NOT, PROCEED TO STEP 3. STEP 2)CLEAN OUT ISOLATOR ROW PLUS USING THE JETVAC PROCESS A.A FIXED CULVERT CLEANING NOZZLE WITH REAR FACING SPREAD OF 45" (1.1 m) OR MORE IS PREFERRED B.APPLY MULTIPLE PASSES OF JETVAC UNTIL BACKFLUSH WATER IS CLEAN C.VACUUM STRUCTURE SUMP AS REQUIRED STEP 3)REPLACE ALL COVERS, GRATES, FILTERS, AND LIDS; RECORD OBSERVATIONS AND ACTIONS. STEP 4)INSPECT AND CLEAN BASINS AND MANHOLES UPSTREAM OF THE STORMTECH SYSTEM. NOTES 1.INSPECT EVERY 6 MONTHS DURING THE FIRST YEAR OF OPERATION. ADJUST THE INSPECTION INTERVAL BASED ON PREVIOUS OBSERVATIONS OF SEDIMENT ACCUMULATION AND HIGH WATER ELEVATIONS. 2.CONDUCT JETTING AND VACTORING ANNUALLY OR WHEN INSPECTION SHOWS THAT MAINTENANCE IS NECESSARY. SUMP DEPTH TBD BY SITE DESIGN ENGINEER (24" [600 mm] MIN RECOMMENDED) 24" (600 mm) HDPE ACCESS PIPE REQUIRED USE FACTORY PARTIAL CUT END CAP PART #: MC3500IEPP24BC OR MC3500IEPP24BW ONE LAYER OF ADSPLUS175 WOVEN GEOTEXTILE BETWEEN FOUNDATION STONE AND CHAMBERS 8.25' (2.51 m) MIN WIDE CONTINUOUS FABRIC WITHOUT SEAMS CATCH BASIN OR MANHOLE COVER PIPE CONNECTION TO END CAP WITH ADS GEOSYNTHETICS 601T NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE MC-3500 CHAMBER MC-3500 END CAP OPTIONAL INSPECTION PORT STORMTECH HIGHLY RECOMMENDS FLEXSTORM INSERTS IN ANY UPSTREAM STRUCTURES WITH OPEN GRATES ELEVATED BYPASS MANIFOLD INSTALL FLAMP ON 24" (600 mm) ACCESS PIPE PART #: MC350024RAMP 3 4" PVC INSPECTION PORT DETAIL (MC SERIES CHAMBER) NOTE: INSPECTION PORTS MAY BE CONNECTED THROUGH ANY CHAMBER CORRUGATION VALLEY. STORMTECH CHAMBER CONCRETE COLLAR PAVEMENT 12" (300 mm) MIN WIDTH CONCRETE SLAB 6" (150 mm) MIN THICKNESS 8" NYLOPLAST INSPECTION PORT BODY (PART# 2708AG4IPKIT) OR TRAFFIC RATED BOX W/SOLID LOCKING COVER CONCRETE COLLAR NOT REQUIRED FOR UNPAVED APPLICATIONS 4" (100 mm) SDR 35 PIPE 4" (100 mm) INSERTA TEE TO BE CENTERED ON CORRUGATION VALLEY 4 MC-3500 CROSS SECTION DETAIL NOTES: 1.CHAMBERS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM F2418, "STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLYPROPYLENE (PP) CORRUGATED WALL STORMWATER COLLECTION CHAMBERS" CHAMBER CLASSIFICATION 45x76 DESIGNATION SS. 2.MC-3500 CHAMBERS SHALL BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM F2787 "STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF THERMOPLASTIC CORRUGATED WALL STORMWATER COLLECTION CHAMBERS". 3.THE SITE DESIGN ENGINEER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ASSESSING THE BEARING RESISTANCE (ALLOWABLE BEARING CAPACITY) OF THE SUBGRADE SOILS AND THE DEPTH OF FOUNDATION STONE WITH CONSIDERATION FOR THE RANGE OF EXPECTED SOIL MOISTURE CONDITIONS. 4.PERIMETER STONE MUST BE EXTENDED HORIZONTALLY TO THE EXCAVATION WALL FOR BOTH VERTICAL AND SLOPED EXCAVATION WALLS. 5.REQUIREMENTS FOR HANDLING AND INSTALLATION: ·TO MAINTAIN THE WIDTH OF CHAMBERS DURING SHIPPING AND HANDLING, CHAMBERS SHALL HAVE INTEGRAL, INTERLOCKING STACKING LUGS. ·TO ENSURE A SECURE JOINT DURING INSTALLATION AND BACKFILL, THE HEIGHT OF THE CHAMBER JOINT SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3”. ·TO ENSURE THE INTEGRITY OF THE ARCH SHAPE DURING INSTALLATION, a) THE ARCH STIFFNESS CONSTANT AS DEFINED IN SECTION 6.2.8 OF ASTM F2418 SHALL BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 500 LBS/FT/%. AND b) TO RESIST CHAMBER DEFORMATION DURING INSTALLATION AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES (ABOVE 73° F / 23° C), CHAMBERS SHALL BE PRODUCED FROM REFLECTIVE GOLD OR YELLOW COLORS. 8' (2.4 m) MAX 12" (300 mm) MIN77" (1956 mm) 12" (300 mm) MIN 6" (150 mm) MIN 6" (150 mm) MIN PERIMETER STONE (SEE NOTE 4) EXCAVATION WALL (CAN BE SLOPED OR VERTICAL) MC-3500 END CAP SUBGRADE SOILS (SEE NOTE 3) DEPTH OF STONE TO BE DETERMINED BY SITE DESIGN ENGINEER 9" (230 mm) MIN ADS GEOSYNTHETICS 601T NON-WOVEN GEOTEXTILE ALL AROUND CLEAN, CRUSHED, ANGULAR STONE IN A & B LAYERS D C B A *TO BOTTOM OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT. FOR UNPAVED INSTALLATIONS WHERE RUTTING FROM VEHICLES MAY OCCUR, INCREASE COVER TO 24" (600 mm). 45" (1143 mm) 18" (450 mm) MIN* ACCEPTABLE FILL MATERIALS: STORMTECH MC-3500 CHAMBER SYSTEMS PLEASE NOTE: 1.THE LISTED AASHTO DESIGNATIONS ARE FOR GRADATIONS ONLY. THE STONE MUST ALSO BE CLEAN, CRUSHED, ANGULAR. FOR EXAMPLE, A SPECIFICATION FOR #4 STONE WOULD STATE: "CLEAN, CRUSHED, ANGULAR NO. 4 (AASHTO M43) STONE". 2.STORMTECH COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS ARE MET FOR 'A' LOCATION MATERIALS WHEN PLACED AND COMPACTED IN 9" (230 mm) (MAX) LIFTS USING TWO FULL COVERAGES WITH A VIBRATORY COMPACTOR. 3.WHERE INFILTRATION SURFACES MAY BE COMPROMISED BY COMPACTION, FOR STANDARD DESIGN LOAD CONDITIONS, A FLAT SURFACE MAY BE ACHIEVED BY RAKING OR DRAGGING WITHOUT COMPACTION EQUIPMENT. FOR SPECIAL LOAD DESIGNS, CONTACT STORMTECH FOR COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS. 4.ONCE LAYER 'C' IS PLACED, ANY SOIL/MATERIAL CAN BE PLACED IN LAYER 'D' UP TO THE FINISHED GRADE. MOST PAVEMENT SUBBASE SOILS CAN BE USED TO REPLACE THE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS OF LAYER 'C' OR 'D' AT THE SITE DESIGN ENGINEER'S DISCRETION. MATERIAL LOCATION DESCRIPTION AASHTO MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS COMPACTION / DENSITY REQUIREMENT D FINAL FILL: FILL MATERIAL FOR LAYER 'D' STARTS FROM THE TOP OF THE 'C' LAYER TO THE BOTTOM OF FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT OR UNPAVED FINISHED GRADE ABOVE. NOTE THAT PAVEMENT SUBBASE MAY BE PART OF THE 'D' LAYER ANY SOIL/ROCK MATERIALS, NATIVE SOILS, OR PER ENGINEER'S PLANS. CHECK PLANS FOR PAVEMENT SUBGRADE REQUIREMENTS.N/A PREPARE PER SITE DESIGN ENGINEER'S PLANS. PAVED INSTALLATIONS MAY HAVE STRINGENT MATERIAL AND PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS. C INITIAL FILL: FILL MATERIAL FOR LAYER 'C' STARTS FROM THE TOP OF THE EMBEDMENT STONE ('B' LAYER) TO 24" (600 mm) ABOVE THE TOP OF THE CHAMBER. NOTE THAT PAVEMENT SUBBASE MAY BE A PART OF THE 'C' LAYER. GRANULAR WELL-GRADED SOIL/AGGREGATE MIXTURES, <35% FINES OR PROCESSED AGGREGATE. MOST PAVEMENT SUBBASE MATERIALS CAN BE USED IN LIEU OF THIS LAYER. AASHTO M145¹ A-1, A-2-4, A-3 OR AASHTO M43¹ 3, 357, 4, 467, 5, 56, 57, 6, 67, 68, 7, 78, 8, 89, 9, 10 BEGIN COMPACTIONS AFTER 24" (600 mm) OF MATERIAL OVER THE CHAMBERS IS REACHED. COMPACT ADDITIONAL LAYERS IN 12" (300 mm) MAX LIFTS TO A MIN. 95% PROCTOR DENSITY FOR WELL GRADED MATERIAL AND 95% RELATIVE DENSITY FOR PROCESSED AGGREGATE MATERIALS. B EMBEDMENT STONE: FILL SURROUNDING THE CHAMBERS FROM THE FOUNDATION STONE ('A' LAYER) TO THE 'C' LAYER ABOVE. CLEAN, CRUSHED, ANGULAR STONE AASHTO M43¹ 3, 4 A FOUNDATION STONE: FILL BELOW CHAMBERS FROM THE SUBGRADE UP TO THE FOOT (BOTTOM) OF THE CHAMBER.CLEAN, CRUSHED, ANGULAR STONE AASHTO M43¹ 3, 4 PLATE COMPACT OR ROLL TO ACHIEVE A FLAT SURFACE.2,3 NO COMPACTION REQUIRED. 1 NOTE: MANIFOLD STUB MUST BE LAID HORIZONTAL FOR A PROPER FIT IN END CAP OPENING. 12" (300 mm) MIN SEPARATION 12" (300 mm) MIN INSERTION 12" (300 mm) MIN SEPARATION 12" (300 mm) MIN INSERTION MC-SERIES END CAP INSERTION DETAIL MANIFOLD HEADER MANIFOLD STUB STORMTECH END CAP MANIFOLD HEADER MANIFOLD STUB 7 MC-3500 STORMTECH CHAMBER SPECIFICATIONS 1.CHAMBERS SHALL BE STORMTECH MC-3500. 2.CHAMBERS SHALL BE ARCH-SHAPED AND SHALL BE MANUFACTURED FROM VIRGIN, IMPACT-MODIFIED POLYPROPYLENE COPOLYMERS. 3.CHAMBERS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM F2418, "STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR POLYPROPYLENE (PP) CORRUGATED WALL STORMWATER COLLECTION CHAMBERS" CHAMBER CLASSIFICATION 45x76 DESIGNATION SS. 4.CHAMBER ROWS SHALL PROVIDE CONTINUOUS, UNOBSTRUCTED INTERNAL SPACE WITH NO INTERNAL SUPPORTS THAT WOULD IMPEDE FLOW OR LIMIT ACCESS FOR INSPECTION. 5.THE STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF THE CHAMBERS, THE STRUCTURAL BACKFILL, AND THE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS SHALL ENSURE THAT THE LOAD FACTORS SPECIFIED IN THE AASHTO LRFD BRIDGE DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS, SECTION 12.12, ARE MET FOR: 1) LONG-DURATION DEAD LOADS AND 2) SHORT-DURATION LIVE LOADS, BASED ON THE AASHTO DESIGN TRUCK WITH CONSIDERATION FOR IMPACT AND MULTIPLE VEHICLE PRESENCES. 6.CHAMBERS SHALL BE DESIGNED, TESTED AND ALLOWABLE LOAD CONFIGURATIONS DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM F2787, "STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN OF THERMOPLASTIC CORRUGATED WALL STORMWATER COLLECTION CHAMBERS". LOAD CONFIGURATIONS SHALL INCLUDE: 1) INSTANTANEOUS (<1 MIN) AASHTO DESIGN TRUCK LIVE LOAD ON MINIMUM COVER 2) MAXIMUM PERMANENT (75-YR) COVER LOAD AND 3) ALLOWABLE COVER WITH PARKED (1-WEEK) AASHTO DESIGN TRUCK. 7.REQUIREMENTS FOR HANDLING AND INSTALLATION: ·TO MAINTAIN THE WIDTH OF CHAMBERS DURING SHIPPING AND HANDLING, CHAMBERS SHALL HAVE INTEGRAL, INTERLOCKING STACKING LUGS. ·TO ENSURE A SECURE JOINT DURING INSTALLATION AND BACKFILL, THE HEIGHT OF THE CHAMBER JOINT SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3”. ·TO ENSURE THE INTEGRITY OF THE ARCH SHAPE DURING INSTALLATION, a) THE ARCH STIFFNESS CONSTANT SHALL BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 450 LBS/FT/%. THE ASC IS DEFINED IN SECTION 6.2.8 OF ASTM F2418. AND b) TO RESIST CHAMBER DEFORMATION DURING INSTALLATION AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES (ABOVE 73° F / 23° C), CHAMBERS SHALL BE PRODUCED FROM REFLECTIVE GOLD OR YELLOW COLORS. 8.ONLY CHAMBERS THAT ARE APPROVED BY THE SITE DESIGN ENGINEER WILL BE ALLOWED. UPON REQUEST BY THE SITE DESIGN ENGINEER OR OWNER, THE CHAMBER MANUFACTURER SHALL SUBMIT A STRUCTURAL EVALUATION FOR APPROVAL BEFORE DELIVERING CHAMBERS TO THE PROJECT SITE AS FOLLOWS: ·THE STRUCTURAL EVALUATION SHALL BE SEALED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER. ·THE STRUCTURAL EVALUATION SHALL DEMONSTRATE THAT THE SAFETY FACTORS ARE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 1.95 FOR DEAD LOAD AND 1.75 FOR LIVE LOAD, THE MINIMUM REQUIRED BY ASTM F2787 AND BY SECTIONS 3 AND 12.12 OF THE AASHTO LRFD BRIDGE DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS FOR THERMOPLASTIC PIPE. ·THE TEST DERIVED CREEP MODULUS AS SPECIFIED IN ASTM F2418 SHALL BE USED FOR PERMANENT DEAD LOAD DESIGN EXCEPT THAT IT SHALL BE THE 75-YEAR MODULUS USED FOR DESIGN. 9.CHAMBERS AND END CAPS SHALL BE PRODUCED AT AN ISO 9001 CERTIFIED MANUFACTURING FACILITY. IMPORTANT - NOTES FOR THE BIDDING AND INSTALLATION OF MC-3500 CHAMBER SYSTEM 1.STORMTECH MC-3500 CHAMBERS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL THE MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE HAS COMPLETED A PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING WITH THE INSTALLERS. 2.STORMTECH MC-3500 CHAMBERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "STORMTECH MC-3500/MC-4500 CONSTRUCTION GUIDE". 3.CHAMBERS ARE NOT TO BE BACKFILLED WITH A DOZER OR AN EXCAVATOR SITUATED OVER THE CHAMBERS. STORMTECH RECOMMENDS 3 BACKFILL METHODS: ·STONESHOOTER LOCATED OFF THE CHAMBER BED. ·BACKFILL AS ROWS ARE BUILT USING AN EXCAVATOR ON THE FOUNDATION STONE OR SUBGRADE. ·BACKFILL FROM OUTSIDE THE EXCAVATION USING A LONG BOOM HOE OR EXCAVATOR. 4.THE FOUNDATION STONE SHALL BE LEVELED AND COMPACTED PRIOR TO PLACING CHAMBERS. 5.JOINTS BETWEEN CHAMBERS SHALL BE PROPERLY SEATED PRIOR TO PLACING STONE. 6.MAINTAIN MINIMUM - SPACING BETWEEN THE CHAMBER ROWS. 7.INLET AND OUTLET MANIFOLDS MUST BE INSERTED A MINIMUM OF 12" (300 mm) INTO CHAMBER END CAPS. 8.EMBEDMENT STONE SURROUNDING CHAMBERS MUST BE A CLEAN, CRUSHED, ANGULAR STONE MEETING THE AASHTO M43 DESIGNATION OF #3 OR #4. 9.STONE MUST BE PLACED ON THE TOP CENTER OF THE CHAMBER TO ANCHOR THE CHAMBERS IN PLACE AND PRESERVE ROW SPACING. 10.THE CONTRACTOR MUST REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES WITH CHAMBER FOUNDATION MATERIALS BEARING CAPACITIES TO THE SITE DESIGN ENGINEER. 11.ADS RECOMMENDS THE USE OF "FLEXSTORM CATCH IT" INSERTS DURING CONSTRUCTION FOR ALL INLETS TO PROTECT THE SUBSURFACE STORMWATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FROM CONSTRUCTION SITE RUNOFF. NOTES FOR CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT 1.STORMTECH MC-3500 CHAMBERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "STORMTECH MC-3500/MC-4500 CONSTRUCTION GUIDE". 2.THE USE OF EQUIPMENT OVER MC-3500 CHAMBERS IS LIMITED: ·NO EQUIPMENT IS ALLOWED ON BARE CHAMBERS. ·NO RUBBER TIRED LOADER, DUMP TRUCK, OR EXCAVATORS ARE ALLOWED UNTIL PROPER FILL DEPTHS ARE REACHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "STORMTECH MC-3500/MC-4500 CONSTRUCTION GUIDE". ·WEIGHT LIMITS FOR CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT CAN BE FOUND IN THE "STORMTECH MC-3500/MC-4500 CONSTRUCTION GUIDE". 3.FULL 36" (900 mm) OF STABILIZED COVER MATERIALS OVER THE CHAMBERS IS REQUIRED FOR DUMP TRUCK TRAVEL OR DUMPING. USE OF A DOZER TO PUSH EMBEDMENT STONE BETWEEN THE ROWS OF CHAMBERS MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO CHAMBERS AND IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE BACKFILL METHOD. ANY CHAMBERS DAMAGED BY USING THE "DUMP AND PUSH" METHOD ARE NOT COVERED UNDER THE STORMTECH STANDARD WARRANTY. CONTACT STORMTECH AT 1-888-892-2694 WITH ANY QUESTIONS ON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OR WEIGHT LIMITS FOR CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT. 6" (150 mm) FOR STORMTECH INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS VISIT OUR APP SiteAssist Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. 4855 4855 4855 4853 4853 4854 4854 4854 4856 48 5 5 4 8 5 4 48 5 6 48 5 3 4853 4853 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 12''W 6' ' W (12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS(12''SS G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' S S 6' ' W S 12''SD) 12''SD) 12''SD) 12''SD) (1 2 ' ' S D (1 2 ' ' S D (1 2 ' ' S D 12'' S D ) 12'' S D ) (1 2 ' ' S D (1 2 ' ' S D 4''PIRR 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4' ' S S 4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS4''SS 1.5''W 1.5''W 1.5''W 1.5''W 1. 5 ' ' W 1. 5 ' ' W 1. 5 ' ' W 1. 5 ' ' W (2) AT (1) GT2(6) CK (3) EC (9) CK (10) CK (10) TD (1) GT2 (1) GT2 (1) GT2 (15) TD (20) EC (10) EC (5) TD (15) EC (13) TD (1) TG (1) AT (3) TG (1) AT NOTE: THE CONTRACTOR IS SPECIFICALLY CAUTIONED THAT THE LOCATION AND/OR ELEVATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AS SHOWN ON THESE PLANS IS BASED ON DESIGN DRAWINGS, RECORDS OF THE VARIOUS UTILITY COMPANIES, AND WHERE POSSIBLE, MEASUREMENTS TAKEN IN THE FIELD. THE DESIGNER DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT LOCATIONS SHOWN ARE EXACT. THE CONTRACTOR MUST CONTACT THE APPROPRIATE UTILITY COMPANIES AT LEAST 72 HOURS BEFORE ANY EXCAVATION TO REQUEST EXACT FIELD LOCATIONS OF UTILITIES. AS SUCH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR LOCATING AND UNCOVERING EXISTING UTILITIES IN THE VICINITY OF THE PROPOSED IMPROVEMENTS AND UTILITY CONNECTION POINTS PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION TO ASCERTAIN EXACT MATERIALS, LOCATIONS, ELEVATIONS, ETC. AND THEIR POTENTIAL CONFLICT WITH PROPOSED IMPROVEMENTS. GC SHALL CONSULT WITH CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND ENGINEER AS APPROPRIATE BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ROOT BARRIERS NEAR ALL NEWLY-PLANTED TREES THAT ARE LOCATED WITHIN FIVE (5) FEET OF PAVING OR CURBS. ROOT BARRIERS SHALL BE "CENTURY" OR "DEEP-ROOT" 24" DEEP PANELS (OR EQUAL). BARRIERS SHALL BE LOCATED IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO HARDSCAPE. INSTALL PANELS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE CONTRACTOR USE ROOT BARRIERS OF A TYPE THAT COMPLETELY ENCIRCLE THE ROOTBALL. ROOT BARRIERS AFTER ALL PLANTING IS COMPLETE, CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL 3" THICK LAYER OF 1-1/2" RIVER ROCK (1-1/2" SHREDDED WOOD MULCH AS AN ALTERNATIVE) IN ALL NEW OR DISTURBED PLANTING AREAS (EXCEPT FOR TURF AREAS). TOP DRESS ALL EXISTING SHRUB PLANTING AREAS WITH 1-1/2" LAYER OF SHREDDED WOOD MULCH WHERE EXISTING MULCH IS RETAINED. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SAMPLES OF ALL MULCHES TO LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND OWNER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. ABSOLUTELY NO EXPOSED GROUND SHALL BE LEFT SHOWING ANYWHERE ON THE PROJECT AFTER MULCH HAS BEEN INSTALLED. MULCHES GENERAL GRADING AND PLANTING NOTES 1.BY SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL FOR THE LANDSCAPE PLANTING SCOPE OF WORK, THE CONTRACTOR CONFIRMS THAT HE HAS READ, AND WILL COMPLY WITH, THE ASSOCIATED NOTES, SPECIFICATIONS, AND DETAILS WITH THIS PROJECT. 2.THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING ALL EXISTING VEGETATION (EXCEPT WHERE NOTED TO REMAIN). 3.IN THE CONTEXT OF THESE PLANS, NOTES, AND SPECIFICATIONS, "FINISH GRADE" REFERS TO THE FINAL ELEVATION OF THE SOIL SURFACE (NOT TOP OF MULCH) AS INDICATED ON THE GRADING PLANS. a.BEFORE STARTING WORK, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT THE ROUGH GRADES OF ALL LANDSCAPE AREAS ARE WITHIN +/-0.1' OF FINISH GRADE. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE DETAILED INSTRUCTION ON TURF AREA AND PLANTING BED PREPARATION. b.CONSTRUCT AND MAINTAIN FINISH GRADES AS SHOWN ON GRADING PLANS, AND CONSTRUCT AND MAINTAIN SLOPES AS RECOMMENDED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. ALL LANDSCAPE AREAS SHALL HAVE POSITIVE DRAINAGE AWAY FROM STRUCTURES AT THE MINIMUM SLOPE SPECIFIED IN THE REPORT AND ON THE GRADING PLANS, AND AREAS OF POTENTIAL PONDING SHALL BE REGRADED TO BLEND IN WITH THE SURROUNDING GRADES AND ELIMINATE PONDING POTENTIAL. c.THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE WHETHER OR NOT THE EXPORT OF ANY SOIL WILL BE NEEDED, TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE ROUGH GRADE PROVIDED, THE AMOUNT OF SOIL AMENDMENTS TO BE ADDED (BASED ON A SOIL TEST, PER SPECIFICATIONS), AND THE FINISH GRADES TO BE ESTABLISHED. d.AFTER INSTALLING SOIL AMENDMENTS IN SHRUB AREAS, AND IN ORDER TO ALLOW FOR PROPER MULCH DEPTH, ENSURE THAT THE FINISH GRADE IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO WALKS AND OTHER WALKING SURFACES IS 3" BELOW FINISH GRADE, TAPERING TO MEET FINISH GRADE AT APPROXIMATELY 18" AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. e.AFTER INSTALLING SOIL AMENDMENTS IN TURF AREAS, ENSURE THAT THE FINISH GRADE IN TURF AREAS IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO WALKS AND OTHER WALKING SURFACES IS 1" BELOW FINISH GRADE, TAPERING TO MEET FINISH GRADE AT APPROXIMATELY 18" AWAY FROM THE SURFACE. f.SHOULD ANY CONFLICTS AND/OR DISCREPANCIES ARISE BETWEEN THE GRADING PLANS, GEOTECHNICAL REPORT, THESE NOTES AND PLANS, AND ACTUAL CONDITIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY BRING SUCH ITEMS TO THE ATTENTION OF THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, GENERAL CONTRACTOR, AND OWNER. 4.ALL PLANT LOCATIONS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. ACTUAL LOCATIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED WITH THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT OR DESIGNER PRIOR TO PLANTING. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE PERMITTING AUTHORITY ARE MET (I.E., MINIMUM PLANT QUANTITIES, PLANTING METHODS, TREE PROTECTION METHODS, ETC.). a.THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING PLANT QUANTITIES; PLANT QUANTITIES SHOWN ON LEGENDS AND CALLOUTS ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY. IN THE EVENT OF A DISCREPANCY BETWEEN THE PLAN AND THE PLANT LEGEND, THE PLANT QUANTITY AS SHOWN ON THE PLAN (FOR INDIVIDUAL SYMBOLS) OR CALLOUT (FOR GROUNDCOVER PATTERNS) SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE. b.NO SUBSTITUTIONS OF PLANT MATERIALS SHALL BE ALLOWED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. IF SOME OF THE PLANTS ARE NOT AVAILABLE, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT IN WRITING (VIA PROPER CHANNELS). c.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL, AT A MINIMUM, PROVIDE REPRESENTATIVE PHOTOS OF ALL PLANTS PROPOSED FOR THE PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALLOW THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND THE OWNER/OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO INSPECT, AND APPROVE OR REJECT, ALL PLANTS DELIVERED TO THE JOBSITE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTALS. 5.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN THE LANDSCAPE IN A HEALTHY CONDITION FOR 90 DAYS AFTER ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONDITIONS OF ACCEPTANCE FOR THE START OF THE MAINTENANCE PERIOD, AND FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE AT THE END OF THE MAINTENANCE PERIOD. 6.SEE SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. PLANTING AND IRRIGATION GUARANTEE THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE THAT ALL NEWLY INSTALLED AND EXISTING PLANTS SHALL SURVIVE FOR ONE YEAR AFTER FINAL OWNER ACCEPTANCE OF THE INSTALLATION WORK. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR APPROPRIATE WATERING OF THE LANDSCAPE THROUGH INSTALLATION OF A PROPERLY DESIGNED IRRIGATION SYSTEM. THE OWNER SHALL APPROVE THE SYSTEM DESIGN BEFORE INSTALLATION OF PLANTS OR IRRIGATION.Scale 1" = 20' 10'40'20'0' LP-1 LANDSCAPE CALCULATIONS TOTAL SITE AREA:54,416 SF BUFFERS UNIVERSITY BLVD.:167.23 LF TREES REQUIRED:6 TREES (1 PER 30 LF OF FRONTAGE) TREES PROVIDED:0 TREES* SHRUBS REQUIRED:28 SHRUBS (5 PER 30 LF OF FRONTAGE) SHRUBS PROVIDED:43 SHRUBS TAMANA DRIVE:154 LF TREES REQUIRED:6 TREES (1 PER 30 LF OF FRONTAGE) TREES PROVIDED:6 TREES SHRUBS REQUIRED:26 SHRUBS (5 PER 30 LF OF FRONTAGE) SHRUBS PROVIDED:25 SHRUBS PARKING LOT PARKING AREA 13,316 SF LANDSCAPE AREA REQUIRED: 1,332 SF (10%) LANDSCAPE AREA PROVIDED: 712 SF (33.7%) * EXISTING UTILITY EASEMENT PREVENT PLACING REQUIRED TREES. TREES HAVE BEEN PLACED IN ALTERNATE LOCATIONS LANDSCAPE PLANTING PROPERTY LINE MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVENUE, SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: (206) 369-8920 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. XXXXXX 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 EMS EMSEMS 01-24-2024 (800) 680-6630 1600 Broadway, Suite 1600 Denver, CO 80202 www.EvergreenDesignGroup.com EVERGREEN D E S I G N G R O U P PROPERTY LINE PROPERTY LINE PROPERTY LINE RESTORE TO LIMITS OF DISTURBANCE RESTORE TO LIMITS OF DISTURBANCE RESTORE TO LIMITS OF DISTURBANCE RESTORE TO LIMITS OF DISTURBANCE IRRIGATION SLEEVE IRRIGATION SLEEVE IRRIGATION SLEEVE IRRIGATION SLEEVE SYMBOL CODE QTY BOTANICAL / COMMON NAME CAL.CONT.SIZE TREES AT 4 Acer truncatum x platanoides `Warrenred` TM Pacific Sunset Maple 2" Cal.B&B 8` HT MIN GT2 4 Gleditsia triacanthos inermis `Skycole` TM Skyline Thornless Honey Locust 2" Cal.B&B 8` HT MIN TG 4 Tilia cordata `Greenspire` Greenspire Littleleaf Linden 2" Cal.B&B 8` HT MIN SYMBOL CODE QTY BOTANICAL / COMMON NAME CONTAINER SPACING SIZE SHRUBS CK 25 Calamagrostis x acutiflora `Karl Foerster` Feather Reed Grass 1 gal.Per Plan 12" Min. Ht. EC 48 Euonymus alatus `Compactus` Compact Burning Bush 5 gal.36" OC 18" Min. Ht. TD 43 Taxus x media `Densiformis` Dense Yew 5 gal.36" OC 18" Min. Ht. SYMBOL CODE QTY BOTANICAL / COMMON NAME CONT SPACING SIZE GROUND COVERS BUF 7,390 sf Native Meadow Grass Sod ROCK / STONE RR 1,477 sf 2-3" River Rock River Rock mulch over weed filter fabric 3" depth PLANT SCHEDULE UNIVERSITY BOULEVARD TA M A N A D R I V E FRONTAGE TREES TO BE PROVIDED AT TIME OF DEVELOPMENT 36" DIA. MOSS ROCK BOULDER - BURY 1/3 TO 1/2 OF HEIGHT (TYP.) 24" DIA. MOSS ROCK BOULDER - BURY 1/3 TO 1/2 OF HEIGHT (TYP.) 48" DIA. MOSS ROCK BOULDER - BURY 1/3 TO 1/2 OF HEIGHT (TYP.) BOULDER GROUPING BOULDER GROUPING PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL A.QUALIFICATIONS OF LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR 1.ALL LANDSCAPE WORK SHOWN ON THESE PLANS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A SINGLE FIRM SPECIALIZING IN LANDSCAPE PLANTING. 2.A LIST OF SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED PROJECTS OF THIS TYPE, SIZE AND NATURE MAY BE REQUESTED BY THE OWNER FOR FURTHER QUALIFICATION MEASURES. B.SCOPE OF WORK 1.WORK COVERED BY THESE SECTIONS INCLUDES THE FURNISHING AND PAYMENT OF ALL MATERIALS, LABOR, SERVICES, EQUIPMENT, LICENSES, TAXES AND ANY OTHER ITEMS THAT ARE NECESSARY FOR THE EXECUTION, INSTALLATION AND COMPLETION OF ALL WORK, SPECIFIED HEREIN AND / OR SHOWN ON THE LANDSCAPE PLANS, NOTES, AND DETAILS. 2.ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE LAWS, CODES AND REGULATIONS REQUIRED BY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION OVER SUCH WORK, INCLUDING ALL INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS REQUIRED BY FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL AUTHORITIES IN SUPPLY, TRANSPORTATION AND INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. 3.THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATION OF ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITY LINES (WATER, SEWER, ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE, GAS, CABLE, TELEVISION, ETC.) PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY WORK. PRODUCTS A.ALL MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS SHALL BE NEW. B.CONTAINER AND BALLED-AND-BURLAPPED PLANTS: 1.FURNISH NURSERY-GROWN PLANTS COMPLYING WITH ANSI Z60.1-2014. PROVIDE WELL-SHAPED, FULLY BRANCHED, HEALTHY, VIGOROUS STOCK FREE OF DISEASE, INSECTS, EGGS, LARVAE, AND DEFECTS SUCH AS KNOTS, SUN SCALD, INJURIES, ABRASIONS, AND DISFIGUREMENT. ALL PLANTS WITHIN A SPECIES SHALL HAVE SIMILAR SIZE, AND SHALL BE OF A FORM TYPICAL FOR THE SPECIES. ALL TREES SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM SOURCES WITHIN 200 MILES OF THE PROJECT SITE, AND WITH SIMILAR CLIMACTIC CONDITIONS. 2.ROOT SYSTEMS SHALL BE HEALTHY, DENSELY BRANCHED ROOT SYSTEMS, NON-POT-BOUND, FREE FROM ENCIRCLING AND/OR GIRDLING ROOTS, AND FREE FROM ANY OTHER ROOT DEFECTS (SUCH AS J-SHAPED ROOTS). 3.ANY PLANT DEEMED UNACCEPTABLE BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT OR OWNER SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY REMOVED FROM THE SITE AND SHALL BE REPLACED WITH AN ACCEPTBLE PLANT OF LIKE TYPE AND SIZE AT THE CONTRACTOR'S OWN EXPENSE. ANY PLANTS APPEARING TO BE UNHEALTHY, EVEN IF DETERMINED TO STILL BE ALIVE, SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTED. THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND OWNER SHALL BE THE SOLE JUDGES AS TO THE ACCEPTABILITY OF PLANT MATERIAL. 4.ALL TREES SHALL BE STANDARD IN FORM, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. TREES WITH CENTRAL LEADERS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED IF LEADER IS DAMAGED OR REMOVED. PRUNE ALL DAMAGED TWIGS AFTER PLANTING. 5.CALIPER MEASUREMENTS FOR STANDARD (SINGLE TRUNK) TREES SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: SIX INCHES ABOVE THE ROOT FLARE FOR TREES UP TO AND INCLUDING FOUR INCHES IN CALIPER, AND TWELVE INCHES ABOVE THE ROOT FLARE FOR TREES EXCEEDING FOUR INCHES IN CALIPER. 6.MULTI-TRUNK TREES SHALL BE MEASURED BY THEIR OVERALL HEIGHT, MEASURED FROM THE TOP OF THE ROOT BALL. 7.ANY TREE OR SHRUB SHOWN TO HAVE EXCESS SOIL PLACED ON TOP OF THE ROOT BALL, SO THAT THE ROOT FLARE HAS BEEN COMPLETELY COVERED, SHALL BE REJECTED. C.SOD: PROVIDE WELL-ROOTED SOD OF THE VARIETY NOTED ON THE PLANS. SOD SHALL BE CUT FROM HEALTHY, MATURE TURF WITH SOIL THICKNESS OF 3/4" TO 1". EACH PALLET OF SOD SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A CERTIFICATE FROM SUPPLIER STATING THE COMPOSITION OF THE SOD. D.SEED: PROVIDE BLEND OF SPECIES AND VARIETIES AS NOTED ON THE PLANS, WITH MAXIMUM PERCENTAGES OF PURITY, GERMINATION, AND MINIMUM PERCENTAGE OF WEED SEED AS INDICATED ON PLANS. EACH BAG OF SEED SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A TAG FROM THE SUPPLIER INDICATING THE COMPOSITION OF THE SEED. E.TOPSOIL: SANDY TO CLAY LOAM TOPSOIL, FREE OF STONES LARGER THAN ½ INCH, FOREIGN MATTER, PLANTS, ROOTS, AND SEEDS. F.COMPOST: WELL-COMPOSTED, STABLE, AND WEED-FREE ORGANIC MATTER, pH RANGE OF 5.5 TO 8; MOISTURE CONTENT 35 TO 55 PERCENT BY WEIGHT; 100 PERCENT PASSING THROUGH 3/4-INCH SIEVE; SOLUBLE SALT CONTENT OF 5 TO 10 DECISIEMENS/M; NOT EXCEEDING 0.5 PERCENT INERT CONTAMINANTS AND FREE OF SUBSTANCES TOXIC TO PLANTINGS. NO MANURE OR ANIMAL-BASED PRODUCTS SHALL BE USED. G.FERTILIZER: GRANULAR FERTILIZER CONSISTING OF NITROGEN, PHOSPHORUS, POTASSIUM, AND OTHER NUTRIENTS IN PROPORTIONS, AMOUNTS, AND RELEASE RATES RECOMMENDED IN A SOIL REPORT FROM A QUALIFIED SOIL-TESTING AGENCY (SEE BELOW). H.MULCH: SIZE AND TYPE AS INDICATED ON PLANS, FREE FROM DELETERIOUS MATERIALS AND SUITABLE AS A TOP DRESSING OF TREES AND SHRUBS. I.WEED FABRIC: 5 OUNCE, WOVEN, NEEDLE-PUNCHED FABRIC, SUCH AS DEWITT PRO5 LANDSCAPE FABRIC (OR APPROVED EQUAL). J.TREE STAKING AND GUYING 1.STAKES: 6' LONG GREEN METAL T-POSTS. 2.GUY AND TIE WIRE: ASTM A 641, CLASS 1, GALVANIZED-STEEL WIRE, 2-STRAND, TWISTED, 0.106 INCH DIAMETER. 3.STRAP CHAFING GUARD: REINFORCED NYLON OR CANVAS AT LEAST 1-1/2 INCH WIDE, WITH GROMMETS TO PROTECT TREE TRUNKS FROM DAMAGE. M.STEEL EDGING: PROFESSIONAL STEEL EDGING, 14 GAUGE THICK X 4 INCHES WIDE, FACTORY PAINTED DARK GREEN. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS INCLUDE COL-MET OR APPROVED EQUAL. N.PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDES: ANY GRANULAR, NON-STAINING PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE THAT IS LABELED FOR THE SPECIFIC ORNAMENTALS OR TURF ON WHICH IT WILL BE UTILIZED. PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDES SHALL BE APPLIED PER THE MANUFACTURER'S LABELED RATES. METHODS A.SOIL PREPARATION 1.BEFORE STARTING WORK, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT THE GRADE OF ALL LANDSCAPE AREAS ARE WITHIN +/-0.1' OF FINISH GRADE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER IMMEDIATELY SHOULD ANY DISCREPANCIES EXIST. 2.SOIL TESTING: a.AFTER FINISH GRADES HAVE BEEN ESTABLISHED, CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE SOIL SAMPLES TESTED BY AN ESTABLISHED SOIL TESTING LABORATORY FOR THE FOLLOWING: SOIL TEXTURAL CLASS, GENERAL SOIL FERTILITY, pH, ORGANIC MATTER CONTENT, SALT (CEC), LIME, SODIUM ADSORPTION RATIO (SAR) AND BORON CONTENT. EACH SAMPLE SUBMITTED SHALL CONTAIN NO LESS THAN ONE QUART OF SOIL. b.CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO SUBMIT THE PROJECT'S PLANT LIST TO THE LABORATORY ALONG WITH THE SOIL SAMPLES. c.THE SOIL REPORT PRODUCED BY THE LABORATORY SHALL CONTAIN RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING (AS APPROPRIATE): GENERAL SOIL PREPARATION AND BACKFILL MIXES, PRE-PLANT FERTILIZER APPLICATIONS, AND ANY OTHER SOIL RELATED ISSUES. THE REPORT SHALL ALSO PROVIDE A FERTILIZER PROGRAM FOR THE ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD AND FOR LONG-TERM MAINTENANCE. 3.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL SOIL AMENDMENTS AND FERTILIZERS PER THE SOILS REPORT RECOMMENDATIONS. ANY CHANGE IN COST DUE TO THE SOIL REPORT RECOMMENDATIONS, EITHER INCREASE OR DECREASE, SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER WITH THE REPORT. 4.FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY, THE SOIL PREPARATION SHALL CONSIST OF THE FOLLOWING: a.TURF: INCORPORATE THE FOLLOWING AMENDMENTS INTO THE TOP 8" OF SOIL BY MEANS OF ROTOTILLING AFTER CROSS-RIPPING: i.NITROGEN STABILIZED ORGANIC AMENDMENT - 4 CU. YDS. PER 1,000 S.F. ii.PREPLANT TURF FERTILIZER (10-20-10 OR SIMILAR, SLOW RELEASE, ORGANIC) - 15 LBS PER 1,000 S.F. iii."CLAY BUSTER" OR EQUAL - USE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED RATE b.TREES, SHRUBS, AND PERENNIALS: INCORPORATE THE FOLLOWING AMENDMENTS INTO THE TOP 8" OF SOIL BY MEANS OF ROTOTILLING AFTER CROSS-RIPPING: i.NITROGEN STABILIZED ORGANIC AMENDMENT - 4 CU. YDS. PER 1,000 S.F. ii.12-12-12 FERTILIZER (OR SIMILAR, ORGANIC, SLOW RELEASE) - 10 LBS. PER CU. YD. iii."CLAY BUSTER" OR EQUAL - USE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED RATE iv.IRON SULPHATE - 2 LBS. PER CU. YD. 5.CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT THE GRADE IN SOD AREAS SHALL BE 1" BELOW FINISH GRADE BEFORE INSTALLING SOIL AMENDMENTS, AND 2" BELOW FINISH GRADE IN SHRUB AREAS BEFORE INSTALLING SOIL AMENDMENTS. MULCH COVER WITHIN 6" OF CONCRETE WALKS AND CURBS SHALL NOT PROTRUDE ABOVE THE FINISH SURFACE OF THE WALKS AND CURBS. MULCH COVER WITHIN 12" OF WALLS SHALL BE AT LEAST 3" LOWER THAN THE TOP OF WALL. 6.ONCE SOIL PREPARATION IS COMPLETE, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT THERE ARE NO DEBRIS, TRASH, OR STONES LARGER THAN 1" REMAINING IN THE TOP 6" OF SOIL. B.GENERAL PLANTING 1.REMOVE ALL NURSERY TAGS AND STAKES FROM PLANTS. 2.EXCEPT IN AREAS TO BE PLANTED WITH ORNAMENTAL GRASSES, APPLY PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDES AT THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED RATE. 3.TRENCHING NEAR EXISTING TREES: a.CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT DISTURB ROOTS 1-1/2" AND LARGER IN DIAMETER WITHIN THE CRITICAL ROOT ZONE (CRZ) OF EXISTING TREES, AND SHALL EXERCISE ALL POSSIBLE CARE AND PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID INJURY TO TREE ROOTS, TRUNKS, AND BRANCHES. THE CRZ IS DEFINED AS A CIRCULAR AREA EXTENDING OUTWARD FROM THE TREE TRUNK, WITH A RADIUS EQUAL TO 1' FOR EVERY 1" OF TRUNK DIAMETER-AT-BREAST-HEIGHT (4.5' ABOVE THE AVERAGE GRADE AT THE TRUNK). b.ALL EXCAVATION WITHIN THE CRZ SHALL BE PERFORMED USING HAND TOOLS. NO MACHINE EXCAVATION OR TRENCHING OF ANY KIND SHALL BE ALLOWED WITHIN THE CRZ. c.ALTER ALIGNMENT OF PIPE TO AVOID TREE ROOTS 1-1/2" AND LARGER IN DIAMETER. WHERE TREE ROOTS 1-1/2" AND LARGER IN DIAMETER ARE ENCOUNTERED IN THE FIELD, TUNNEL UNDER SUCH ROOTS. WRAP EXPOSED ROOTS WITH SEVERAL LAYERS OF BURLAP AND KEEP MOIST. CLOSE ALL TRENCHES WITHIN THE CANOPY DRIP LINES WITHIN 24 HOURS. d.ALL SEVERED ROOTS SHALL BE HAND PRUNED WITH SHARP TOOLS AND ALLOWED TO AIR-DRY. DO NOT USE ANY SORT OF SEALERS OR WOUND PAINTS. C.TREE PLANTING 1.TREE PLANTING HOLES SHALL BE EXCAVATED TO MINIMUM WIDTH OF TWO TIMES THE WIDTH OF THE ROOTBALL, AND TO A DEPTH EQUAL TO THE DEPTH OF THE ROOTBALL LESS TWO TO FOUR INCHES. 2.SCARIFY THE SIDES AND BOTTOM OF THE PLANTING HOLE PRIOR TO THE PLACEMENT OF THE TREE. REMOVE ANY GLAZING THAT MAY HAVE BEEN CAUSED DURING THE EXCAVATION OF THE HOLE. 3.FOR CONTAINER AND BOX TREES, TO REMOVE ANY POTENTIALLY GIRDLING ROOTS AND OTHER ROOT DEFECTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SHAVE A 1" LAYER OFF OF THE SIDES AND BOTTOM OF THE ROOTBALL OF ALL TREES JUST BEFORE PLACING INTO THE PLANTING PIT. DO NOT "TEASE" ROOTS OUT FROM THE ROOTBALL. 4.INSTALL THE TREE ON UNDISTURBED SUBGRADE SO THAT THE TOP OF THE ROOTBALL IS TWO TO FOUR INCHES ABOVE THE SURROUNDING GRADE. 5.BACKFILL THE TREE HOLE UTILIZING THE EXISTING TOPSOIL FROM ON-SITE. ROCKS LARGER THAN 1" DIA. AND ALL OTHER DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SOIL PRIOR TO THE BACKFILL. SHOULD ADDITIONAL SOIL BE REQUIRED TO ACCOMPLISH THIS TASK, USE STORED TOPSOIL FROM ON-SITE OR IMPORT ADDITIONAL TOPSOIL FROM OFF-SITE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. IMPORTED TOPSOIL SHALL BE OF SIMILAR TEXTURAL CLASS AND COMPOSITION IN THE ON-SITE SOIL. 6.THE TOTAL NUMBER OF TREE STAKES (BEYOND THE MINIMUMS LISTED BELOW) WILL BE LEFT TO THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR'S DISCRETION. SHOULD ANY TREES FALL OR LEAN, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL STRAIGHTEN THE TREE, OR REPLACE IT SHOULD IT BECOME DAMAGED. TREE STAKING SHALL ADHERE TO THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES: a.1"-2" TREES TWO STAKES PER TREE b.2-1/2"-4" TREES THREE STAKES PER TREE c.TREES OVER 4" CALIPER GUY AS NEEDED d.MULTI-TRUNK TREES THREE STAKES PER TREE MINIMUM, QUANTITY AND POSITIONS AS NEEDED TO STABILIZE THE TREE 7.UPON COMPLETION OF PLANTING, CONSTRUCT AN EARTH WATERING BASIN AROUND THE TREE. COVER THE INTERIOR OF THE TREE RING WITH THE WEED BARRIER CLOTH AND TOPDRESS WITH MULCH (TYPE AND DEPTH PER PLANS). D.SHRUB, PERENNIAL, AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING 1.DIG THE PLANTING HOLES TWICE AS WIDE AND 2" LESS DEEP THAN EACH PLANT'S ROOTBALL. INSTALL THE PLANT IN THE HOLE. BACKFILL AROUND THE PLANT WITH SOIL AMENDED PER SOIL TEST RECOMMENDATIONS. 2.INSTALL THE WEED BARRIER CLOTH, OVERLAPPING IT AT THE ENDS. UTILIZE STEEL STAPLES TO KEEP THE WEED BARRIER CLOTH IN PLACE. 3.WHEN PLANTING IS COMPLETE, INSTALL MULCH (TYPE AND DEPTH PER PLANS) OVER ALL PLANTING BEDS, COVERING THE ENTIRE PLANTING AREA. E.SODDING 1.SOD VARIETY TO BE AS SPECIFIED ON THE LANDSCAPE PLAN. 2.LAY SOD WITHIN 24 HOURS FROM THE TIME OF STRIPPING. DO NOT LAY IF THE GROUND IS FROZEN. 3.PROVIDE A STRAIGHT, CLEAN-CUT EDGE OF EXISTING TURF TO WHICH NEW SOD CAN BE ABUTTED. 4.LAY THE SOD TO FORM A SOLID MASS WITH TIGHTLY FITTED JOINTS. BUTT ENDS AND SIDES OF SOD STRIPS - DO NOT OVERLAP. STAGGER STRIPS TO OFFSET JOINTS IN ADJACENT COURSES. 5.ROLL THE SOD TO ENSURE GOOD CONTACT OF THE SOD'S ROOT SYSTEM WITH THE SOIL UNDERNEATH. 6.WATER THE SOD THOROUGHLY WITH A FINE SPRAY IMMEDIATELY AFTER PLANTING TO OBTAIN AT LEAST SIX INCHES OF PENETRATION INTO THE SOIL BELOW THE SOD. F.CLEAN UP 1.DURING LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND PLANTING, KEEP ALL PAVEMENT CLEAN AND ALL WORK AREAS IN A NEAT, ORDERLY CONDITION. 2.DISPOSED LEGALLY OF ALL EXCAVATED MATERIALS OFF THE PROJECT SITE. G.INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE 1.UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE SITE CLEAN, FREE OF DEBRIS AND TRASH, AND SUITABLE FOR USE AS INTENDED. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL THEN REQUEST AN INSPECTION BY THE OWNER TO DETERMINE FINAL ACCEPTABILITY. 2.WHEN THE INSPECTED PLANTING WORK DOES NOT COMPLY WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE AND/OR REPAIR THE REJECTED WORK TO THE OWNER'S SATISFACTION WITHIN 24 HOURS. 3.THE LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PERIOD WILL NOT COMMENCE UNTIL THE LANDSCAPE WORK HAS BEEN RE-INSPECTED BY THE OWNER AND FOUND TO BE ACCEPTABLE. AT THAT TIME, A WRITTEN NOTICE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE WILL BE ISSUED BY THE OWNER, AND THE MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE PERIODS WILL COMMENCE. H.LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 1.THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF ALL WORK SHOWN ON THESE PLANS FOR 90 DAYS BEYOND FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF ALL LANDSCAPE WORK BY THE OWNER. LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE SHALL INCLUDE WEEKLY SITE VISITS FOR THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS (AS APPROPRIATE): PROPER PRUNING, RESTAKING OF TREES, RESETTING OF PLANTS THAT HAVE SETTLED, MOWING AND AERATION OF LAWNS, WEEDING, RESEEDING AREAS WHICH HAVE NOT GERMINATED WELL, TREATING FOR INSECTS AND DISEASES,REPLACEMENT OF MULCH, REMOVAL OF LITTER, REPAIRS TO THE IRRIGATION SYSTEM DUE TO FAULTY PARTS AND/OR WORKMANSHIP, AND THE APPROPRIATE WATERING OF ALL PLANTINGS. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN THE IRRIGATION SYSTEM IN PROPER WORKING ORDER, WITH SCHEDULING ADJUSTMENTS BY SEASON TO MAXIMIZE WATER CONSERVATION. 2. SHOULD SEEDED AND/OR SODDED AREAS NOT BE COVERED BY AN AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WATERING THESE AREAS AND OBTAINING A FULL, HEALTHY STAND OF GRASS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. 3.TO ACHIEVE FINAL ACCEPTANCE AT THE END OF THE MAINTENANCE PERIOD, ALL OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST OCCUR: a.THE LANDSCAPE SHALL SHOW ACTIVE, HEALTHY GROWTH (WITH EXCEPTIONS MADE FOR SEASONAL DORMANCY). ALL PLANTS NOT MEETING THIS CONDITION SHALL BE REJECTED AND REPLACED BY HEALTHY PLANT MATERIAL PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE. b.ALL HARDSCAPE SHALL BE CLEANED PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE. c.SODDED AREAS MUST BE ACTIVELY GROWING AND MUST REACH A MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 1 1/2 INCHES BEFORE FIRST MOWING. HYDROMULCHED AREAS SHALL SHOW ACTIVE, HEALTHY GROWTH. BARE AREAS LARGER THAN TWELVE SQUARE INCHES MUST BE RESODDED OR RESEEDED (AS APPROPRIATE) PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE. ALL SODDED TURF SHALL BE NEATLY MOWED. I.WARRANTY PERIOD, PLANT GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENTS 1.THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL TREES, SHRUBS, PERENNIALS, SOD, SEEDED/HYDROMULCHED AREAS, AND IRRIGATION SYSTEMS FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF THE OWNER'S FINAL ACCEPTANCE (90 DAYS FOR ANNUAL PLANTS). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE, AT HIS OWN EXPENSE AND TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER, ANY PLANTS WHICH DIE IN THAT TIME, OR REPAIR ANY PORTIONS OF THE IRRIGATION SYSTEM WHICH OPERATE IMPROPERLY. 2.AFTER THE INITIAL MAINTENANCE PERIOD AND DURING THE GUARANTEE PERIOD, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL ONLY BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPLACEMENT OF PLANTS WHEN PLANT DEATH CANNOT BE ATTRIBUTED DIRECTLY TO OVERWATERING OR OTHER DAMAGE BY HUMAN ACTIONS. J.PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF (2) COPIES OF RECORD DRAWINGS TO THE OWNER UPON COMPLETION OF WORK. A RECORD DRAWING IS A RECORD OF ALL CHANGES THAT OCCURRED IN THE FIELD AND THAT ARE DOCUMENTED THROUGH CHANGE ORDERS, ADDENDA, OR CONTRACTOR/CONSULTANT DRAWING MARKUPS. TREE PLANTING SCALE: NOT TO SCALEA 5 6 7 4 1 8 9 11 10 12 PREVAILING WINDS NOTES: 1.SCARIFY SIDES OF PLANTING PIT PRIOR TO SETTING TREE. 2.REMOVE EXCESS SOIL APPLIED ON TOP OF THE ROOTBALL THAT COVERS THE ROOT FLARE. THE PLANTING HOLE DEPTH SHALL BE SUCH THAT THE ROOTBALL RESTS ON UNDISTURBED SOIL, AND THE ROOT FLARE IS 2"-4" ABOVE FINISH GRADE. 3.FOR B&B TREES, CUT OFF BOTTOM 1/3 OF WIRE BASKET BEFORE PLACING TREE IN HOLE, CUT OFF AND REMOVE REMAINDER OF BASKET AFTER TREE IS SET IN HOLE, REMOVE ALL NYLON TIES, TWINE, ROPE, AND OTHER PACKING MATERIAL. REMOVE AS MUCH BURLAP FROM AROUND ROOTBALL AS IS PRACTICAL. 4.REMOVE ALL NURSERY STAKES AFTER PLANTING. 5.FOR TREES 36" BOX/2.5" CAL. AND LARGER, USE THREE STAKES OR DEADMEN (AS APPROPRIATE), SPACED EVENLY AROUND TREE. 6.STAKING SHALL BE TIGHT ENOUGH TO PREVENT TRUNK FROM BENDING, BUT LOOSE ENOUGH TO ALLOW SOME TRUNK MOVEMENT IN WIND. 1 2 3 TREE CANOPY. CINCH-TIES (24" BOX/2" CAL. TREES AND SMALLER) OR 12 GAUGE GALVANIZED WIRE WITH NYLON TREE STRAPS AT TREE AND STAKE (36" BOX/2.5" CAL. TREES AND LARGER). SECURE TIES OR STRAPS TO TRUNK JUST ABOVE LOWEST MAJOR BRANCHES. GREEN STEEL T-POSTS. EXTEND POSTS 12" MIN. INTO UNDISTURBED SOIL. 24" X 3/4" P.V.C. MARKERS OVER WIRES. PRESSURE-TREATED WOOD DEADMAN, TWO PER TREE (MIN.). BURY OUTSIDE OF PLANTING PIT AND 18" MIN. INTO UNDISTURBED SOIL. MULCH, TYPE AND DEPTH PER PLANS. DO NOT PLACE MULCH WITHIN 6" OF TRUNK. FINISH GRADE. BACKFILL. AMEND AND FERTILIZE ONLY AS RECOMMENDED IN SOIL FERTILITY ANALYSIS. ROOT BALL. UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL. 4" HIGH EARTHEN WATERING BASIN. TRUNK FLARE. CONIFEROUS TREE PREVAILING WINDS STAKING EXAMPLES (PLAN VIEW) 2 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 4 3X ROOTBALL DIA. 5 2 3 5 12 NON-CONIFEROUS TREE 13 13 FINISH GRADE. ROOT BARRIER - PLAN VIEW SCALE: NOT TO SCALEB TYPICAL CURB AND GUTTER TYPICAL PLANTING AREA LINEAR ROOT BARRIER MATERIAL. SEE PLANTING NOTES FOR TYPE AND MANUFACTURER. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. TREE CANOPY TREE TRUNK TYPICAL WALKWAY OR PAVING1 2 3 4 5 6 1 4 2 3 5 6 5' 5' 5' 5' OPEN LANDSCAPE TO 10' PARKWAY OR ISLAND NOTES: 1)INSTALL ROOT BARRIERS NEAR ALL NEWLY-PLANTED TREES THAT ARE LOCATED WITHIN FIVE (5) FEET OF PAVING OR CURBS. 2)BARRIERS SHALL BE LOCATED IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO HARDSCAPE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE CONTRACTOR USE ROOT BARRIERS OF A TYPE THAT COMPLETELY ENCIRCLE THE ROOTBALL. LP-2 PLANTING AT PARKING AREA SCALE: NOT TO SCALEC DISTANCE PER PLAN 24" MIN. TO EDGE OF MATURE CANOPY 2 3 41 1 CURB. 2 MULCH LAYER. 3 PLANT. 4 TURF (WHERE SHOWN ON PLAN). 4 X 2X 3 2 1 5 6 7 4 1 2 3 SHRUB, PERENNIAL, OR ORNAMENTAL GRASS. MULCH, TYPE AND DEPTH PER PLANS. PLACE NO MORE THAN 1" OF MULCH WITHIN 6" OF PLANT CENTER. FINISH GRADE. BACKFILL. AMEND AND FERTILIZE ONLY AS RECOMMENDED IN SOIL FERTILITY ANALYSIS. ROOT BALL. UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL. 3" HIGH EARTHEN WATERING BASIN. 5 6 7 SHRUB AND PERENNIAL PLANTING SCALE: NTSE 8 WEED FABRIC UNDER MULCH. 8 LANDSCAPE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS FINISH GRADE.4 4 3 2 1 NOTES: 1)INSTALL EDGING SO THAT STAKES WILL BE ON INSIDE OF PLANTING BED. 2)BOTTOM OF EDGING SHALL BE BURIED A MINIMUM OF 1" BELOW FINISH GRADE. 3)TOP OF MULCH SHALL BE 1" LOWER THAN TOP OF EDGING. MULCH, TYPE AND DEPTH PER PLANS.3 TAPERED STEEL STAKES.2 ROLLED-TOP STEEL EDGING PER PLANS.1 D SCALE: NOT TO SCALE STEEL EDGING MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVENUE, SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: (206) 369-8920 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. XXXXXX 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 EMS EMSEMS 01-24-2024 (800) 680-6630 1600 Broadway, Suite 1600 Denver, CO 80202 www.EvergreenDesignGroup.com EVERGREEN D E S I G N G R O U P BOULDER PLACEMENT SCALE: NOT TO SCALEF 1 2 3 TREE UNDISTURBED NATIVE SOIL. NATURAL BOULDER WITH WEATHERED FACE EXPOSED AND A MINIMUM OF 1/3 OF STONE BELOW FINISH GRADE MULCH, TYPE AND DEPTH PER PLANS. 2 4 2/ 3 1/ 3 13 1 4 FINISH GRADE RESTAURANT 2,325 SF PATIO ±400 SF 0.504 ACRES 0.586 ACRES UNIVERSITY BLVD. TA M A N A D R . 1 2 2 3 4 8 8 5 5 5 5 5 8 5 8 8 5 6 6 6 7 9 10 11 14 16 12 13 15 17 18 19 19 20 20 20 21 22 23 24 (7) @ 48" (3 ) @ 4 8 " 25 2 3 / 4 " S E E P L A N HORIZONTAL RAIL 7/16"Ø HOLE IN POST 1/2" THICK SPACER PLATE X 1 1/2"Ø W/ 1/2"Ø HOLE 3/8 X 2 1/2 POSTS, TYP. L-2 1/2 X 2 1/2 X 3/8" X 2'-11" LONG 1/2" 1/2" THICK SPACER PLATE X 1 1/2" Ø W/ 1/2" Ø HOLE HORIZONTAL RAIL 7/16" Ø HOLE IN POST 3" 1/2" TYP. 1 1/2" SP101 3 2 SP101 ____ 1' - 6 " 1 ' - 3 " 3 " 3' - 0 " 1' - 0 " 1" T Y P . 1' - 0 " 1 ' - 0 " 1 ' - 0 " 1/2" VARIES 1/2" VARIES TY P . 6" 1 0 " 1' - 4 " CORE DRILL 5" Ø HOLE IN CONCRETE TO RECEIVE RAILING STANCHION, SET STANCHION IN CEMENTITIOUS GROUT 3/8 X 2 1/2 RAILS, TYP. EASE EDGES OF TOP RAIL, TYP. 3/8 X 2 1/2 POSTS, TYP. PUNCH 7/16"Ø HOLE, TYP. 3/8"Ø THREADED STUD W/ STAIN. STL. ACORN HEAD NUT AT EACH END W/ S.S. FLAT WASHER ON ONE SIDE AND LOCK-WASHER ON OTHER REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR PATIO RAILING COLOR MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN & DETAILS SP101 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 NORTH 1" = 15'-0"SP101 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN1 KEY NOTES X 1. PROPERTY LINE 2. ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL 3. CONCRETE CURB, TYP., REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS 4. CONCRETE SIDEWALK, TYP., REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS 5. LANDSCAPING, TYP., REFER TO LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS 6. PARKING STRIPING, TYP., REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS W/ WHEEL STOPS ADJACENT SIDEWALK, TYP. 7. ACCESSIBLE PARKING & SIGNAGE, TYP., REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS 8. ACCESSIBLE RAMP, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS 9. TRASH & RECYCLING ENCLOSURE 10. ROOF ACCESS LADDER 11. ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR & METER, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 12. WATER METER, REFER TO CIVIL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS 13. GAS METER & MANIFOLD, REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS 14. GREASE WASTE SEWER LINE, REFER TO CIVIL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS 15. GREASE INTERCEPTOR -OR-NEW GREASE INTERCEPTOR, TOP WITH CONCRETE 16. SANITARY SEWER LINE, REFER TO CIVIL AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS 17. 12' X 44' CONCRETE DRIVE AISLE, EXTEND TO 12' PAST THE C.L. OF PICK-UP WINDOW, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS 18. PATIO AREA, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS 19. NEW BOULDERS IN TRIANGULAR GROUPING (48" Ø, 36" Ø, & 24" Ø), TYP. REFER TO LANDSCAPE DRAWINGS 20. NEW WHITE PAVEMENT STENCIL 21. FUTURE TENANT SITE SIGNAGE, UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT, REFER TO ELECTRICAL 22. FUTURE LOOP DETECTOR, UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT, REFER TO ELECTRICAL 23. NEW MADRAX CIRCA 4-BIKE RACK, IN-GROUND MOUNTING, GALVANIZED FINISH 24. PROPOSED PYLON SIGN LOCATION SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY, UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT 25. PATIO RAILING, REFER TO DETAILS SITE GENERAL NOTES A. FOR ALL SITE WORK INCLUDING PAVING, CURBING, PARKING, PARKING LOT LIGHTING, SIDEWALKS, LANDSCAPING, AND TRASH & RECYCLING ENCLOSURE, REFER TO CIVIL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS B. GC TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITION OF ALL SITE WORK INCLUDING PAVING, CURBING, PARKING, PARKING LOT LIGHTING, SIDEWALKS, LANDSCAPING, AND TRASH & RECYCLING ENCLOSURE ARE IN GOOD CONDITION; PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQUIRED C. STENCILS FOR PARKING MARKINGS AVAILABLE FROM PAVEMENT STENCIL COMPANY, PHONE: (800) 250-5547, EMAIL: STENCILS@PAVEMENTSTENCIL.COM PARKING SUMMARY RESTAURANT USE (10 SPACES/1,000 SF)2,325 SF / 1,000 =24 PARKING SPACES REQUIRED 24 PARKING SPACES PROVIDED (2 ACCESSIBLE) 3" = 1'-0"SP101 RAILING CORNER PLAN DETAIL2 3" = 1'-0"SP101 RAILING CORNER SECTION DETAIL3 1" = 1'-0"SP101 RAILING MOUNTING4 7 SP102 ____ SP102 6 SP102 6 #5 VERTICAL REINFORCING @ 32" O.C. AND EACH CORNER, TO BE CENTERED IN CELL 3 YARD TRASH DUMPSTER SP1022 SP102 3 SP102 5 SP102 4 SMOOTH FACE CMU COMPOST TOTER, TYP. OF 4 8" BOLLARDS FILLED WITH CONCRETE 10'-0" MIN. HEAVY DUTY CONCRETE APRON 3 YARD RECYCLING DUMPSTERSP102 11 SP102 13 3'-0"4'-0"4'-0"3'-0" 5' - 5 " 2' - 8 " 4' - 0 " 14 ' - 0 " 3 YARD TRASH DUMPSTER 8" Ø SCHEDULE 80 STEEL BOLLARD GROUT SOLID & ROUND & TROWEL @ TOP. ENCASE IN 24" DIA CONCRETE BASE 36" DEEP 2" x 2" x 1/4" STL. ANGLE DOOR FRAME (STILES & RAILS) WELD TO DOOR PIVOT -SHOP PRIME & PAINT 9" Ø SCHEDULE STD STEEL PIPE PIVOT -PROVIDE STEEL SHIM BETWEEN PIVOT & BOLLARD 1-1/2" 22 GA. GALVANIZED CORRUGATED METAL "C" PANELS (LEAVE RAW) -WELD TO DOOR FRAME AS SHOWN GREASE FITTING AT EACH HINGE POINT GROUT CORES OF END BLOCK SOLID & PROVIDE #5 REBAR AS SHOWN GALVANIZED METAL CHANNEL 8" 6" CONCRETE SLAB W/ #4 @ 18" O.C. EACH WAY OR 6X6XW2.9XW2.9 W.W.F. OVER COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL, SLOPE TOWARDS DOORS TO ENSURE POSITIVE DRAINAGE GRADE, SLOPE AWAY FROM ENCLOSURE CMU, SEE PLAN FOR REINFORCEMENT GROUT TOP COURSE SOLID #4 W/ 24" LEGS @ 16" O.C. (2) #5 CONTINUOUS #5 CONTINUOUS #5 UP THROUGH (4) COURSES 3' - 0 " 7' - 6 " 4" 3 1 / 2 " GALVANIZED METAL COPING AND HOLD-DOWN CLIPS W/ CONTINUOUS DRIP EDGE EACH SIDE 1'-2" 11 TRASH ENCLOSURE DOOR: 2" x 2" x 1/4" STEEL ANGLE STILES & RAILS W/ 22 GA. GALVANIZED CORRUGATED "C" PANELS & 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 3/16" STEEL ANGLE BRACE - SHOP PRIME ANGLES & PAINT 8" Ø SCHEDULE 80 STEEL BOLLARD GROUT SOLID & ROUND & TROWEL @ TOP. ENCASE IN 24" DIA CONCRETE BASE 36" DEEP 9" Ø SCHEDULE STD STEEL PIPE PIVOT -PROVIDE STEEL SHIM BETWEEN PIVOT & BOLLARD GREASE FITTING AT EA. HINGE POINT 2" x 2" x 1/4" STL. ANGLE DOOR FRAME (STILES & RAILS) -WELD TO DOOR PIVOT -SHOP PRIME & PAINT 2" 1' - 0 " 3/16 TYP 1' - 0 " 1 ' - 7 " 6" 2 " 6 " 3 " 1 " 5" 1-1/2" I.D. x 6" LONG STEEL PIPE SLEEVE FLUSH WITH TOP OF PAVING -PROVIDE AT CLOSED AND FULLY OPEN POSITION, TYPICAL CONCRETE PAVING 3/4" DIAMETER STEEL CANE BOLT BOTTOM OF GATE PIPE SLEEVE -WELD TO FRAME, GALVANIZED FINISH 1/8" BAR IN "ZEE" PROFILE, 1" WIDE - PROFILE TO ACCEPT CANE BOLT - WELD TO FRAME TRASH ENCLOSURE DOOR: 2" X 2" X 1/4" STEEL ANGLE STILES & RAILS W/ 1 1/2" 22 GA GALVANIZED CORRUGATED "C" PANELS & 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 3/16" STEEL ANGLE BRACE 5" 3' - 6 " 5 ' - 0 " FINISH TOP W/ ROUNDED CONC. FORM. 8" DIA. SCHED. 40 STEEL POST FILLED W/ CONCRETE, PAINTED TO PREVENT CRACKING IN SLAB WRAP PIPE W/3-LAYERS OF 30# FELT PAPER FROM 2" ABOVE T.O. SLAB DOWN TO T.O. FTG.. CUT OFF EXCESS FELT ABOVE SLAB AFTER CURE FINISHED CONC. TO SLOPE AWAY FROM BOLLARD. EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB 18" Ø CONCRETE FTG. ENCLOSURE FINISH SCHEDULE MATERIAL COLOR / FINISH CMU REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 09900 CMU PRIMER REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 09900 METAL COPING PREFINISHED TO MATCH TRASH ENCLOSURE WALL PAINTED TO MATCH TRASH ENCLOSURE WALLCORRUGATED METAL & DOOR FRAMES CMU BLOCK 6" DIA. SCHEDULE 40 STEEL BOLLARD GROUT SOLID & ROUND & TROWEL @ TOP. EMBED 2'-3" INTO CONCRETE PIER 7" DIA. SCHEDULE STD x 1'-0" STEEL PIPE PIVOTS -PROVIDE STL. SHIM BETWEEN PIVOT & BOLLARD -WELD PIVOT TO DOOR, REFER TO DETAIL 13/A102. GREASE FITTING AT EACH HINGE POINT 6" GALVANIZED METAL CHANNEL MAN DOOR GALVANIZED METAL CHANNEL STEEL PLATE WELDED TO FRAME ANGLE WITH HANDLE CMU BLOCK MAGNETIC CATCH 2" X 2" X 12" ANGLE. BOLT TO BLOCK 6" DIA. SCHEDULE 40 STEEL BOLLARD GROUT SOLID & ROUND & TROWEL @ TOP. EMBED 2'-3" INTO CONCRETE PIER PERSON DOOR: 2" x 2" x 1/4" STEEL ANGLE STILES & RAILS W/ 1 1/2" 22 GA GALVANIZED CORRUGATED "C" PANELS & 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 3/16" STEEL ANGLE BRACE -SHOP PRIME ANGLES & PAINT 7" DIA. SCHEDULE STD x 1'-0" STEEL PIPE PIVOTS -PROVIDE STEEL SHIM BETWEEN PIVOT & BOLLARD -WELD PIVOT TO DOOR, SHOP PRIME AND PAINT GREASE FITTING AT EA. HINGE POINT 3/16 TYP MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 TRASH & RECYCLING ENCLOSURE PLAN AND DETAILS SP102 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"SP102 TRASH & RECYCLING ENCLOSURE PLAN1 1 1/2" = 1'-0"SP102 ENCLOSURE WALL & PIVOT DETAIL6 3/4" = 1'-0"SP102 ENCLOSURE WALL DETAIL7 1 1/2" = 1'-0"SP102 ENCLOSURE DOOR PIVOT8 1 1/2" = 1'-0"SP102 TYPICAL CANE BOLT DETAIL9 3/4" = 1'-0"SP102 TYP. BOLLARD DETAIL10 1/4" = 1'-0"SP102 ENCLOSURE ELEVATION2 1/4" = 1'-0"SP102 ENCLOSURE ELEVATION3 1/4" = 1'-0"SP102 ENCLOSURE ELEVATION4 1/4" = 1'-0"SP102 ENCLOSURE ELEVATION5 1 1/2" = 1'-0"SP102 PERSON DOOR PIVOT11 1 1/2" = 1'-0"SP102 PERSON DOOR LATCH13 1 1/2" = 1'-0"SP102 PERSON DOOR PIVOT12 A301 3 A3011 A301 2 A301 4 1 A401 ____ A431 1 A431 2 A431 3 A431 4 A431 6 A431 8 66 ' - 6 " 11 ' - 4 " 11 ' - 4 " 43 ' - 1 0 " A B C D 3 3' - 8 " 1' - 4 " 8' - 8 " 1' - 4 " 14'-3 1/2" 11'-1"4'-0" 4'-5 1/2" 33'-8 1/2" EQ EQ EQ 26 ' - 5 1 / 2 " 40 ' - 0 1 / 2 " EQ EQ EQ 9' - 9 " A431 9 3 A401 ____ 2 A401 ____ 4 A401 ____ EQ EQ 7' - 6 " 1 2 1 3 2 2 4 5 5 5 4 6 7 8 9 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL SHELL FLOOR PLAN A101 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 1. COMPACTED, EXPOSED SUB-GRADE, TOP OF SUB-GRADE TO BE DELIVERED AT AN ELEVATION TO ALLOW THE SLAB TO BE POURED AT A THICKNESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH TENANT’S STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR THE PREMISES 2. 5' X 5' MIN. CONCRETE DOOR STOOP, COORDINATE W/ STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL DRAWINGS 3. 6' X 5' MIN. CONCRETE DOOR STOOP, COORDINATE W/ STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL DRAWINGS 4. GYP. BD. TO 1 1/2" BELOW TRUSS BEARING, ONLY WHERE INDICATED 5. GYP. BD. ABOVE STOREFRONT TO 1 1/2" BELOW TRUSS BEARING, ONLY WHERE INDICATED 6. SOFFIT ABOVE 7. ROOF ACCESS LADDER, REFER TO WALL SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 8. SHEAR WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 9. OFFSET STRUCTURE AND FRAMING FROM CORNER, COORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL KEY NOTES NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A101 ARCHITECTURAL SHELL FLOOR PLAN1 FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. REFER TO DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULES AND STOREFRONT DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. B. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FRAMING OR CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE UNLESS NOTES OTHERWISE. REFER TO WALL SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONAL COORDINATION. C. REFER TO STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR ALL FRAMING CONFIGURATIONS, SIZES, SPACING AND GAUGES. D. ALL EXTERIOR WOOD BLOCKING TO BE MOISTURE RESISTANT PRESERVATIVE TREATED (P.T.). E. TAPE SEALANT AT ALL ANCHOR LOCATIONS. F. ALL FLASHING AND SEAMS BETWEEN SHEATHING IN COMPOSITE WOOD STUD WALL CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS TO BE TAPED AND SEALED WITH TAPE SEALANT. G. LAP ALL WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIERS AND THRU-WALL FLASHING IN A WATER SHEDDING FASHION. TAPE ALL EXPOSED EDGES. H. EXTEND ALL THRU-WALL FLASHING TO 1/4 INCH PAST THE EXTERIOR FACE OF WALL. I. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS ANCHORAGE FOR ALL THRU-WALL FLASHING. J. EXTEND FLASHING VERTICALLY A MINIMUM OF 8 INCHES ABOVE THE BASE OF THE FLASHING. K. APPLY SEALANT TO ALL SHEATHING JOINTS AND FASTENER PENETRATIONS. L. PROVIDE FULLY ADHERED FLASHING AT ALL WINDOW AND DOOR OPENING HEADS, SILLS AND JAMBS. ROOFTOP UNIT 1,500 LBS. ROOFTOP UNIT 1,500 LBS. FAN 100 LBS. CONDENSER 260 LBS. CONDENSER 100 LBS. CONDENSER 100 LBS. MAKEUP AIR UNIT 800 LBS. EXHAUST FAN 300 LBS. HOOD BELOW 1,150 LBS. 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ARCHITECTURAL ROOF PLAN A201 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 ROOF GENERAL NOTES A. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZE OF STRUCTURAL ROOF REINFORCEMENTS. B. STRUCTURE FOR SHELL BUILDING IS DESIGNED FOR THE FUTURE WEIGHTS AND PLACEMENT EXHIBITED. C. ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS SHALL BE ENTIRELY CONCEALED BEHIND FUTURE TENANT SOFFIT BELOW ROOF, V.I.F. WITH TENANT DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT AS REQUIRED. KEY NOTES 1. MEMRANE ROOF AND UNIFORM MIN. R-30 RIGID INSULATION, REFER TO SPECIFICATION 2. PLYWOOD DECK AND WOOD TRUSSES ARE EXPOSED IN THE DINING AREA AND ARE TO BE FREE OF MARKINGS 3. STRUCTURE BELOW, TYP. 4. METAL CANOPY BELOW, TYP. 5. PREFINISHED COPING AT T.O. PARAPET, TYP. 6. ROOF ACCESS LADDER 7. ROOF DRAINS AND OVERFLOW DRAINS 8. FUTURE ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT, UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT, SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY 9. FUTURE HOOD BELOW ROOF, UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT, SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY X NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A201 ROOF PLAN1 1. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, TYP. 2. PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL TO MATCH STOREFRONT 3. DOOR(S) AND HARDWARE, REFER TO SCHEDULES 4. EIFS, COLOR TO MATCH 'FOG' 5. EIFS, COLOR TO MATCH 'KNIGHT'S ARMOR' 6. EIFS REVEAL, TYP. 7. PREFINISHED METAL COPING TO MATCH ADJACENT EIFS 8. PREFINISHED METAL CANOPY TO MATCH STOREFRONT, TYP. 9. PICK-UP WINDOW W/ INTEGRATED AIR CURTAIN 10. LINE OF ROOF, BEYOND 11. ROOF ACCESS LADDER W/ LOCKING GATE, PAINT 'KNIGHT'S ARMOR' 12. OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN, TYP. 13. EMERGENCY EGRESS LIGHTING CENTERED OVER DOOR, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 14. PATIO LIGHTING CENTERED OVER GLAZING, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 15. FUTURE SIGNAGE, UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT, SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY KEY NOTES X FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 10'-0" T.O. PARAPET ± 19'-4" 12 8 4 5 7 1015 14 FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 10'-0" T.O. PARAPET ± 19'-4" T.O. TOWER ± 20'-8" 1'-5"1'-6"8"1'-0"1'-2" 1 2 3 4 7 10 13 15 1414 1'-2"1'-0"8"1'-6"1'-5" 3 4 5 7 10 11 13 FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 10'-0" T.O. PARAPET ± 19'-4" T.O. TOWER ± 20'-8" 1'-6 1/2"2'-0"1'-0"1'-6"1'-8"1'-0"1'-6"1'-6 1/2" 1 2 4 5 6 8 7 9 10 12 12 15 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 ELEVATIONS - EXTERIOR A301 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 EXT. ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES A. EXPOSED UTILITIES AND CONDUIT/PIPE THAT ARE ALLOWED TO BE PAINTED SHALL MATCH ADJACENT FINISH B. ADDRESS NUMBERS SHALL BE 6" TALL WHITE VINYL ON STOREFRONT UNLESS REQUIRED OTHERWISE BY AHJ 1/4" = 1'-0"A301 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1 1/4" = 1'-0"A301 EXTERIOR ELEVATION2 1/4" = 1'-0"A301 EXTERIOR ELEVATION3 1/4" = 1'-0"A301 EXTERIOR ELEVATION4 1. COMPACTED, EXPOSED SUB-GRADE, TOP OF SUB-GRADE TO BE DELIVERED AT AN ELEVATION TO ALLOW THE SLAB TO BE POURED AT A THICKNESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH TENANT’S STRUCTURAL PLANS FOR THE PREMISES 2. FRAMED WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, TYP. 3. WOOD TRUSS, TYP., REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 4. MEMBRANE ROOF OVER RIGID INSULATION 5. EIFS SYSTEM, TYP. 6. PREFINISHED METAL COPING 7. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, TYP. 8. PICK-UP WINDOW, REFER TO SPECIFICATION 9. PREFINISHED METAL CANOPY 10. ROOF ACCESS LADDER, REFER TO WALL SECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS KEY NOTES X FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 10'-0" T.O. PARAPET ± 19'-4" 3 A401 ____4 A401 ____ 1 27 3 4 5 6 10 FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 10'-0" T.O. PARAPET ± 19'-4" TRUSS BEARING 11'-10" 3 A401 ____4 A401 ____ 12 7 3 4 5 6 FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" T.O. PARAPET ± 19'-4" 1 A401 ____ TRUSS BEARING 11'-10" 2 A401 ____ 12 3 4 5 6 5 FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 10'-0" T.O. PARAPET ± 19'-4" 1 A401 ____ T.O. TOWER ± 20'-8" TRUSS BEARING 11'-10" 2 A401 ____ 12 7 3 4 5 6 8 9 5 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 BUILDING SECTIONS A401 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 1/4" = 1'-0"A401 BUILDING SECTION1 1/4" = 1'-0"A401 BUILDING SECTION2 1/4" = 1'-0"A401 BUILDING SECTION3 1/4" = 1'-0"A401 BUILDING SECTION4 CONCRETE SIDEWALK SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING SISTER PARAPET STUD TO EA. TRUSS ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING 19'-4" T.O. PARAPET BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL A421 7 EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 4" GRADE SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING SISTER PARAPET STUD TO EA. TRUSS ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING 19'-4" T.O. PARAPET BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL ROOF DRAIN, REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS AND CIVIL DRAWINGS DOWNSPOUT, REFER TO PLUMBING, SEAL AT PERIMETER OF OPENING MAIN ROOF DRAIN CONNECTION, REFER TO PLUMBING & CIVIL DRAWINGS 8" M I N . CONCRETE DRIVE AISLE, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING 20'-8" T.O. TOWER BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL HEADER, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS PRE-FINISHED (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) METAL CANOPY, FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS 10'-0" B.O. CANOPY PICK-UP WINDOW, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS A421 3 A421 6 A421 9 3'-6" CANOPY 1 1/4" CONCRETE CURB, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGSGRADE SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING SISTER PARAPET STUD TO EA. TRUSS ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 10'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING 19'-4" T.O. PARAPET BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES W/ EXPOSED PLYWOOD ON INTERIOR EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT A421 5 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 WALL SECTIONS A411 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 3/4" = 1'-0"A411 WALL SECTION1 3/4" = 1'-0"A411 WALL SECTION2 3/4" = 1'-0"A411 WALL SECTION3 3/4" = 1'-0"A411 WALL SECTION4 CONCRETE SIDEWALK SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING SISTER PARAPET STUD TO EA. TRUSS ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING 19'-4" T.O. PARAPET BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL A421 4 A421 1 4" CONCRETE SIDEWALK SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 10'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING 19'-4" T.O. PARAPET EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL PRE-FINISHED (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) METAL CANOPY, FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS SISTER PARAPET STUD TO EA. TRUSS ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES W/ EXPOSED PLYWOOD ON INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT A421 8 GYP. BD. UP TO 1-1/2" BELOW TRUSS BEARING 1 1/4" 3'-6" CANOPY CONCRETE SIDEWALK SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 19'-4" T.O. PARAPET EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 15'-0" T.O. PARAPET 2 1/2" X 3/8" BENT PLATE STEEL BRACKETS @ 4'-0" O.C. MAX. CENTER BETWEEN RUNGS 2 1/2" X 3/8" BENT PLATE STEEL SIDE RAIL LOCKING SECURITY GATE 7/8" DIA. STEEL RUNG @ 12" O.C. 1' - 0 " 6 " 5 A431 ____ EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 4" CONCRETE SIDEWALK SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER RIGID INSULATION ON ROOF DECK ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR 10'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING 19'-4" T.O. PARAPET EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL SISTER PARAPET STUD TO EA. TRUSS ROOF TRUSS, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS BLOCKING BETWEEN TRUSSES W/ EXPOSED PLYWOOD ON INTERIOR PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT GYP. BD. UP TO 1-1/2" BELOW TRUSS BEARING A421 2 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 WALL SECTIONS A412 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 3/4" = 1'-0"A412 WALL SECTION1 3/4" = 1'-0"A412 WALL SECTION2 3/4" = 1'-0"A412 WALL SECTION3 3/4" = 1'-0"A412 WALL SECTION4 CONCRETE SIDEWALK SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR2" STARTER TRACK W/ WEEP HOLES FINISH COAT REINFORCING MESH BASE COAT WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING EXPOSED PORTION OF FOUNDATION WALL TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISH CONTINUOUS EXPANSION JOINT FOUNDATION WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 2" CONTINUOUS RIGID INSULATION, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOUNDATION, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING 19'-4" T.O. PARAPETTAPERED BLOCKING ROOFING MEMBRANE ON INTERIOR OF PARAPET WALL, EXTEND UP AND OVER TOP OF PARAPET PARAPET FRAMING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL PLYWOOD SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL PREFINISHED METAL COPING, FINISH TO MATCH ADJACENT EIFS SEALANT, TYP. EA. SIDE FINISH COAT BASE COAT REINFORCING MESH 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING FINISH COAT BASE COAT REINFORCING MESH 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING CONT. BACKER ROD AND SEALANT 3/4" DRIP REVEAL AND DRAINAGE GAP 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR CONCRETE SIDEWALK SLOPED AWAY FROM BUILDING, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS CONTINUOUS EXPANSION JOINT FOUNDATION WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 2" CONTINUOUS RIGID INSULATION, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOUNDATION, REFER TO STRUCTURAL CONTINUOUS SEALANT, DO NOT COVER WEEPS IN STOREFRONT ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING 10'-0" T.O. STOREFRONT 11'-0" B.O. EXT. SOFFIT 11'-10" TRUSS BEARING PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT FINISH COAT BASE COAT REINFORCING MESH 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING DRIP REVEAL AND DRAINAGE GAP CONT. BACKER ROD AND SEALANT ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS J-BEAD AT T.O. GYP. BD. AT OPEN CEILING LOCATIONS 3/4" CONTINUOUS BACKER ROD AND SEALANT, EACH SIDE ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT EA. SIDE 1 1/4" X 1 1/4" LED LIGHT HOUSING CHANNEL, WELD TO BACK OF CANOPY PRE-FINISHED (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) METAL CANOPY, FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS GALV. METAL FLASHING TO MATCH EIFS, EXTEND UNDER STOREFRONT LED LIGHT, DRILL THROUGH STEEL AS NEEDED, KEEP HOLES AT LEAST 16" FROM ENDS OF STEEL, REFER TO ELECTRICAL STEEL PLATE AND OUTRIGGERS PROVIDED BY CANOPY VENDOR, REFER TO SHOP DRAWINGS FOR CONNECTIONS CONTINUOUS BACKER ROD AND SEALANT, EACH SIDE 0'-0" FINISH FLOOR CONTINUOUS EXPANSION JOINT FOUNDATION WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL 2" CONTINUOUS RIGID INSULATION, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOUNDATION, REFER TO STRUCTURAL EXPOSED PORTION OF FOUNDATION WALL TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISH 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL STARTER TRACK W/ WEEP HOLES FINISH COAT REINFORCING MESH BASE COAT CONCRETE DRIVE AISLE, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS CONT. BACKER ROD AND SEALANT, EACH SIDE PICK-UP WINDOW, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS EIFS JAMB BEYOND 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL FINISH COAT REINFORCING MESH BASE COAT METAL FLASHING W/ DRIP EDGE, EXTEND UNDER WINDOW AND SLOPE TOWARD EXTERIOR PRE-FINISHED (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) METAL CANOPY, FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS 1 1/4" X 1 1/4" LED LIGHT HOUSING CHANNEL GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING TO MATCH CANOPY 10'-0" B.O. CANOPY CONT. BACKER ROD AND SEALANT, EACH SIDEPICK-UP WINDOW, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS EIFS JAMB BEYOND GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING TO MATCH WINDOW STEEL PLATE AND OUTRIGGERS PROVIDED BY CANOPY VENDOR, REFER TO SHOP DRAWINGS FOR CONNECTIONS 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL FINISH COAT REINFORCING MESH BASE COAT GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING TO MATCH CANOPY MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 SECTION DETAILS A421 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 FOUNDATION SECTION1 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 PARAPET SECTION7 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 SOFFIT SECTION4 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 FOUNDATION SECTION2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 SOFFIT SECTION5 3" = 1'-0"A421 CANOPY SECTION8 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 FOUNDATION SECTION3 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 SILL SECTION6 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A421 HEAD & CANOPY SECTION9 MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 SECTION DETAILS A422 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 Sto EIFS NExT ATTENTION WWW.STOCORP.COM Sto products are intended for use by qualified professional contractors, not consumers, as a component of a larger construction assembly as specified by a qualified design professional, general contractor or builder. They should be installed in accordance with those specifications and Sto's instructions. Sto Corp. disclaims all, and assumes no, liability for on-site inspections, for its products applied improperly, or by unqualified persons or entities, or as part of an improperly designed or constructed building, for the nonperformance of adjacent building components or assemblies, or for other construction activities beyond Sto's control. Improper use of Sto products or use as part of an improperly designed or constructed larger assembly or building may result in serious damage to Sto products, and to the structure of the building or its components. STO CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED EXCEPT FOR EXPLICIT LIMITED WRITTEN WARRANTIES ISSUED TO AND ACCEPTED BY BUILDING OWNERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH STO'S WARRANTY PROGRAMS WHICH ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE FROM TIME TO TIME.For the fullest, most current information on proper application, clean-up, mixing and other specifications and warranties, cautions and disclaimers, please refer to the Sto Corp. website, www.stocorp.com. Sto details are illustrations of construction. They are guidelines, intended for use by the design/construction professional,to assist in developing project specific details. They should be modified where necessary to accomodate individual project conditions. Refer to appropriate Sto specification for design requirements. Refer to local building code for any special requirements. R N.T.S.A422 EIFS TERMINATION AT PARAPET4 N.T.S.A422 EIFS SYSTEM COMPONENTS1 N.T.S.A422 EIFS UNVENTED INSULATED SOFFIT (WITHOUT STARTER TRACK)3 N.T.S.A422 EIFS TERMINATION AT GRADE2 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT, EA. SIDE PRESSURE TREATED BLOCKING, BRAKE METAL TO ALIGN W/ FACE OF STOREFRONT PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) W/ NO HORIZONTAL SEAMS OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT COLUMN, REFER TO STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT, EA. SIDE PRESSURE TREATED BLOCKING, BRAKE METAL TO ALIGN W/ FACE OF STOREFRONT PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) W/ NO HORIZONTAL SEAMS OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT COLUMN, REFER TO STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT, EA. SIDE PRESSURE TREATED BLOCKING, BRAKE METAL TO ALIGN W/ FACE OF STOREFRONT PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) W/ NO HORIZONTAL SEAMS OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BETWEEN STOREFRONT AND COLUMN INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR COLUMN, REFER TO STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT, EA. SIDE PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) W/ NO HORIZONTAL SEAMS OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT & EIFS COLUMN, REFER TO STRUCTURAL WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING FINISH COAT BASE COAT REINFORCING MESH 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING SEALANT 6" FINISH COAT BASE COAT REINFORCING MESH 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING WOOD STUD WALL W/ BATT INSULATION, PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER ON INSIDE FACE OF WALL, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR STUD SPACING COLUMN, REFER TO STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS, PROVIDE CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT BOTH SIDES CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) W/ NO HORIZONTAL SEAMS OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT & EIFS 6" DOWNSPOUT, REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS 2" EIFS SYSTEM OVER WATERPROOFING OVER EXTERIOR SHEATHING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL FINISH COAT REINFORCING MESH BASE COAT 1/2" DIA. LAG SCREW W/ WASHER 2 1/2" X 3/8" BENT PLATE STEEL BRACKETS @ 4'-0" O.C. MAX. WELD TO SIDE RAILS AND WELD TOP TO STEEL ANGLE FRAME 2 1/2" X 3/8" BENT PLATE STEEL SIDE RAIL LOCKING SECURITY GATE 7/8" DIA. STEEL RUNG W/ KNURLED SURFACE @ 12" O.C., PUNCH INTO RAILS AND WELD 8" 2'-1" ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM, REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS CONT. BACKER ROD & SEALANT, EA. SIDE PRESSURE TREATED BLOCKING, BRAKE METAL TO ALIGN W/ FACE OF STOREFRONT PREFINISHED BRAKE METAL (TO MATCH STOREFRONT) W/ NO HORIZONTAL SEAMS OVER COMMERCIAL BUILDING WRAP FULLY ADHERED TO EXTERIOR SHEATHING, TUCK BEHIND STOREFRONT COLUMN, REFER TO STRUCTURAL MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 PLAN DETAILS A431 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 STOREFRONT @ WOOD COLUMN3 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 STOREFRONT CORNER @ STEEL COLUMN4 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 STOREFRONT @ STEEL COLUMN8 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 STOREFRONT END CONDITION2 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 EIFS OUTSIDE CORNER1 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 STOREFRONT & METAL PANEL END CONDITION6 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 ROOF ACCESS LADDER5 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A431 STOREFRONT CORNER @ WOOD COLUMN9 STOREFRONT INSTALL CLOSER ONTO HEAD JAMB AS SHOWN -INSTALL W/ OPTIONAL BACK PLATE WHERE HEAD JAMB DIMENSION IS LESS THAN 3" DOOR CLOSER DOOR -REFER TO SCHEDULE TOP JAMB MOUNT INSTALLATION. (NOTE THAT BACKPLATE IS MISSING IN THIS INSTALLATION BECAUSE HEAD JAMB IS OF ADEQUATE HEIGHT TO RECEIVE ALL MOUNTING SCREWS WITHOUT IT.) WHEN IN DOUBT ABOUT THE HEAD JAMB DIMENSION OR STABILITY, ORDER THE BACKPLATE. CLOSERS SHALL BE TESTED AND ADJUSTED SO THAT FROM AN OPEN POSITION OF 90 DEGREES, THE TIME REQUIRED TO MOVE THE DOOR TO A POSITION OF 12 DEGREES FROM THE LATCH IS 5 SECONDS MINIMUM. CLEAR, INSULATED, TEMPERED SAFETY GLASS DOOR TYPE A ALUMINUM DOOR W/ TEMPERED GLAZING RE : D O O R S C H E D U L E RE: DOOR SCHED 10 " RE: DOOR SCHED RE : D O O R S C H E D U L E DOOR TYPE D INSULATED HOLLOW METAL DOOR FUTURE WOOD PULL BY TENANT, REFER TO HARDWARE SCHEDULE TEMPERED, INSULATED GLASS SERVICE DOOR ENTRY DOOR DOOR VIEWER EQ EQ FRAME TYPE 1 HOLLOW METAL FRAME W/ STOPS RE : D O O R S C H E D U L E 2" 2"2"RE: DOOR SCHEDULE FRAME TYPE 2 HOLLOW METAL FRAME W/ STOPS & FROSTED FILM RE : D O O R S C H E D U L E 2 " 2 ' - 0 " 2 " 2"2"RE: DOOR SCHEDULE T (2) SET 1 -MAIN ENTRY -PAIR -WOOD PULL/PUSH HINGE (2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (2) (2) MORTISE CYLINDER TEMP CORE PUSH HARDWARE PULL HARDWARE DEADBOLT EXIT INDICATOR HEADER BOLT THRESHOLD BOLT CLOSER DOOR STOP OVERHEAD STOP CLOSER BACK PLATE THRESHOLD SMOKE SEAL DOOR SWEEP HAGER, MODEL 780-224HD-83-CLR SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-103 (BRUSHED CHROME), C.O. CYLINDER AT 34" MIN. FROM BOTTOM OF DOOR SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-035 INTERCHANGEABLE CORE, (BRUSHED CHROME) 1 1/2" DIAMETER WOOD PUSH, FUTURE BY TENANT 1 1/2" DIAMETER WOOD PULL, FUTURE BY TENANT ADAMS RITE, MODEL MS1850S-310-628 ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4089-00-130 ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4016-30-01 ADAMS RITE, MODEL 4015-18-1B DORMA, MODEL 8916-AF89P-689 (TOP JAMB), (ALUMINUM) IVES, MODEL FS18S (ALUMINUM) GLYNN-JOHNSON, MODEL 454S-SP28 (ALUMINUM) DORMA, MODEL BP89 (ALUMINUM) REESE, MODEL S239A-72 REESE, MODEL 797B-21 PEMKO, MODEL SFSC-200-36, TENANT FURNISHED (1) SET 3 -REAR EXIT -SINGLE HINGE (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) RIM CYLINDER TEMP CORE PUSH HARDWARE PULL HARDWARE CLOSER CLOSER BACK PLATE THRESHOLD KICKPLATE DOOR SWEEP HAGER, MODEL 780-224HD-83-CLR GLS, MODEL RCIC-7-LZ-626 SCHLAGE, MODEL 80-035 INTERCHANGEABLE CORE, (BRUSHED CHROME) FALCON, MODEL 25-R-EO-4-US28 FALCON, MODEL 510L-DANE-LHR-US26D (ALUMINUM) (EXTERIOR SIDE) DORMA, MODEL 8916-AF89P-689 (ALUMINUM) (TOP JAMB) DORMA, MODEL BP89 (ALUMINUM) REESE, MODEL S239A-42 HIAWATHA, MODEL KP834-32D PEMKO, MODEL SFSC-200-42, TENANT FURNISHED WEATHERSTRIP REESE, MODEL DS75C-4070 DOOR VIEWER DOOR SCOPE, DS2000 AL.S.; C.O. VIEWER AT 60" FROM BOTTOM OF DOOR DOOR STOP IVES, MODEL FS18S (ALUMINUM) (3)DOOR SILENCERS IVES, MODEL SR64 DOOR BUZZER TRINE, MODEL 240 (1) SET 2C -ENTRY -SINGLE -WOOD PULL -PANIC HARDWARE HINGE (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) PUSH HARDWARE PULL HARDWARE CLOSER DOOR STOP OVERHEAD STOP CLOSER BACK PLATE THRESHOLD SMOKE SEAL DOOR SWEEP HAGER, MODEL 780-224HD-83-CLR ADAMS RITE, MODEL 8801-36-628 (ALUMINUM), C.O. EXIT DEVICE AT 38" FROM BOTTOM OF DOOR 1 1/2" DIAMETER WOOD PULL, FUTURE BY TENANT DORMA, MODEL 8916-AF89P-689 (TOP JAMB), (ALUMINUM) IVES, MODEL FS18S (ALUMINUM) GLYNN-JOHNSON, MODEL 454S-SP28 (ALUMINUM) DORMA, MODEL BP89 (ALUMINUM) REESE, MODEL S424A-36 REESE, MODEL 797B-21 PEMKO, MODEL SFSC-200-36, TENANT FURNISHED MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULES A601 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 TYPICAL EXTERIOR DOOR TYPES DOOR TYPES FRAMES TYPES DOOR HARDWARE DOOR NOTES 1. EGRESS DOORS SHALL BE READILY OPENABLE FROM THE EGRESS SIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF A KEY OR SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR EFFORT. 2. LATCHES, HANDLES, PANIC BARS AND ALL DOOR HARDWARE WILL COMPLY WITH SECTION 7.2 OF NFPA 101 PER THE SPECIFICATIONS. 3. ALL DOORS TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN THE BUILDING IS OCCUPIED. 4. MAXIMUM EFFORT TO OPERATE EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR DOORS WITH CLOSERS SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 POUNDS. THIS MAY BE INCREASED TO 15 POUNDS FOR FIRE-RATED DOORS. 5. ALL FRAMES, DOORS AND HARDWARE TO BE FURNISHED BY HARDWARE SUPPLIER AND INSTALLED BY G.C. STOREFRONT DOORS ARE TO BE PROVIDED BY GC, STOREFRONT HARDWARE PROVIDED BY HARDWARE SUPPLIER, U.N.O. 6. THE BOTTOM 10 INCHES OF ALL DOORS SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH, UNINTERRUPTED SURFACE TO ALLOW THE DOOR TO BE OPENED BY A WHEELCHAIR FOOTREST WITHOUT CREATING A TRAP OR HAZARDOUS CONDITION. 7. ALL HARDWARE SHALL MATCH STOREFRONT, VERIFY WITH ARCHITECT AND/OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ORDERING. 8. GC TO VERIFY THE WALL THICKNESS PRIOR TO ORDERING DOOR FRAMES. DOOR CLOSER DOOR REMARKS 1 DOORS WITH REMARK #1 TO BE KEYED THE SAME 2 EXIT INDICATOR ARRIVES WITH SIGNS STATING "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN SPACE IS OCCUPIED". SIGN IS TO BE PLACED IN A VISIBLE LOCATION ABOVE THE DOORS. 3 THERE IS TO BE NO EXTERIOR HOLE OR CYLINDER 4 USE NON-SHRINK STRUCTURAL GROUT BED UNDER THRESHOLD 5 BLACK DOOR SWEEP TO BE USED WITH CHARCOAL, BLACK, OR BRONZE STOREFRONT. LIGHT GRAY DOOR SWEEP TO BE USED WITH CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 6 REAR KITCHEN DOOR AND FRAME TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH EXTERIOR WALL FINISH ON EXTERIOR, U.N.O. DOOR SCHEDULE TAG DOOR DESCRIPTION DOOR FRAME STILE HARDWARE SET FIRE RATING REMARKSWIDTH HEIGHT THICKNESS TYPE FINISH TYPE MATERIAL 1 DOUBLE STOREFRONT (WIDE STILE, WOOD PULL/PUSH) 6'-0" 7'-0" 0' - 1 3/4" A SEE ELEVATIONS STOREFRONT ALUM WIDE (5") 1 1,2,4,5 2 SINGLE STOREFRONT (WIDE STILE, WOOD PULL, PANIC) 2'-11" 7'-0" 0' - 1 3/4" A SEE ELEVATIONS STOREFRONT ALUM WIDE (5") 2C 1,3,4,5 3 HM REAR KITCHEN (STANDARD) 3'-6" 7'-0" 0' - 1 3/4" D D1/D2 (SEE ELEV) 2 H.M. - 3 - 1,4,6 1" INSULATED GLAZING WITH TEMPERED GLASS TOP DOOR RAIL 1" INSULATED GLAZING WITH TEMPERED GLASS CONTINUOUS WEATHER STRIPPING TYPICAL STOREFRONT SYSTEM DL O 2 " D O O R O P E N I N G 5 1 / 2 " 1/ 8 " 1 5 / 1 6 " 1" INSULATED GLAZING WITH TEMPERED GLASS BOTTOM DOOR RAIL DOOR SWEEP HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE METAL THRESHOLD FINISH FLOOR ANCHOR AS REQUIRED 10 " DO O R O P E N I N G FHOD 1" INSULATED GLAZING WITH TEMPERED GLASS TYPICAL STOREFRONT SYSTEM DOOR STILE CONTINUOUS WEATHERSTRIPPING 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS 5 1/2" 3/32" DOOR OPENING 2" DLO OD 2" D L O FH 5 / 8 " 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS TYPICAL STOREFRONT SYSTEM CONTINUOUS BACKER ROD AND SEALANT EACH SIDE SHIM AS REQUIRED ANCHOR AS REQUIRED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM SILL FLASHING BY STOREFRONT MANUFACTURER, FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT DO NOT SEAL WEEPS ALIGN EXTERIOR FACE FLUSH WITH FACE OF SLAB DL O 2 " D L O 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS TYPICAL STOREFRONT SYSTEM 2" D L O 1/ 4 " F H OD 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS TYPICAL STOREFRONT SYSTEM CONTINUOUS BACKER ROD AND SEALANT EACH SIDE SHIM AS REQUIRED ANCHOR AS REQUIRED 2" DLO 1/4" FW OD 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS TYPICAL STOREFRONT SYSTEM CONTINUOUS BACKER ROD AND SEALANT EACH SIDE SHIM AS REQUIRED JAMB ANCHOR CLIP DLO 2" DLO 1" INSULATED LOW-E GLASS TYPICAL STOREFRONT SYSTEM EQ V.I.F. EQ C V. I . F . T T T T T T EQ V.I.F. EQ EQ V.I.F. EQ V. I . F . B T EQ V.I.F. EQ T EQ V.I.F. EQ V. I . F . A TTT EQ V.I.F. EQ T 8'-8" 3' - 0 " 5' - 0 " TT T T T FULLY AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC PASS-THRU WINDOW CUSTOM CONFIGURATION W/ HEATED AIR CURTAIN, AND INTEGRATED RELAY TO SYNC AIR CURTAIN W/ WINDOW D T T T V.I.F. EQ EQ6'-0" V. I . F . 7' - 0 " 6" T T T EQ V.I.F. EQ T T 7' - 0 " V. I . F . 3'-0"V.I.F. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: HA R L A N R . F A U S T AR C H I T E C T Drawn: Checked:Project Manager: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. HA R L A N R . F A U S T , A R C H I T E C T 14 3 4 4 " Y " S T R E E T SU I T E N O . 2 0 4 OM A H A , N E 6 8 1 3 7 - 2 8 0 5 TE L : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 0 8 7 8 FA X : 4 0 2 . 8 9 5 . 9 5 6 1 ww w . f h a a r c h i t e c t s . c o m 080123 STOREFRONT DETAILS A602 01/25/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 BJF BJFBJF 01/25/2024 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT DOOR TRANSOM BAR8 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT THRESHOLD7 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT DOOR JAMB6 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT SILL1 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT HORIZONTAL MULLION2 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT HEAD3 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT JAMB4 6" = 1'-0"A602 TYPICAL STOREFRONT VERTICAL MULLION5 1. ALL WINDOW AND DOOR GLAZING IS TO BE CLEAR / INSULATED. 2. WINDOW AND DOOR GLAZING TO BE TEMPERED AT LOCATIONS INDICATED WITH "T". 3. STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM TO BE SUPPLIED BY G.C. G.C. TO VERIFY FRAMING OPENING SIZES AND MATERIALS WITH ARCHITECT AND/OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO FABRICATION. 4. ALL ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE FINISH TO MATCH STOREFRONT FINISH. VERIFY WITH ARCHITECT AND/OR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ORDERING HARDWARE. 5. STOREFRONT SYSTEM IS 2" X 4 1/2" CENTER SET, U.N.O. STOREFRONT & WINDOW FRAME TYPES GENERAL NOTES S 3 T/FTG = X'-X" 3 DRAWING LEGEND POST-TENSION DEAD END (PLAN) POST-TENSION STRESSING END (PLAN) POST-TENSION PROFILE (PLAN) (IN INCHES) DETAILS OR SECTION CUT IN PLAN VIEW (DETAIL NUMBER/SHEET NUMBER) TILT-UP/PRECAST CONCRETE WALL CONNECTION SYMBOL (REFER TO CONNECTION DETAIL) INDICATES CONCRETE COLUMN SYMBOL (REFER TO DIAPHRAGM INDICATES BEARING WALL BELOW INDICATES CONCRETE/TILT-UP CONCRETE WALL INDICATES MASONRY/CMU WALL INDICATES STEP IN FOOTING (REFER TO TYPICAL STEP IN FOOTING DETAIL) FOOTING SYMBOL (REFER TO SPREAD FOOTING SCHEDULE) SHEAR WALL SYMBOL (REFER TO SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE) REVISION TRIANGLE TILT-UP/PRECAST CONCRETE WALL PANEL NUMBER (REFER TO TILT-UP/ PRECAST CONCRETE WALL ELEVATIONS) CMU WALL REINFORCING SYMBOL (REFER TO CMU WALL REINFORCING SCHEDULE) ROOF/FLOOR DIAPHRAGM NAILING ELEVATION SYMBOL (T/ REFERS TO COMPONENT THAT THE ELEVATION REFERENCES) STUD BUBBLE (INDICATES NUMBER OF STUDS REQUIRED IF EXCEEDS NUMBER SPECIFIED IN PLAN NOTE) DETAILS OR SECTION CUT (DETAIL NUMBER/SHEET NUMBER) INDICATES LOCATION OF CONCRETE WALLS, SHEAR WALLS OR BRACED FRAME ELEVATIONS STRUCTURAL EXTENT SYMBOL SINGLE ARROW - END OF EXTENT DOUBLE ARROW - CONTINUOUS EXTENT ALONG THE ELEMENT LINE UNTIL THE ELEMENT IS INTERRUPTED INDICATES WIDE FLANGE COLUMN INDICATES BUNDLED STUDS CONTINUITY PLATE LENGTH (REFER TO TYPICAL DETAIL) MARK NAILING SCHEDULE) MARKDESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION INDICATES DIRECTION OF DECK SPAN INDICATES MOMENT FRAME CONNECTION INTERMEDIATE STRESSING (PLAN) INDICATES NUMBER OF STUD RAIL REQUIRED AT COLUMN (REFER TO STUD RAIL DETAILS) STEEL/CONCRETE COLUMN SYMBOL (REFER TO STEEL COLUMN SCHEDULE) INDICATES EXISTING WALL INDICATES DRAG CONNECTION INDICATES HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION (HSS) COLUMN OR TUBE STEEL (TS) COLUMN INDICATES HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION (HSS) COLUMN OR STEEL PIPE COLUMN INDICATES DOUBLE SHEAR CONNECTION (REFER TO THE DOUBLE SHEAR PLATE CONNECTIONS DETAIL) PILE CAP SYMBOL (REFER TO PILE CAP SCHEDULE) INDICATES PRECAST CONCRETE COLUMN F2.0 INDICATES WOOD POST 1P 0 RFI 00 INDICATES CANTILEVER CONNECTION 00 S0.0 1 1 8" DS SR__ 1 1 C1 XX"xXX" X SX.X XX/SXX.XX INDICATES REINFORCING TYPE (REFER TO THE REINFORCING SCHEDULE) 00TB ABBREVIATIONS INDICATES WOOD OR STEEL STUD SHEAR WALL LINE AND HOLD-DOWNS PER KEY ON SHEET INDICATES WOOD OR STEEL STUD BEARING WALL LINE PER KEY ON SHEET THRU Through W Wide THKND Thickened TYP Typical T&G Tongue & Groove TRANSV Transverse W/O Without W/ With WWF Welded Wire Fabric WP Working Point WHS Welded Headed Stud ± Plus or Minus UNO Unless Noted Otherwise VERT Vertical TDS Tie Down System TCX Top Chord Extension GEOTECH Geotechnical L Angle BMU Brick Masonry Unit TC AX LD Top Chord Axial Load DB Drop Beam C'SINK Countersink EXP JT Expansion Joint FDN Foundation FD Floor Drain EXT Exterior (E) Existing EXP Expansion EW Each Way EQUIP Equipment EQ Equal FIN Finish ELEV Elevator ELEC Electrical EL Elevation EF Each Face EA Each DWG Drawing DP Depth/Deep DO Ditto DN Down DL Dead Load DIAG Diagonal DF Douglas Fir DEV Development DBL Double DIA Diameter NIC Not In Contract OPP Opposite OPNG Opening OF Outside Face OD Outside Diameter OC On Center NTS Not To Scale OWSJ Open Web Steel Joist OWWJ Open Web Wood Joist PL Plate LONGIT Longitudinal LLV Long Leg Vertical LLH Long Leg Horizontal LL Live Load LF Lineal Foot LSL Laminated Strand Lumber LVL Laminated Veneer Lumber MAS Masonry MISC Miscellaneous MIN Minimum MFR Manufacturer MEZZ Mezzanine MECH Mechanical MAX Maximum CMU Concrete Masonry Unit CJ Construction or Control Joint CJP Complete Joint Penetration CONT Continuous CONST Construction CONN Connection CONC Concrete COL Column CLR Clear CL or Centerline CIP Cast in Place C Camber B or BOT Bottom BLKG Blocking BLDG Building BRG Bearing B/ Bottom Of ARCH Architectural ALT Alternate ADDL Additional AB Anchor Bolt k Kips INT Interior IF Inside Face IE Invert Elevation ID Inside Diameter HORIZ Horizontal HD Hold-down HGR Hanger HF Hem-Fir HDR Header GWB Gypsum Wall Board HP High Point GL Glue Laminated Timber GALV Galvanized GA Gage FTG Footing F/ Face of SPEC Specification STRUCT Structural STIFF Stiffener STD Standard SST Stainless Steel SF Square Foot SYM Symmetrical T&B Top & Bottom SWWJ Solid Web Wood Joist T/ Top Of SQ Square STL Steel PSI Pounds Per Square Inch PSL Parallel Strand Lumber SCHED Schedule RET Retaining REQD Required REINF Reinforcing RD Roof Drain PT Pressure Treated P-T Post-Tensioned SHTHG Sheathing SIM Similar REF Refer/Reference R Radius PSF Pounds per Square Foot PLWD Plywood PJP Partial Joint Penetration HSS = TS (Hollow Structural Section) FLR Floor PAF Powder Actuated Fastener BP Baseplate DBA Deformed Bar Anchor DIST Distributed EMBED Embedment FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic KSF Kips Per Square Foot LP Low Point PERP Perpendicular SOG Slab on Grade SR Studrail CTRD Centered IBC International Building Code CB Castellated Beam URM Unreinforced Masonry Unit PC Precast SMF Special Moment Frame STAGG Stagger/Staggered PREFAB Prefabricated T Top BTWN Between THRD Threaded SCBF Special Concentric Braced Frame BRBF Buckling Restrained Braced Frame OCBF Ordinary Concentric Braced Frame DEMO Demolish CLG Ceiling ADH Adhesive CLT Cross-Laminated Timber NLT Nail-Laminated Timber FRT Fire Retardant Treated SP Southern Pine SFRS Seismic Force- Resisting System C'BORE Counterbore LLBB Long Leg Back-to-Back SLBB Short Leg Back-to-Back SER Structural Engineer of Record CL 2W4 SB Site-Built FB Factory-Built OR INDICATES A LEDGER ©Copyright D'Amato Conversano Inc. All Rights Reserved This document, and the ideas and designs may not be reused, in whole or in part, without written permission from D'Amato Conversano Inc. D'Amato Conversano Inc. disclaims any responsibility for its unauthorized use. www.dci-engineers.com CIVIL / STRUCTURAL ® 341 W Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, Alaska 99503 P: (907) 519-7600 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # 01.2024 DCI Project No. 23101-0192 COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 1/ 2 4 / 2 0 2 4 1 0 : 0 6 : 0 1 A M C : \ _ l o c a l r e v i t \ S t r u c t - 2 3 1 0 1 - 0 1 92 - R 2 1 _ j s i z e m o r e @ d c i - e n g i n e e r s . c o m . r v t 080123 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS S001 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL JSS JJRJJR RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 1 STRUCTURAL - GENERAL NOTES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING CODE: The design and construction of this project is governed by the "International Building Code (IBC)", 2018 Edition, hereafter referred to as the IBC, as adopted and modified by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). REFERENCE STANDARDS: Refer to Chapter 35 of 2018 IBC. Where other Standards are noted in the drawings, use the latest edition of the standard unless a specific date is indicated. Reference to a specific section in a code does not relieve the contractor from compliance with the entire standard. OTHER DRAWINGS: Refer to the architectural, mechanical, electrical, civil and plumbing drawings for additional information including but not limited to dimensions, elevations, slopes, door and window openings, non-bearing walls, stairs, finishes, drains, waterproofing, railings, curbs, depressions, mechanical unit locations, and other nonstructural items. STRUCTURAL DETAILS:The structural drawings are intended to show the general character and extent of the project and are not intended to show all details of the work. Use entire detail sheets and specific details referenced in the plans as “typical” wherever they apply. Similarly, use details on entire sheets with “typical” in the name wherever they apply. STRUCTURAL RESPONSIBILITIES: The structural engineer (SER) is responsible for the strength and stability of the primary structure in its completed form. COORDINATION:The Contractor is responsible for coordinating details and accuracy of the work; for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; for selecting fabrication processes; for techniques of assembly; and for performing work in a safe and secure manner. MEANS, METHODS and SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: The contractor is responsible for the means and methods of construction and all job-related safety standards such as OSHA and DOSH (Department of Occupational Safety and Health). The contractor is responsible for means and methods of construction related to the intermediate structural conditions (i.e., movement of the structure due to moisture and thermal effects; construction sequence; temporary bracing, etc.). TEMPORARY SHORING, BRACING: The contractor is responsible for the strength and stability of the structure during construction and shall provide temporary shoring, bracing and other elements required to maintain stability until the structure is complete. It is the contractor's responsibility to be familiar with the work required in the construction documents and the requirements for executing it properly. CONSTRUCTION LOADS: Loads on the structure during construction shall not exceed the design loads as noted in DESIGN CRITERIA & LOADS below or the capacity of partially completed construction as determined by the Contractor’s SSE for Bracing/Shoring. NOTE PRIORITIES: Plan and detail notes and specific loading data provided on individual plans and detail drawings supplements information in the Structural General Notes. DISCREPANCIES:In case of discrepancies between the General Notes, Specifications, Plans/Details or Reference Standards, the Architect/Engineer shall determine which shall govern. Discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the work. Should any discrepancy be found in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be deemed to have included in the price the most expensive way of completing the work, unless prior to the submission of the price, the Contractor asks for a decision from the Architect as to which shall govern. Accordingly, any conflict in or between the Contract Documents shall not be a basis for adjustment in the Contract Price. ADJACENT UTILITIES: The contractor shall determine the location of all adjacent underground utilities prior to earthwork, foundations, shoring, and excavation. Any utility information shown on the drawings and details is approximate and not necessarily complete. DESIGN CRITERIA AND LOADS OCCUPANCY:Risk Category of Building per IBC Table 1604.5 =II WIND DESIGN:MAIN WIND FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM Ultimate Design Wind Speed, VULT (MPH) 105 Exposure Category C Internal Pressure Coefficient Cpi =+/- 0.18 Topographic Factor Kzt =1.0 SEISMIC Seismic Design Category: SDC = C DESIGN:Basic Structural System Bearing Wall Seismic Force Resisting System Light Frame Shear Walls with wood Structural Panels Response Modification Factor: R = 6.5 System Over Strength Factor Omega = 3 Deflection Amplification Factor Cd = 4 Site Classification per IBC 1613.3.2 & ASCE 7-16, Ch. 20 Site Class = D Seismic Importance Factor per ASCE 7-16 Table 1.5-2 Ie = 1.0 Spectral Response Acceleration (Short Period) Ss = 0.364 g Spectral Response Acceleration (1-Second Period) S1 = 0.142 g Spectral Design Response Coefficient (Short Period) SDS = 0.315 g Spectral Design Response Coefficient (1-Second Period) SDI = 0.142 g SNOW LOAD:Flat Roof Snow Load, (PSF) p f = 35 Snow Load Importance Factor I s = 1.0 Ground Snow Load, (PSF) p g = 50 Snow Exposure Factor C e = B Thermal Factor C t = 1.0 See Roof Plan for Drift Loading DESIGN LIVE LOADS AREA LIVE LOADS (PSF) UNO Dining Rooms & Restaurants 100 Roofs 20 PSF or 300 LB DESIGN DEAD LOADS BIDDER DESIGN DEAD LOADS (PSF) UNO REMARKS & FOOTNOTES Roof Dead Load, Total Top Chord Bottom Chord 20 PSF 10 PSF 10 PSF For Prefabricated Wood Truss design, SUBMITTALS SUBMIT FOR REVIEW:SUBMITTALS of shop drawings are required for items noted in the individual materials sections and for bidder designed elements. SUBMITTAL REVIEW PERIOD:Submittals shall be made in time to provide a minimum of TWO WEEKS or 10 WORKING DAYS for review by the Architect/Engineer prior to the onset of fabrication. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S PRIOR REVIEW:Prior to submission to the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall review the submittal for completeness. Dimensions and quantities are not reviewed by the SER, and therefore, must be verified by the General Contractor. Contractor shall provide any necessary dimensional details requested by the Detailer and provide the Contractor’s review stamp and signature before forwarding to the Architect/Engineer. SHOP DRAWING REVIEW: Once the contractor has completed their review, the SER will review the submittal for general conformance with the design concept and the contract documents of the building and will stamp the submittal accordingly. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications, nor departures there from. The SER will return submittals in the form they are submitted in (either hard copy or electronic). For hard copy submittals, the contractor is responsible for submitting the required number of copies to the SER for review. SHOP DRAWING DEVIATIONS: When shop drawings (component design drawings) differ from or add to the requirements of the structural drawings they shall be designed and stamped by the responsible SSE. DEFERRED SUBMITTALS BIDDER-DESIGNED ELEMENTS Submit “Bidder-Designed” deferred submittals to the Architect and SER for review. The deferred submittals shall also be submitted to the city for approval, if required by the city. Design of prefabricated, “bidder designed”, manufactured, pre-engineered, or other fabricated products shall comply with the following requirements: (1) Design considers tributary dead, live, wind and earthquake loads in combinations required by IBC. (2)Design within the Deflection Limits noted herein and as specified or referenced in the IBC. (3)Design shall conform to the specifications and reference standards of the governing code. (4)Submittal shall include: a. Calculations prepared, stamped and signed by the SSE demonstrating code conformance. b. Engineered component design drawings are prepared, stamped and signed by the SSE. c. Product data, technical information and manufacturer’s written requirements and Agency approvals as applicable. d. SSE may submit to the Architect/Engineer, a request to utilize relevant alternate design criteria of similar nature and generally equivalency which is recognized by the Code and acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Submit adequate documentation of design. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S PRIOR REVIEW: Once the contractor has completed their review of the SSE component drawings, the SER will review the submittal for general conformance with the design of the building and will stamp the submittal accordingly. Review of the Specialty Structural Engineer's (SSE) shop drawings (component design drawings) is for compliance with design criteria and compatibility with the design of the primary structure and does not relieve the SSE of responsibility for that design. All necessary bracing, ties, anchorage, proprietary products shall be furnished and installed per manufacturer’s instructions or the SSE’s design drawings and calculations. These elements include but are not limited to: (1)Prefabricated Wood Roof Trusses (2)Cantilever Steel Canopies INSPECTIONS, QUALITY ASSURANCE VERIFICATIONS AND TEST REQUIREMENTS INSPECTIONS: Foundations, footings, under slab systems and framing are subject to inspection by the Building Official in accordance with IBC 110.3. Contractor shall coordinate all required inspections with the Building Official. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, VERIFICATIONS and TESTS: Special Inspections, Verifications and Testing shall be done in accordance with IBC Chapter 17, the STATEMENT AND SCHEDULES OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS listed in these drawings. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION: Structural Observation for this project is not required per IBC Section 1704.6. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: Prior to issuance of the building permit, the Contractor is required to provide the Authority Having Jurisdiction a signed, written acknowledgement of the Contractor’s responsibilities associated with the above Statement of Special Inspections addressing the requirements listed in IBC Section 1704.4. Contractor is referred to IBC Sections 1705.12.5 and 1705.12.6 for architectural and MEP building systems that may be subject to additional inspections (based on the building’s designated Seismic Design Category listed in the CRITERIA), including anchorage of HVAC ductwork containing hazardous materials, piping systems and mechanical units containing flammable, combustible or highly toxic materials, electrical equipment used for emergency or standby power, exterior wall panels and suspended ceiling systems. SOILS AND FOUNDATION REFERENCE STANDARDS: Conform to IBC Chapter 18 "Soils and Foundations." GEOTECHNICAL REPORT: Recommendations contained in Geotechnical Study Geotechnical Soils Report Tamana Fields Lot 5, University Boulevard, Rexburg, Idaho (ERE Job No. 23135) by Eagle Rock Engineering and Land Surveying dated November 29, 2023 were used for design. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES: Contractor shall be responsible to review the Geotechnical Report and shall follow the recommendations specified therein including, but not limited to, subgrade preparations, pile installation procedures, ground water management and steep slope Best Management Practices.” GEOTECHNICAL SUBGRADE INSPECTION: The Geotechnical Engineer shall inspect all sub-grades and prepared soil bearing surfaces, prior to placement of foundation reinforcing steel and concrete. DESIGN SOIL VALUES: Safety Factor per Soils Report 1.5 Allowable Foundation Bearing Pressure 2000 PSF Coefficient of Sliding Friction 0.55 FOUNDATIONS and FOOTINGS: Foundations shall bear on compacted structural fill as per the geotechnical report. Exterior perimeter footings shall bear not less than 36 inches below finish grade, unless otherwise specified by the geotechnical engineer and/or the building official. FOOTING DEPTH: Tops of footings shall be as shown on plans with vertical changes as indicated with steps in the footings; locations of steps shown as approximate and shall be coordinated with the civil grading plans. SLABS-ON-GRADE: All slabs-on-grade shall bear on compacted structural fill or competent native soil per the geotechnical report. All moisture sensitive slabs-on-grade or those subject to receive moisture sensitive coatings/covering shall be provided with an appropriate capillary break and vapor barrier/retardant over the subgrade prepared and installed as noted in the geotechnical report, barrier manufacturer’s written recommendations and coordinated with the finishes specified by the Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE REFERENCE STANDARDS: Conform to: (1) ACI 301-20 “Specifications for Structural Concrete” (2) IBC Chapter 19 “Concrete” (3)ACI 318-19 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete” (4) ACI 117-10 “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials” FIELD REFERENCE: The contractor shall keep a copy of ACI Field Reference manual, SP-15, “Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete (ACI 301) with Selected ACI and ASTM References.” CONCRETE MIXTURES: Conform to ACI 301 Section 4 “Concrete Mixtures” and IBC Section 1904.1. MATERIALS: Conform to ACI 301 Section 4.2.1 “Materials” for requirements for cementitious materials, aggregates, mixing water and admixtures. SUBMITTALS: (1)Provide all submittals required by ACI 301 Section 4.1.2. Submit mix designs for each mix in the table below. Substantiating strength results from past tests shall not be older than 24 months per ACI 318 Section 26.4.3.1 (b). TABLE OF MIX DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Member Type/Location Strength f’c (psi) Test Age (days) Nominal Maximum Aggregate Exposure Class Max W/C Ratio Air Content Notes (1 to 10 Typical UNO) Footings and Foundation Walls 4000 28 1”F1 0.55 5%- Exterior Slabs on Grade & Sidewalks 5000 28 1”F3, W1 0.4 6% - Table of Mix Design Requirements Notes: (1)W/C Ratio: Water—cementitious material ratios shall be based on the total weight of cementitious materials. Maximum ratios are controlled by strength noted in the Table of Mix Design Requirements and durability requirements given in ACI 318 Section 19.3. W/C ratios may be exceeded with approval of SER as long as potential shrinkage impacts are accounted for. (2)Cementitious Materials: Cementitious materials shall conform to the relevant ASTM standards listed in ACI 318 Section 26.4.1.1.1(a). (3) General contractor shall coordinate means and methods necessary to support extended test ages including, but not limited to, delayed strength gain, shoring sequencing, modulus of elasticity requirements, deflection, and appearance. (4)Air Content: Conform to ACI 318 Section 19.3.3.1. Minimum standards for exposure class are noted in the table. If freezing and thawing class is not noted, air content given is that required by the SER. Tolerance is ±1-½%. Air content shall be measured at point of placement. (5)Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33. (6) Slump: Conform to ACI 301 Section 4.2.2.1. Slump shall be determined at point of placement. (7) Chloride Content: Conform to ACI 318 Table 19.3.2.1. (8) Non- chloride accelerator: Non-chloride accelerating admixture may be used in concrete placed at ambient temperatures below 50°F at the contractor’s option. (9) ACI 318, Section 19.3.1.1 exposure classes shall be assumed to be F0, S0, W0, and C0 unless different exposure classes are listed in the Table of Mix Design Requirements that modify these base requirements. FORMWORK & RESHORING: Conform to ACI 301 Section 2 “Formwork and Form Accessories.” Removal of Forms shall conform to Section 2.3.2 except strength indicated in Section 2.3.2.4 shall be 0.75 f’ c. MEASURING, MIXING, AND DELIVERY: Conform to ACI 301 Section 4.3. HANDLING, PLACING, CONSTRUCTING AND CURING: Conform to ACI 301 Section 5. In addition, hot weather concreting shall conform to ACI 305R-20 and cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306R-16. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Conform to ACI 301 Sections. 2.2.2.5 and 5.3.2.6. Construction joints shall be located and detailed as on the construction drawings. Submit alternate locations per ACI 301 Section 5.1.2.3(a) for review and approval by the SER two weeks minimum prior to forming. Use of an acceptable adhesive, surface retardant, portland cement grout or roughening the surface is not required unless specifically noted on the drawings. EMBEDDED ITEMS: Position and secure in place expansion joint material, anchors and other structural and non-structural embedded items before placing concrete. Contractor shall refer to mechanical, electrical, plumbing and architectural drawings and coordinate other embedded items. GROUT: Use 3000 psi non-shrink grout under column base plates. STRENGTH TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE: Testing: Obtain samples and conduct tests in accordance with ACI 301 Section 1.7.3.3. Additional samples may be required to obtain concrete strengths at alternate intervals than shown below and should be standard cured per ACI Section 26.5.3.2. (1)Cure 4 cylinders for 28-day test age. Test 1 cylinder at 7 days, test 2 cylinders at 28 days, and hold 1 cylinder in reserve for use as the Engineer directs. After 56 days, unless notified by the Engineer to the contrary, the reserve cylinder may be discarded without being tested for specimens meeting 28-day strength requirements. (2)The number of cylinders indicated above reference 6 by 12 in cylinders. If 4 by 8 in cylinders are to be used, additional cylinders must be cured for testing of 3 cylinders at test age per the table of mix design requirements. Acceptance. Strength is satisfactory when: (1) The averages of all sets of 3 consecutive tests equal or exceed the specified strength. (2) No individual test falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi. A “test” for acceptance is the average strength of two 6 by 12 in. cylinders or three 4 by 8 in. cylinders tested at the specified test age. CONCRETE PLACEMENT TOLERANCE: Conform to ACI 117-10 for concrete placement tolerance. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT REFERENCE STANDARDS: Conform to: (1) ACI 301-20 "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete", Section 3 "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports.” (2) ACI SP-66(04) "ACI Detailing Manual" (3) CRSI MSP-09, 28 th Edition, "Manual of Standard Practice.” (5) IBC Chapter 19-Concrete. (6) ACI 318-19 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.” (7) ACI 117-10 “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials” SUBMITTALS: (1) Conform to ACI 301 Section 3.1.2 "Submittals.” Submit placing drawings showing fabrication dimensions and placement locations of reinforcement and reinforcement supports. MATERIALS: Reinforcing Bars ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars. Smooth Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A1064 Bar Supports CRSI MSP-09, Chapter 3 "Bar Supports.” Tie Wire 16 gage or heavier, black annealed. FABRICATION: Conform to ACI 301, Section 3.2.2. “Fabrication”, and ACI SP-66 "ACI Detailing Manual.” WELDING: Bars shall not be welded. PLACING: Conform to ACI 301, Section 3.3.2 "Placing.” Placing tolerances shall conform to ACI 117. CONCRETE COVER: Conform to the following cover requirements unless noted otherwise in the drawings. Concrete cast against earth 3” Concrete exposed to earth or weather 2” SPLICES: Conform to ACI 301, Section 3.3.2.7, “Splices”. #5 bar shall be spliced 31”. #4 bar shall be spliced 28” minimum. FIELD BENDING: Conform to ACI 301 Section 3.3.2.8. "Field Bending or Straightening.” Bar sizes #3 through #5 may be field bent cold the first time. Subsequent bends and other bar sizes require preheating. Do not twist bars. Bars shall not be bent past 45 degrees. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS (INTO CONCRETE) REFERENCE STANDARDS: Conform to: (1) IBC Chapter 19 “Concrete” (2) ACI 318-19 “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete” POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS: Install only where specifically shown in the details or allowed by SER. All post-Installed anchors types and locations shall be approved by the SER and shall have a current ICC-Evaluation Service Report that provides relevant design values necessary to validate the available strength exceeds the required strength. Submit current manufacturer’s data and ICC ESR report to SER for approval regardless of whether or not it is a pre-approved anchor. Anchors shall be installed in strict accordance with ICC-ESR and the manufacturer’s printed installation instructions (MPII) in conjunction with edge distance, spacing and embedment depth as indicated on the drawings. The contractor shall arrange for a manufacturer’s field representative to provide installation training for all products to be used, prior to the commencement of work. Only trained installer shall perform post installed anchor installation. A record of training shall be kept on site and be made available to the SER as requested. Adhesive anchors installed in horizontally or upwardly inclined orientation shall be performed by a certified adhesive anchor installer (AAI) as certified through ACI/CRSI or approved equivalent. Proof of current certification shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to commencement of installation. No reinforcing bars shall be damaged during installation of post-installed anchors. Special inspection shall be per the TESTS and INSPECTIONS section. Anchor type, diameter and embedment shall be as indicated on drawings. STRUCTURAL STEEL REFERENCE STANDARDS: Conform to: (1) IBC Chapter 22 — “Steel” (2) ANSI/AISC 303-16 — “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings & Bridges” (3) AISC — “Manual of Steel Construction”, Fifteenth Edition (2016) (4) ANSI/AISC 360-16 — “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings” (5) AWS D1.1:2015 — “Structural Welding Code — Steel” SUBMITTALS: Submit the following documents to the SER for review: (1) SHOP DRAWINGS complying with AISC 360 Sections M1and N3 and AISC 303 Section 4. (2) ERECTION DRAWINGS complying AISC 360 Sections M1and N3 and AISC 303 Section 4. MATERIALS: Structural steel materials shall conform to materials and requirements listed in AISC 360 section A3 including, but not limited to: Angle (L) Shapes ASTM A36, Fy = 36 ksi Structural Plate (PL) ASTM A36, Fy = 36 ksi Hollow Structural Section — Square/Rect (HSS) ASTM A500, Grade C Fy = 50 ksi Heavy Hex Structural Bolts ASTM A307 Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A563, Grade and Finish per RCSC Table 2.1 Washers (Hardened Flat or Beveled) ASTM F436, Grade and Finish per RCSC Table 2.1 Anchor Rods (Anchor Bolts, typical)ASTM F1554, Gr. 36 Mild Threaded Rods ASTM A36, Fy = 36 ksi FABRICATION: (1) Conform to AISC 360 Section M2 “Fabrication” and AISC 303 Section 6 “Shop Fabrication”. (2) Quality Control (QC) shall conform to: a. AISC 360 Chapter N “Quality Control and Quality Assurance” and b. AISC 303 Section 8 “Quality Control”. c. Fabricator and Erector shall establish and maintain written Quality Control (QC) procedures per AISC 360 section N3. d. Fabricator shall perform self-inspections per AISC 360 section N5 to ensure that their work is performed in accordance with Code of Standard Practice, the AISC Specification, Contract Documents and the Applicable Building Code. e. QC inspections may be coordinated with Quality Assurance inspections per Section N5.3 where fabricators QA procedures provide the necessary basis for material control, inspection, and control of the workmanship expected by the Special Inspector. WELDING: (1) Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1 with Prequalified Welding Processes except as modified by AISC 360 section J2. Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 requirements. (2) Use 70ksi strength, low-hydrogen type electrodes (E7018) or E71T as appropriate for the process selected. (3) Welding of high strength anchor rods is prohibited unless approved by Engineer. (4) Welding of headed stud anchors shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 Chapter 7 “Stud Welding”. ERECTION: (1) Conform to AISC 360 Section M4 “Erection” and AISC 303 Section 7 “Erection”. (2) Conform to AISC 360 Chapter N “Quality Control and Quality Assurance” and AISC 303 Section 8. a. The Erector shall maintain detailed erection quality control procedures that ensure that the work is performed in accordance with these requirements and the Contract Documents. (3) Steel work shall be carried up true and plumb within the limits defined in AISC 303 Section 7.13. (4) The contractor shall provide temporary bracing and safety protection required by AISC 360 Section M4.2 and AISC 303 Section 7.10 and 7.11. ©Copyright D'Amato Conversano Inc. All Rights Reserved This document, and the ideas and designs may not be reused, in whole or in part, without written permission from D'Amato Conversano Inc. D'Amato Conversano Inc. disclaims any responsibility for its unauthorized use. www.dci-engineers.com CIVIL / STRUCTURAL ® 341 W Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, Alaska 99503 P: (907) 519-7600 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # 01.2024 DCI Project No. 23101-0192 COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 1/ 2 4 / 2 0 2 4 1 0 : 0 6 : 1 1 A M C : \ _ l o c a l r e v i t \ S t r u c t - 2 3 1 0 1 - 0 1 92 - R 2 1 _ j s i z e m o r e @ d c i - e n g i n e e r s . c o m . r v t 080123 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES CONTINUED S002 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL JSS JJRJJR RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 STRUCTURAL SHEET LIST SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE S001 STRUCTURAL - GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS S002 STRUCTURAL - GENERAL NOTES CONTINUED S101 STRUCTURAL - FOUNDATION AND LEVEL 1 STUD AND SHEAR WALL PLAN S102 STRUCTURAL - ROOF FRAMING PLAN S200 STRUCTURAL - FOUNDATION DETAILS S201 STRUCTURAL - STUD AND SHEAR WALL DETAILS S202 STRUCTURAL - WOOD FRAMING DETAILS Sheet Total: 7 1 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS The following Statement and Schedules of Inspections are those Special Inspections and Tests that shall be performed for this project. Special Inspectors shall reference these plans and IBC Chapter 17 for all special inspection requirements. The owner shall retain an “approved agency” per IBC 1703 to provide special inspections for this project. Special Inspectors shall be qualified persons per IBC 1704.2.1. Special inspection reports shall be provided on a weekly basis. Submit copies of all inspection reports to the Architect/Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction for review. In addition to special inspection reports and tests, submit reports and certificates noted in IBC 1704.5 to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Final special inspection reports will be required by each special inspection firm per IBC 1704.2.4. STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: This statement of Special Inspections has been written with the understanding that the Building Official will: -Review and approve the qualifications of the Special Inspectors -Monitor the special inspection activity on the project site to assure that Special Inspectors are qualified and performing their duty as state within this statement. -Review all Special Inspection Reports submitted to them by the Special Inspector -Perform inspections as required by IBC Section 110.3. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY:shall comply with IBC Section 1703. Inspections shall be in accordance with the requirements set forth in the approved ICC Evaluation Report and as indicated by the design requirements specified on the drawings. Refer to the POST INSTALLED ANCHORS section of these notes for anchors that are the basis of the design. Special inspector shall verify anchors are as specified in the POST INSTALLED ANCHORS section of these notes or as otherwise specified on the drawings. Substitutions require approv al by the SER and require substantiating calculations and current 2021 IBC recognized ICC Evaluation Services (ES) Report. Special Inspector shall document in their Special Inspection Report compliance with each of the elements required within the applicable ICC Evaluation Services (ES) Report. PREFABRICATED CONSTRUCTION: All prefabricated construction shall conform to IBC Section 1703. SCHEDULES OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: TABLE 1705.6 - REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS OF SOILS TYPE CONTINUOUS SPECIAL INSPECTION PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION 1.Verify materials below shallow foundations are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity -X 2.Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reach proper material - X 3.Perform classification and testing of compacted fill materials - X 4.During fill placement, verify use of proper materials and procedures in accordance with the provisions of the approved geotechnical report. Verify densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of compacted fill. X - 5.Prior to placement of compacted fill, inspect subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly - X TABLE 1705.3 - REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION TYPE CONTINUOUS SPECIAL INSPECTION PERIODIC SPECIAL INSPECTION REFERENCED STANDARD IBC REFERENCE 1.Inspection, reinforcement, and verify placement.- X ACI 318 Ch. 20, 25.2, 25.3, 26.6.1-26.6.3 - 2.Inspect anchors cast in concrete - X ACI 318: 17.8.2 - 3.Inspect anchors post- installed in hardened concrete members: a.Mechanical anchors and adhesive anchors not defined in 4.a - X ACI 318: 17.8.2 4.Verify use of required design mix - X ACI 318: Ch. 19, 26.4.3, 26.4.4 1904.1, 1904.2 5.Prior to concrete placement, fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete X - ASTM C172 ASTM C31 ACI 318: 26.5, 26.12 - 6.Inspect concrete for proper application techniques X -ACI 318: 26.5 - 7.Verify maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques - X ACI 318 :26.5.3 — 26.5.5 - 8.Inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of the concrete member being formed - X ACI 318: 26.11.1.2 (b)- MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECTIONS OF STRUCTURAL STEEL CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION TASKS QC QA REFERENCED STANDARD INSPECTION TASKS PRIOR TO WELDING Welder qualification records and continuity records P O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 Welding procedure specifications (WPSs) available P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 Manufacturing certifications for welding consumables available P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 Material identification (type/grade)O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 Welder Identification system O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 Fit-up of fillet welds Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root) Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) Tacking (tack weld quality and location) O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 Check welding equipment O - AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-1 INSPECTION TASKS DURING WELDING Use of qualified welders O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-2 Control and handling of welding consumables Packaging Exposure control O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-2 No welding over cracked tack welds O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-2 Environmental conditions Wind speed within limits Precipitation and temperature O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-2 WPS followed Settings on welding equipment Travel speed Selected welding materials Shielding gas type/flowrate Preheat applied Interpass temperature maintained (min/max) Proper position (F, V, H, OH) O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-2 Welding techniques Interpass and final cleaning Each pass within profile limitations Each pass meets quality requirements O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-2 INSPECTION TASKS AFTER WELDING Welds cleaned O O AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 Size, length, and locations of welds P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 Welds meet visual acceptance criteria Crack prohibition Weld/base-metal fusion Crater cross section Weld profiles Weld size Undercut Porosity P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 Arc strikes P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 Repair activities P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 Document acceptance or rejection of welded joint or member P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 No prohibited welds have been added without the approval of the EOR P P AISC 360 TABLE N5.4-3 PROTECTIVE COATING REQUIREMENTS: (1)SHOP PAINTING: Conform to AISC 360 Section M3 and AISC 303 Section 6.5 unless otherwise specified by the project specifications. (2)INTERIOR STEEL: a. Unless noted otherwise, do not paint any of the steel surfaces meeting the following conditions: i. Concealed by the interior building finishes, j. Welded; if area requires painting, do not paint until after weld inspections and non-destructive testing requirement, if any, are satisfied. b. Interior steel, exposed to view, shall be painted with one coat of shop primer unless otherwise indicated in the project specifications. Field touch-ups to match the finish coat or as otherwise indicated in the project specifications. (3) EXTERIOR STEEL: Exposed exterior steel shall be protected by either: a. Paint with an exterior multi-coat system as per the project specifications WOOD FRAMING REFERENCE STANDARDS: Conform to: (1) IBC Chapter 23 “WOOD” (2) ANSI/AWC NDS - 2018: "National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction - with 2018 NDS Supplement" (3) ANSI/AWC — SDPWS-2021: Special Design Provisions for Wind and Seismic (4) APA PDS - 20: "Panel Design Specification" (5) TPI 1-2014 “National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction” (6) BCSI B1 “Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining & Bracing of Trusses” (7) DSB-89 “Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses” (8) APA Report TT-045B “Minimum Nail Penetration for Wood Structural Panel Connections Subject to Lateral Loads” SUBMITTALS: (1) Submit shop drawings to the Architect/Engineer for review. Shop drawings shall include member size, spacing, camber, material type, grade, shop and field assembly details and connections, types and location of bolts and other fasteners. Supply shop drawings for the following: a. Glued laminated members DEFERRED SUBMITTALS: Submit product data and proof of ICC approval for framing members and fasteners that have been designed by others. Submit calculations prepared by the SSE in the state of [Washington]for all members and connections designed by others along with shop drawings. All necessary bridging, blocking, blocking panels and web stiffeners shall be detailed and furnished by the supplier. Temporary and permanent bridging shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Deflection limits shall be as noted under DEFFERRED SUBMITTLALS section specific details. Products included are: (1)Metal plate connected trusses (prefabricated trusses) Conform to IBC Section 2303.4. [HUD Truss Connector Bulletin for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses is required.] Truss Supplier to provide design and materials for all permanent truss bracing. Shop drawings shall provide for shapes, bearing points, intersections, hips, and valleys shown on the drawings. The manufacturer shall provide special hip, valley and intersection areas (step down trusses, jack trusses and girder trusses) unless specifically indicated on the plans. Provide all truss-to-truss and truss-to-support connection details and required connection materials. Specify temporary and permanent bracing and connections on the shop drawings. Provide all truss reactions on shop drawings. IDENTIFICATION: All sawn lumber and pre-manufactured wood products shall be identified by the grade mark or a certificate of inspection issued by the certifying agency. MATERIALS: (1) Sawn Lumber: Conform to grading rules of WWPA, WCLIB or NLGA and Table below. Finger jointed studs acceptable at interior walls only. TABLE of SOLID SAWN LUMBER Member Use Size Species Grade Wall Stud/ Top & Bottom Plates 2x4, 3x4, 2x6, 3x6 Doug Fir Larch No. 2 Sill Plate (at concrete) 2x4, 3x4, 2x6, 3x6 PT Doug Fir Larch No. 2 Post 4x4, 4x6, 4x8 Doug Fir Larch No. 2 Floor or Roof Joist 2x6 through 2x12 Doug Fir Larch No. 2 Post or Timber 6x6, 8x8 Doug-Fir Larch No. 1 (2)Glued Laminated Timber: Conform to ANSI 117-2020 “Standard Specifications for Structural Glued laminated Timber of Softwood Species, Manufacturing and Design” and ANSI A190.1 “Structural Glued Laminated Timber.” Camber all glued laminated beams, except cantilevered and continuous beams, to 3000’ radius, unless shown otherwise on the plans. Fabricate cantilevered and continuous beams flat, unless shown otherwise on plans. TABLE of GLULAM and GRADE Member Sizes Species Comb. Symbol Uses Beams All DF/DF 24F—V4 Simple Spans (3)Wood Structural Sheathing (Plywood): OSB is not allowed. Conform to “Structural Plywood” based on Product Standard PS 1-19 by the U.S. Dept. of Commerce, and “Performance Standard for Wood Structural Panels” based on Product Standard PS 2-18 by the U.S. Dept. of Commerce and “Panel Design Specification” based on APA D510 by the Engineered Wood Association. Unless noted otherwise, sheathing shall comply with the following table: TABLE of SHEATHING - Use, Minimum Thickness and Minimum APA Rating Location Thickness Span Rating Plywood Grade Exposure Walls 15/32” 32/16 C-D 1 Roof 19/32” 40/20 C-D 1 Unless noted otherwise on drawings, install roof and floor panels with long dimension across supports and with panel continuous over two or more spans. End joints shall occur over supports. (1)Timber Connectors: Shall be “Strong Tie” by Simpson Company as specified in their latest catalog. Alternate connectors by other manufacturers may be substituted provided they have current ICC approval for equivalent or greater load capacities and are reviewed and approved by the SER prior to ordering. Connectors shall be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions. Where connector straps connect two members, place one-half of the nails or bolts in each member. Where connectors are in exposed exterior applications in contact with preservative treated wood (PT) other than CCA, connectors shall be either batch hot-dipped galvanized (HDG), mechanically galvanized (ASTM B695, Class 55 minimum) stainless steel, or provided with 1.85 oz/sf of zinc galvanizing equal to or better than Simpson ZMAX finish. Where straps are used as hold-downs, nail straps to wood framing just prior to drywall application, as late as possible in the framing process to allow the wood to shrink and the building to settle. Premature nailing of the strap may lead to strap buckling and potential finish damage. Fasteners (nails, bolts, screws, etc) attaching timber connectors (joist hangers, post caps and bases, etc) to PT wood shall have similar corrosion resistance properties (matching protective treatments) as the protected connector. Fasteners (nails, bolts, screws, etc) attaching sawn timber members or sheathing (shear walls) to PT wood shall be corrosion resistant; nails and lag bolts shall be either HDG (ASTM A153) or stainless steel. Verify the suitability of the fastener protection/coating with the wood treatment chemical manufacturer/supplier. Provide washers under the heads and nuts of all bolts and lag screws bearing on wood. (1) Lag Screws/Bolts: Conform to ASTM A307 and NDS Chapter 12. Lag screw installation shall conform to NDS Section 12.1.4, including required drilled lead and/or clearance holes. (2) Nails and Staples: Conform to ASTM F1667 and IBC Sections 2303.6 and 2304.10. NAILING REQUIREMENTS: Conform to IBC Section 2304.10 “Connectors and fasteners.” Unless noted on plans, nail per Table 2304.10.2. Nailing for roof/floor diaphragms/shear walls shall be per drawings. Nails shall be driven flush and shall not fracture the surface of sheathing. Alternate nails may be used but are subject to review and approval by the Structural Engineer. Substitution of staples for the nailing of rated sheathing is subject to review by the structural engineer prior to construction. STANDARD LIGHT-FRAME CONSTRUCTION: Unless noted on the plans, construction shall conform to IBC Section 2308 “Conventional Light-Frame Construction.” NAILERS ON STEEL COLUMNS and BEAMS: Wood 3x nailers are generally required on all HSS columns and steel beams abutting or embedded within wood framing. Unless noted otherwise, attach with 5/8” diameter bolts or welded studs at 16” on centers. Unless noted otherwise, wood nailers on beams supporting joist hangers shall not overhang the beam flange by more than ¼”. WOOD SHRINKAGE AND EXPANSION: Wood materials will expand, or contract based on relative changes in moisture. The contractor is responsible for means and methods of construction related to mitigating and managing the effects of changes in moisture. MOISTURE CONTENT: The contractor shall make provisions during handling and construction to prevent the structural wood members from exceeding the appropriate moisture content limits. The moisture content for solid sawn wood material used for this project shall not exceed 19%. The moisture content for engineered wood products, laminated lumber and sheathing shall not exceed the limits required by the manufacturer or 12%, whichever is less. The moisture content limits may be more stringent for particular product requirements (e.g., finishes, cladding, insulation systems, etc.). The contractor shall refer to the Architect’s drawings, project specifications, or installer/product requirements for additional requirements. PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT (PT): Wood materials that are required to be “treated wood” in accordance with IBC Section 2304.12. “Protection Against Decay and Termite” shall conform to the appropriate standards of the American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) for sawn lumber, glued laminated timber, round poles, wood piles and marine piles. Follow American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) quality assurance procedures. Products shall bear the appropriate mark. Fasteners or anchors in treated wood shall be of stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized or as per IBC 2304.10.6. Mud sill plates in normally dry interior applications may be treated with Sodium Borate (DOT - Disodium Octaborate Tetrahydrate) as recent studies have noted less connector corrosion potential than other available wood treatments or the original CCA treated sill plates. Wood treated with Sodium Borate shall be protected during shipment, storage and installation to minimize leaching of the water-soluble preservative from the lumber. Sodium borate pressure treated plates do not require hot- dipped galvanized connectors. If using preservative treatments other than CCA or sodium borate, fasteners must be hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel. Wood treated with Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ) requires steel components in contact with the wood to be stainless (nails, bolts, screws, washers & lag screws). Fasteners (nails, bolts, screws, washers & lag screws) attaching timber connectors (joist hangers, post caps and bases, etc) to PT wood shall have similar corrosion resistance properties (matching protective treatments) as the protected connector; that is, use hot dipped galvanized or stainless-steel fasteners. Fasteners (nails, bolts, screws, washers & lag screws) attaching sawn timber members or sheathing (shear walls) to Pressure Treated wood shall be corrosion resistant (hot dipped galvanized or stainless steel). Always verify the suitability of the fastener protection/coating with the wood treatment chemical manufacturer/supplier. TYPICAL EXTERIOR WALL: UNO IN SHEAR WALL SCHED 2x6 DF NO.2 STUDS & PLATES @ 16"OC 2x6 DF NO.2 STUDS & PLATES @ 16"OC S200 6 S200 6 S200 6 S200 8 S200 8 HSS5x5x5/16 , B/BASE PL = 0'-9" HSS5x5x5/16 PER 9/S200 W/ HAIRPINS , B/BASE PL = 0'-9" HSS5x5x5/16 PER 9/S200, B/BASE PL = -0'-3" 6x6 POST W/ ABU66Z W/ 5/8"Øx4" MIN EMBED TITEN HD 6x6 POST W/ ABU66Z W/ 5/8"Øx4" MIN EMBED TITEN HD 6x6 POST W/ ABU66Z W/ 5/8"Øx4" MIN EMBED TITEN HD 6x6 POST W/ ABU66Z W/ 5/8"Øx4" MIN EMBED TITEN HD 6x6 POST W/ ABU66Z W/ 5/8"Øx4" MIN EMBED TITEN HD 6x6 POST W/ ABU66Z W/ 5/8"Øx4" MIN EMBED TITEN HD 1'-8"Wx12"DP CONT FTG W/ (2) #5B CONT , TYP AT PERIMETER UNO 6" CONC FDN WALL W/ #4 @ 16"OC VERT & HORIZ CTRD, TYP AT PERIMETER UNO W6 W6 W6 2W4 HSS5x5x5/16 PER 9/S200, B/BASE PL = -0'-3" HDU2 (2) 2x6 HDU2 (2) 2x6 HDU11 6x6 2 2x6 6" CONC FDN WALL W/ #4 @ 16"OC VERT & HORIZ CTRD 2'-6"Wx12"DP CONT FTG W/ (3) #5T&B CONT S201 10 S201 9 4" CONC SLAB W/ #4 @ 18"OC EW CTRD PER PLAN NOTES 43 ' - 1 0 " 11 ' - 4 " 11 ' - 4 " 66 ' - 5 1 / 2 " 33'-8 1/2" 66 ' - 5 1 / 2 " 66 ' - 5 1 / 2 " 10 ' - 0 1 / 2 " 10 ' - 0 1 / 2 " 10 ' - 3 " 1'-0" 6'-0" 7' - 8 " 5' - 9 " 11'-4" 11'-1 1/2" 11'-3 1/2" 5'-1"9'-5 1/2" (2) 2x6 AT GIRDER TRUSS (2) 2x6 AT GIRDER TRUSS HD U 2 HDU5 HDU5 26 ' -5" SLAB ON GRADE PER TENANT IMPROVEMENT SCOPE OF WORK 2'-0" 43 ' -9" BLOCKOUT FOR DRAIN PIPES PER 3/S200 27'-4" 14'-3" S201 9 4" CONC SLAB W/ #4 @ 18"OC EW CTRD PER PLAN NOTES S201 9 4" CONC SLAB W/ #4 @ 18"OC EW CTRD PER PLAN NOTES 6'-0" 1'-1 1/2" 5' - 9 1 / 4 " 2 HD (2) 2x 1. STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES, DESIGN CRITERIA, ABBREVIATIONS AND LEGEND PER S001 AND S002. 2. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE AND VERIFY THE FOLLOWING WITH OTHERS PRIOR TO POURING CONCRETE: ALL DOOR OPENINGS IN FOUNDATION WALLS; DRAINS AND SLOPES; BLOCKOUTS FOR COOLERS, PLUMBING, SPRINKLERS AND HVAC. ALL DUCTS, CHASES AND PIPES PER MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL AND SPRINKLER DRAWINGS. STAIR DETAILS AND GUARDRAILS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. CONCRETE CURBS AND LOCATIONS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 4. TYPICAL TOP OF EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR FOOTING ELEVATIONS = -2'-0", UNO. 5. ALL FOOTINGS AND SLABS TO BEAR ON NATIVE SOILS OR COMPACTED FILL PER GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS. FOUNDATION WALLS TO BE DAMPPROOFED PER GEOTECH REPORT. 6. TOP OF SLAB (T/SLAB) ELEVATION ASSUMED 0'-0". FOR ACTUAL T/SLAB ELEVATION REFER TO CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. PROVIDE FREE-DRAINING GRANULAR FILL PER GEOTECH REPORT. 7. TYPICAL DETAILS PER: 1/S200 TYPICAL PIPE AND TRENCH LOCATION AT CONCRETE FOOTING /STEM WALL FOUNDATION PLAN NOTES: 1. ALL INTERIOR NON-BEARING, NON-STRUCTURAL WALL STUD REQUIREMENTS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. 2. HEADERS SHOWN ON FRAMING PLAN SHALL BE SUPPORTED BY (1) TRIMMER AND (1) KING STUD MINIMUM, UNO. WHERE MORE THAN (1) TRIMMER IS REQUIRED, THE NUMBER OF TRIMMER STUDS SHALL BE NOTED THUS: . TRIMMERS TO BE CONTINUOUS TO THE FOUNDATION. 3. SHEAR WALL AND NAILING REQUIREMENTS PER SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE 3/S201. 4. INDICATES HOLD-DOWN TYPE PER HOLD-DOWN SCHEDULE 7/S201. 5. ANCHOR BOLTS TO BE 5/8" DIA x 7" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT PER 11/S200. PROVIDE HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLTS AT PRESSURE-TREATED SILL PLATES. 6. TYPICAL DETAILS PER: 10/S200 TYPICAL NAILER TO STEEL COLUMN 12/S200 TYPICAL HOLDOWN AT CONCRETE FOUNDATION WALL 5/S201 TYPICAL HOLES AND NOTCHES IN WOOD STUDS 6/S201 TYPICAL TOP PLATE SPLICE DETAIL 11/S201 TYPICAL STUD WALL OPENING (HEADER) DETAIL 12/S201 TYPICAL SHEAR WALL ELEVATION STUD AND SHEAR WALL NOTES: N ©Copyright D'Amato Conversano Inc. All Rights Reserved This document, and the ideas and designs may not be reused, in whole or in part, without written permission from D'Amato Conversano Inc. D'Amato Conversano Inc. disclaims any responsibility for its unauthorized use. www.dci-engineers.com CIVIL / STRUCTURAL ® 341 W Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, Alaska 99503 P: (907) 519-7600 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # 01.2024 DCI Project No. 23101-0192 COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 1/ 2 4 / 2 0 2 4 1 0 : 0 6 : 1 9 A M C : \ _ l o c a l r e v i t \ S t r u c t - 2 3 1 0 1 - 0 1 92 - R 2 1 _ j s i z e m o r e @ d c i - e n g i n e e r s . c o m . r v t 080123 STRUCTURAL FOUNDATION AND LEVEL 1 STUD AND SHEAR WALL PLAN S101 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL JSS JJRJJR FOUNDATION AND LEVEL 1 STUD AND SHEAR WALL PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 CANTILEVER CANOPY BY DESIGN BY SSE PREFAB TRUSSES BY OTHERS @ 24"OC (24" DEPTH AT LOW END, FLAT BOT CHORD, SLOPED TOP CHORD PER ARCH), PROVIDE DOUBLE TRUSS AND SPACE TRUSSES AT 32"OC AT DUCT DROPS AT EF-1 AND RTU'S COORDINATE W/ MECH, PROVIDE 2x FRAMING BTWN TRUSSES @ 24"OC AT 32" TRUSS SPACING MAU [800LBS] EF [400LBS] RTU [1500LBS] RTU [1500LBS] EF [100LBS] CU [100LBS] 37 PSF S202 7 S202 10 S202 4 S202 8 S202 4 S201 8 TYP UNO S202 12 S202 12 GIRDER TRUSS PREFAB TRUSSES BY OTHERS @ 24"OC ALIGN DRAG TRUSS OVER SHEAR WALL [SHEAR TRANSFER LOAD = 373 PLF ASD] CMSTC16 STRAP PER 4/S202 & PLAN NOTE 6 CMSTC16 COIL STRAP PER 4/S202 & PLAN NOTE 6 GIRDER TRUSS PREFAB TRUSSES BY OTHERS @ 24"OC S201 8 S202 2 PREFAB TRUSSES BY OTHERS @ 24"OC (FLAT BOT CHORD, SLOPED TOP CHORD PER ARCH) PREFAB TRUSSES BY OTHERS @ 24"OC (24" DEPTH AT LOW END, FLAT BOT CHORD, SLOPED TOP CHORD PER ARCH) HS S 5 x 5 x 3 / 8 (( 3 ) 2 x 8 A T W I N D O W ) 37 PSF 7'-3" GL 5 1 / 8 x 1 0 1 / 2 (H S S 5 x 5 x 3 / 8 A T C A N O P Y ) GL 5 1 / 8 x 1 0 1 / 2 GL 5 1 / 8 x 1 0 1 / 2 GL 5 1 / 8 x 1 0 1 / 2 (2) 2x8 HDR GL3 1/8x10 1/2 GL 5 1 / 8 x 1 0 1 / 2 GL3 1/8x10 1/2 GL3 1/8x10 1/2 PARAPET WALL ABOVE PER DETAILS, TYP MAX 3'-6" 19/32" APA RATED PLWD SHTHG (FACE GRAIN PERP TO ROOF FRAMING, NAIL W/ 10d @ 6"OC EDGE, 12"OC IN FIELD), TYP PER PLAN NOTE 4 S202 8 TYP S202 9 342 PLF ASD WIND VERT REACTION TO TRUSS TOP CHORD FROM PARAPET BRACES PER 12/S202 S202 6 S202 6 TYP UNO S202 5 HD [1150LBS] CU [250LBS] CU [100LBS] 4' - 1 1 / 2 " 3' - 6 " 52 PSF 4 PSF SEE NOTE 8 7'-3" CANTILEVER CANOPY DESIGN BY SSE S202 10 4 PSF SEE NOTE 8 52 PSF MAX 3'-6" S202 5 52 P S F 10 ' - 0 " 52 P S F 10 ' - 0 " 1. STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES, DESIGN CRITERIA, ABBREVIATIONS AND LEGEND PER S001 AND S002. 2. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 3. ALL DUCTS, CHASES AND PIPES SHALL BE PER MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL AND SPRINKLER DRAWINGS. 4. ROOF SHEATHING PER PLAN AND STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. SHEATHING TO BE NAILED TO ROOF FRAMING WITH 0.148"Øx2 1/2" NAILS @ 6"OC AT ALL PANEL EDGES AND @ 12"OC FIELD, UNO. LAY SHEATHING WITH FACE GRAIN (LONG DIRECTION) PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS AND STAGGER PANEL END JOINTS. ALLOW 1/8" SPACE BETWEEN PANEL ENDS AND EDGES AT ALL PANEL EDGES. 5. HEADERS SHOWN BUT NOT SPECIFIED ARE TO BE (3) 2x8 MINIMUM. HEADER SUPPORTS PER STUD AND SHEAR WALL PLAN ON FLOOR BELOW. 6. HORIZONTAL STRAP TIES INDICATED ON THE FRAMING PLAN ARE TO BE CENTERED OVER WALL TOP PLATE AND/OR HEADER, BLOCKING OR BEAM. NAIL STRAP CMSTC16 WITH (33) 0.148"Øx3", (2) @ 3"OC EACH END AND 0.148"Øx3" NAILS @ 3"OC INTERMEDIATE. SPLICE REQUIREMENTS PER STRAP MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATIONS. 7. ROOF TRUSSES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA: • TRUSS LAYOUT SHOWN IS APPROXIMATE. TRUSS SUPPLIER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FINAL TRUSS LAYOUT AND CONFIGURATION. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF REVISIONS TO PLAN. • STANDARD DEAD AND LIVE LOADS AND SUBMITTAL INFORMATION PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. • ROOF TRUSSES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR ADDITIONAL LOADS FROM MECHANICAL UNITS. • ROOF TRUSSES SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR PARAPET WIND LOAD. • PROVIDE SIMPSON H2.5A HURRICANE TIES AT ALL ROOF TRUSSES AND ROOF JOISTS, TYPICAL. • TRUSS HANGERS SHALL BE SUPPLIED AND DESIGNED BY THE TRUSS SUPPLIER. • TRUSS MANUFACTURER TO DESIGN BEARING AT TOP PLATES FOR COMPRESSION PERPENDICULAR TO GRAIN 625psi. 8. INDICATES SNOW DRIFT LOADING. THIS IS IN ADDITION TO THE 35 PSF UNIFORM SNOW LOAD. ROOF FRAMING PLAN NOTES: N ©Copyright D'Amato Conversano Inc. All Rights Reserved This document, and the ideas and designs may not be reused, in whole or in part, without written permission from D'Amato Conversano Inc. D'Amato Conversano Inc. disclaims any responsibility for its unauthorized use. www.dci-engineers.com CIVIL / STRUCTURAL ® 341 W Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, Alaska 99503 P: (907) 519-7600 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # 01.2024 DCI Project No. 23101-0192 COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 1/ 2 4 / 2 0 2 4 1 0 : 0 6 : 2 6 A M C : \ _ l o c a l r e v i t \ S t r u c t - 2 3 1 0 1 - 0 1 92 - R 2 1 _ j s i z e m o r e @ d c i - e n g i n e e r s . c o m . r v t 080123 STRUCTURAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN S102 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL JSS JJRJJR ROOF FRAMING PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 PIPE SLEEVE AS REQD, TYP CONC STEMWALL PER PLAN PIPE, TYP CONC FTG PER PLAN PLACE CONC FILL BEFORE FTG POUR (SAME WIDTH AS FTG) SLOPE CUT AS REQD PER GEOTECH REPORT EXCAVATION NOT ALLOWED BELOW THIS LINE NOTES: 1. PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD SHALL REVIEW PIPES/SLEEVES GREATER THAN 8" DIAMETER AND SPACED CLOSER THAN 3" APART. 2. ALUMINUM MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE. CL R M I N 3 1 / 2 " ELEVATION SECTION BE Y O N D P E R P L A N FT G D E P T H PER PLAN 3' - 0 " M A X MI N 6" CL R 4" 1'-6" MIN EQ EQ CL PIPE PER PLAN FT G D E P T H TH R U T H I S P O R T I O N DO N O T P A S S P I P E S OF F T G 1'-6" MIN1" CLRTYP1" CLRTYP1 1 T/FTG PER PLAN T/FTG PER PLAN FIN GRADE PER ARCH/ CIVIL SE C T I O N STUD WALL & SHTHG PER PLAN PT PLATE W/ AB'S PER PLAN AND DETAILS REINF PER PLAN REINF PER PLAN, CTRD IN WALL (ALT HOOKS) CLR 3" PLAN PER PER PLAN 3' - 0 " M I N FUTURE SOG BY TENANT MI N 8" PL A N PE R T/SLAB T/FTG PER PLAN FIN GRADE T/CONC PER ARCH POST WHERE OCCURS REINF PER PLAN REINF PER PLAN, CTRD IN WALL (ALT HOOKS) CLR 3" PER PLAN FUTURE SOG BY TENANT PL A N PE R T/SLAB T/FTG PER PLAN FIN GRADE 3' - 0 " M I N CL WALL STUD WALL PER PLAN COL PER PLAN BP 5/8" TYPICAL PLANS AT TOP OF WALL CL COL NAILER AT SHEAR WALLS WHERE OCCURS PER PLAN & WOOD DETAILS 10/S200 BP 1/2" (2) 3/4"Ø THRD RODS W/ HEX NUTS & WASHERS UNO 9" M I N ELEVATION AT STOREFRONT CONC WALL PER PLAN SECTION CL COL = CL WALL SHTHG WHERE OCCURS 1" GROUT OPTIONAL WALL REINF PER PLAN, TYP ADDL #4 x 48" OPPOSITE TYP REINF, PROVIDE CORNER BAR AT CORNER CONDITION 1/4 (2) SIDES 1/4NS & FS NS & FS TACK WELD NUT TO AB (2) SIDES F/STUD= F/CONC CL R 1 1 / 2 " CL WALL CL C O L = CL W A L L , T Y P CL C O L = CL W A L L , T Y P TYP 1 1/2" TYP 1 1/2" T/WALL PER ARCH TYP 1 1/2" TYP 1 1 / 2 " TYP HSS WIDTH SE C T I O N PLAN BLOCK OUT FDN WALL 4" LOW AT HSS IN STOREFRONT ELEVATION AT DRIVE-THRU CL COL BP 5/8" (2) 3/4"Ø THRD RODS W/ HEX NUTS & WASHERS UNO 9" M I N T/WALL PER ARCH COL PER PLAN #3 x HAIRPIN W/ STD HOOK EA SIDE OF AB EMBEDDED INTO STEMWALL ONLY AT END OF SHEAR WALL 24 " MI N MIN 4" PLAN - AT SHEAR WALLS PLAN - AT NON-SHEAR WALLS ALL WELDED THREAD STUDS SHALL HAVE NUTS AND WASHERS. BOT PLATE HSS COL PER PLAN NAILER SIZE TO MATCH WALL STUD SIZE (NO COUNTERBORE ALLOWED AT SHEAR WALLS), TYP SHTHG PER SHEAR WALL SCHED EDGE NAILING PER SHEAR WALL SCHED 5/8"Ø WELDED THRD STUD @ 16"OC & 6" FROM T&B, TYP EA SIDE OF COL HSS COL PER PLAN BOT PLATE NAILER SIZE TO MATCH WALL STUD SIZE, TYP STUDS PER PLAN NOTE: 5/8"Ø WELDED THRD STUD @ 16"OC & 6" FROM T&B, TYP EA SIDE OF COL STUDS PER PLAN STUD WALL PER PLAN PT SILL PLATE CONC SLAB PER PLAN NOTES: 1. USE 5/8"Ø ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 7" MINIMUM EMBEDMENT INTO CONCRETE SLAB. 2. EACH SILL PLATE PIECE SHALL HAVE (2) BOLTS MINIMUM. HOLD-DOWN ANCHORS ARE NOT TO BE CONSIDERED AN ANCHOR BOLT. 3. LOCATE BOLTS WITHIN 1'-0" OF SILL PLATE PIECE ENDS AND AT 6'-0"OC MAXIMUM. 4. USE PLATE WASHER PER SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE AT EACH BOLT. STANDARD CUT WASHERS ARE ACCEPTABLE AT NON-SHEAR WALLS. 5. DO NOT DRILL OVERSIZE HOLES THRU SILL PLATE. USE 11/16"Ø DRILL BIT. 6. SILL PLATE THICKNESS AND FASTENING AT SHEAR WALLS PER SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE. 4'-0" MAX PER SHEAR WALL SCHED ANCHOR BOLT, TYP T/SLAB PER PLAN AT HDU HOLD-DOWNS AT AB IN FTG FTG EMBED MIN EM B E D ST E M W A L L EM B E D FT G CL R 3" MI N 1" C L R CL R 1" SHTHG PER SHEAR WALL SCHED BUNDLED STUDS OR POST PER PLAN W/ EDGE NAILING PER SHEAR WALL SCHED HD PER PLAN & SCHED PT BOT PLATE #3 x HAIRPIN W/ STD HOOK EA SIDE OF AB EMBEDDED INTO STEMWALL ONLY AB'S PER SCHED HEADED AB'S PER HD SCHED CONC STEMWALL PER PLAN CONC FTG PER PLAN WALL END 24 " MI N MI N 8Ø T/FTG PER PLAN T/STEMWALL PER PLAN CONC FTG & REINF PER PLAN PE R P L A N #5 EA SIDEINTERRUPT MAIN FTG TOP REINF AT NOTCH (2) #5 x 4'-0" LONG DOWNSPOUT CL DOWNSPOUT, COORDINATE W/ PLUMBING 8" (2) #5 x 14" 14 " PLAN AT FTG PLAN AT WALL WALL REINF PER PLAN #3 x 4'-0" @ 12"OC 4" MAX PIPE DIAMETER, COORDINATE WITH PLUMBING ©Copyright D'Amato Conversano Inc. All Rights Reserved This document, and the ideas and designs may not be reused, in whole or in part, without written permission from D'Amato Conversano Inc. D'Amato Conversano Inc. disclaims any responsibility for its unauthorized use. www.dci-engineers.com CIVIL / STRUCTURAL ® 341 W Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, Alaska 99503 P: (907) 519-7600 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # 01.2024 DCI Project No. 23101-0192 COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 1/ 2 4 / 2 0 2 4 1 0 : 0 6 : 3 5 A M C : \ _ l o c a l r e v i t \ S t r u c t - 2 3 1 0 1 - 0 1 92 - R 2 1 _ j s i z e m o r e @ d c i - e n g i n e e r s . c o m . r v t 080123 STRUCTURAL FOUNDATION DETAILS S200 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL JSS JJRJJR RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"1 TYPICAL PIPE AND TRENCH LOCATIONS AT CONCRETE STEMWALL/FOOTING (03906) SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"6 EXTERIOR FOOTING AND STEMWALL AT STUD WALL WITH 6" FOUNDATION WALL (03031 -M)SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"8 EXTERIOR FOOTING AND STEMWALL AT STORE FRONT (03031 -M) SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"9 TYPICAL BASEPLATE TO CONCRETE WALL CONNECTION - HSS COLUMN (05032)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"10 TYPICAL NAILER DETAILS AT STEEL COLUMNS (06909A)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"11 TYPICAL SILL PLATE ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE (06910)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"12 TYPICAL HOLD-DOWN AT FOUNDATION CONCRETE STEMWALL (06091M) SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"3 PLAN - DOWNSPOUT THROUGH FOUNDATION 1 NOTES: [1] INSTALL PANELS EITHER HORIZONTALLY OR VERTICALLY. [2] BLOCKING IS REQUIRED AT ALL PANEL EDGES. [3] PROVIDE SHEAR WALL SHEATHING AND NAILING FOR THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE WALLS INDICATED ON THE PLANS. ENDS OF FULL HEIGHT WALLS ARE DESIGNATED BY WINDOWS OR DOORWAYS OR AS DESIGNATED ON PLANS. HOLD-DOWN REQUIREMENTS PER PLANS. [4] SHEATHING EDGE NAILING IS REQUIRED AT ALL HOLD-DOWN POSTS. EDGE NAILING MAY ALSO BE REQUIRED TO EACH STUD USED IN BUILT-UP HOLD-DOWN POSTS. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PER HOLD-DOWN DETAILS. [5] INTERMEDIATE FRAMING TO BE 2x MINIMUM MEMBERS. ATTACH SHEATHING TO INTERMEDIATE FRAMING WITH 0.131"Øx2 1/2" NAILS AT 12"OC WHERE STUDS ARE SPACED AT 16"OC AND 0.131"Øx2 1/2" NAILS AT 6"OC WHERE STUDS ARE SPACED AT 24"OC. [6] BASED ON 0.131"Øx1 1/2" NAILS USED TO ATTACH FRAMING CLIPS DIRECTLY TO FRAMING. USE 0.131"Øx2 1/2" NAILS WHERE INSTALLED OVER SHEATHING. [7] FRAMING CLIPS: A35 OR LTP5 OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. [8] ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL PLATE WASHERS 0.229"x3"x3" MINIMUM. THE HOLE IN THE PLATE WASHER MAY BE DIAGONALLY SLOTTED 13/16"x1 3/4" PROVIDED A STANDARD CUT WASHER IS PLACED BETWEEN THE PLATE WASHER AND NUT. PLATE WASHER TO EXTEND TO WITHIN 1/2" OF THE EDGE OF THE SILL PLATE ON THE SIDE(S) WITH SHEATHING. AT 2x6 WALLS WITH SHEATHING ON BOTH SIDES USE PLATE WASHER 0.229"x4 1/2"x4 1/2" MINIMUM. EMBED ANCHOR BOLTS 7" MINIMUM INTO THE CONCRETE. [9] PRESSURE TREATED MATERIAL CAN CAUSE EXCESSIVE CORROSION IN THE FASTENERS. PROVIDE HOT-DIPPED GALVANIZED (ELECTRO-PLATING IS NOT ACCEPTABLE) NAILS AND CONNECTOR PLATES (FRAMING ANGLES, ETC) FOR ALL CONNECTORS IN CONTACT WITH PRESSURE TREATED FRAMING MEMBERS. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. [10] WHERE "W" INDICATES WOOD SHEATHING AND "X" INDICATES EDGE NAIL SPACING. [11] EDGE NAILS SHALL BE LOCATED 3/8" FROM PANEL EDGES.ADJOINING PANEL EDGE PANEL EDGE NAILING, TYP NAILING TO MATCH PLATE NAILING (2) 2x STUDSPLAN WX 01430A WALL TYPE SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE SOME SHEAR WALL TYPES NOTED MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. FOR 0.148"Øx 2 1/2" NAILS IN DOUG-FIR LARCH WALL SHEATHING APA-RATED [1, 2, 10] BLOCKING & STUD SIZE AT ADJOINING PANEL EDGES [3,11] NAIL SIZE & SPACING AT ALL PANEL EDGES [4, 5] RIM JOIST OR BLOCKING CONN TO TOP PLATE BELOW [6,7] 2x PLATE ATTACHMENT NAILING TO WOOD RIM JOIST OR BLOCKING BELOW ANCHOR BOLT TO CONCRETE BELOW [8] SILL PLATE AT FOUNDATION [9] SILL PLATE ATTACHMENT SHEAR CAPACITY LBS/FT W6 15/32"0.148"Øx2 1/2" @ 6"OC 2x CLIP @ 16"OC 0.148"Øx3 1/4" @ 6"OC 5/8"Ø @ 48"OC 2x 310W6 15/32" BOTH SIDES 3x 0.148"Øx3 1/4" @ 4"OC (2) ROWS [9]5/8"Ø @ 24"OC 3x [15] 920 0.148"Øx2 1/2" @ 4"OC STAGGERED CLIP @ 12"OC EACH SIDE2W4 SAWCUT CIRCULAR NOTCH VEE NOTCH LET-IN NOTCH BORED HOLES ARE TO BE SPACED AT LEAST TWICE THE DIAMETER OF THE LARGEST HOLEMAX D EPT H S T U D W I D T H E Q E Q W I D T HSTUD D I S T , T Y P M I N 5 /8 " E D G E O F B O R E D H O L E S M A X D I A M E T E R BORED HOLES ARE TO BE SPACED AT LEAST A STUD WIDTH FROM A CUT OR NOTCH BEARING WALL STUDS STUD SIZE MAX DEPTH OF EDGE CUT OR NOTCH MIN DEPTH REMAINING AFTER CUT OR NOTCH 2x4 2x6 7/8" 1 3/8" 2 5/8" 4 1/8" BEARING WALL STUDS STUD SIZE MAX DIAMETER OF BORED HOLE MIN DEPTH REMAINING AFTER BORED HOLE 2x4 2x6 1 3/8" 2 3/16" 5/8" EA SIDE OF HOLE 5/8" EA SIDE OF HOLE NOTE: STUDS MAY NOT BE BORED IN EXCESS OF 40% OF THE STUD, IF STUDS ARE DOUBLED, BORINGS MAY BE INCREASED TO 60% OF STUD WIDTH PROVIDED NOT MORE THAN (2) SUCCESSIVE STUDS ARE BORED. BORINGS SHALL NOT BE MADE AT THE SAME SECTION WHERE CUT OR NOTCH HAS BEEN MADE. NON-BEARING WALL STUDS STUD SIZE MAX DEPTH OF EDGE CUT OR NOTCH MIN DEPTH REMAINING AFTER CUT OR NOTCH 2x4 2x6 1 3/8" 2 3/16" 2 1/8" 3 3/8" NON-BEARING WALL STUDS STUD SIZE MAX DIAMETER OF BORED HOLE MIN DEPTH REMAINING AFTER BORED HOLE 2x4 2x6 2 1/16" 3 1/4" 5/8" EA SIDE OF HOLE 5/8" EA SIDE OF HOLE NOTE: STUDS MAY NOT BE BORED IN EXCESS OF 60% OF THE STUD. BORINGS SHALL NOT BE MADE AT THE SAME SECTION WHERE CUT OR NOTCH HAS BEEN MADE. CUTTING AND NOTCHING WOOD STUDS NOTE: DO NOT NOTCH MORE THAN THREE ADJACENT STUDS WITHOUT REVIEW BY ENGINEER. BORED HOLES IN WOOD STUDS NOTE: BORED HOLE NOT PERMITTED IN MORE THAN THREE ADJACENT STUDS WITHOUT REVIEW BY ENGINEER. M I N D E P T H 4'-0" MIN SPLICE LAP DBL TOP PLATE (2) ROWS 0.148"Øx3 1/4" NAILS ((16) TOTAL) STAGG (WITHIN AREA OF SPLICE) @ 6"OC PLATE SPLICE TO OCCUR OVER STUDS, TYP STUD WALL PER PLAN NOTE: TRUSSES NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. NOTES: [1] SOME HOLD-DOWN TYPES MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS PROJECT. [2] TYPICAL HOLD-DOWN DETAILS PER 12/S200. ANCHOR REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED AT STEMWALLS. [3] PROVIDE PANEL EDGE NAILING PER SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE AT HOLD-DOWN STUDS/POSTS. [4] BASED ON MINIMUM f'c = 3000 PSI CONCRETE. [5] CAST-IN-PLACE (CIP) TYPE THREADED RODS AT HOLD-DOWNS SHALL HAVE TWO HEX HEAD NUTS WITH OVERSIZED WASHERS. [6] INCLUDES 1.6 LOAD DURATION INCREASE FOR WOOD. [7] AT PRESSURE TREATED SILLS, USE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED BOLTS. [8] NAIL LAMINATE MULTIPLE 2x STUDS WITH PLATE NAILING PER SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE. [9] STUD WALLS SHALL BE 2x6, CENTER HOLD-DOWN IN STUD WALL. HOLD-DOWN/STRAP SCHEDULE - DOUG-FIR STUDS [1, 2, 7]INDICATES FOOTNOTES TYPE NUMBER OF STUDS/POST [8, 9] NAILS, SCREWS OR BOLTS DIAMETER ANCHOR [4] CONCRETE EMBEDMENT/CAPACITY STEMWALL FOOTING NOTES EMBED CIP [4, 5]CAPACITY EMBED CIP [4]CAPACITY 01420 HDU2 (2) 2x (6) SDS1/4x2 1/2 5/8"Ø 10" 3.1k 8" 3.1k _ _ _ _ HDU5 (2) 2x (14) SDS1/4x2 1/2 5/8"Ø 10" 5.2k 8" 5.6k _ _ _ _ HDU11 (1) 4x6 OR (1) 6x (30) SDS1/4x2 1/2 1"Ø 10" 7.8k 12" 9.5k _ _ _ _ HUC HANGER TO FIT BEAM PER PLAN COLUMN PER PLAN, EXTEND FROM BASE TO TOP PLATE A35 CLIP ES COLUMN TO TOP PLATE CONT DBL TOP PLATE, SPLICE PER 6/S201 PERP BEAM PER PLAN AT SIM TRUSSES AND BLKG PER DETAILS DBL TOP PLATE, SPLICE PER 6/S201 FRMG PER PLAN STUD WALL PER PLAN (3) 0.131"Øx3 1/4" NAILS TYP EA END BUNDLED TRIMMER STUDS INDICATED AS THUS: ON PLAN (1) MIN, TYP KING STUDS PER PLAN (1) MIN 2 ADDL STUD(S) TO MATCH STUDS ABOVE STUD WALL PER PLAN BOT PLATE HDR PER PLAN SILL AT WINDOWS TRIMMER & KING STUDS CONT TO BOT PLATE STUDS PER PLAN (2) MIN BLKG AT HORIZ PANEL EDGE STUD WALL & SHTHG PER PLAN EDGE NAILING PER PLAN, TYP PT SILL PLATE W/ AB'S PER PLAN HD ANCHOR TYPE PER PLAN TRUSS OR BLKG PER DETAILS DBL TOP PLATE STUDS PER PLAN [(2) MIN] FIELD NAILING PER PLAN CONC SLAB BEYOND PER PLAN CONC STEMWALL & FTG PER PLAN T/SHTHG PER PLAN T/SLAB PER PLAN S200 12 STUD WALL & SHTHG PER PLAN PT PLATE W/ AB'S PER PLAN SHEAR WALL SHTHG WHERE APPLIES REINF PER PLAN T/SLAB T/FTG PER PLAN FUTURE SOG BY TENANT REINF PER PLAN, CTRD IN WALL (ALT HOOKS) REINF PER PLAN PER PLAN PE R P L A N CLR 3" PLAN PER FUTURE SOG BY TENANT POST WHERE OCCURS REINF PER PLAN REINF PER PLAN, CTRD IN WALL (ALT HOOKS) CLR 3" PER PLAN FUTURE SOG BY TENANT PL A N PE R T/SLAB T/FTG PER PLAN T/CONC PER ARCH (2) #5B CONT INCLUDING CORNER BARS SLOPE PER ARCH #5 CONT DOWELS TO MATCH SLAB REINF x 24" 6" 3' - 0 " ©Copyright D'Amato Conversano Inc. All Rights Reserved This document, and the ideas and designs may not be reused, in whole or in part, without written permission from D'Amato Conversano Inc. D'Amato Conversano Inc. disclaims any responsibility for its unauthorized use. www.dci-engineers.com CIVIL / STRUCTURAL ® 341 W Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, Alaska 99503 P: (907) 519-7600 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # 01.2024 DCI Project No. 23101-0192 COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 1/ 2 4 / 2 0 2 4 1 0 : 0 6 : 4 4 A M C : \ _ l o c a l r e v i t \ S t r u c t - 2 3 1 0 1 - 0 1 92 - R 2 1 _ j s i z e m o r e @ d c i - e n g i n e e r s . c o m . r v t 080123 STRUCTURAL STUD AND SHEAR WALL DETAILS S201 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL JSS JJRJJR RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"3 SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE - DOUG-FIR LARCH (01430 -M) SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"5 TYPICAL HOLES & NOTCHES IN WOOD STUDS (06908)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"6 TYPICAL PLATE SPLICE DETAIL (06904)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"7 HOLD-DOWN/STRAP SCHEDULE - DOUG-FIR STUDS (01420M)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"8 STOREFRONT BEAM TO COLUMN SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"11 TYPICAL HEADER (06210M)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"12 TYPICAL SHEAR WALL ELEVATION (06090)SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"10 INTERIOR STEMWALL AT STUD WALL (03024)SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"9 EXTERIOR FOOTING AND STEMWALL AT STORE FRONT AND STOOP (03031 -M) 1 DESIGN PARAPET AS PART OF TRUSS DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING SHTHG PER PLAN DOUBLE TOP PLATE PRE-FABRICATED TRUSSES SIMPSON CLIP EA TRUSS PER PLAN NOTES PER ARCH 20'-0" MAX PER ARCH CLIPS PER SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE PRE-FABRICATED TRUSS BLOCKING BETWEEN EACH TRUSS. DESIGN TO TRANSFER 500lb SHEAR LOAD TOP TO BOTTOM PER ARCH B.O.EXT.SOFFIT T.O.STOREFRONT T.O.PARAPET BEAM PER PLAN WHERE OCCURS SHIM ES AS REQD SHEAR WALL PER PLAN WHERE OCCURS STRAP PER PLAN OVER 4X6 FLAT BLKG 15/32" PLYWD SHTHG W/ 0.131"Øx2 1/2" NAILS @ 6"OC EDGES & 12"OC FIELD CONT DBL TOP PLATE 2x6 BLKG @ 16"OC WHERE TRUSSES ARE SPACED GREATER THAN 24"OC DESIGN PARAPET AS PART OF TRUSS 15/32" PLYWD SHTHG W/ 0.131"Øx2 1/2" NAILS @ 6"OC EDGES & 12"OC FIELD SHTHG PER PLAN DOUBLE TOP PLATE SHEAR WALL SHTHG AND NAILING PER SCHEDULE PRE-FABRICATED TRUSSES SIMPSON CLIP EA TRUSS PER PLAN NOTES T/PARAPET PER ARCH 20'-0" MAX PER ARCH CLIPS PER SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE PRE-FABRICATED TRUSS BLKG BETWEEN EACH TRUSS. DESIGN TO TRANSFER 500lb SHEAR LOAD TOP TO BOTTOM B.O.EXT.SOFFIT HANGER PER TRUSS SUPPLIER PER ARCH TRUSS BEARING DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING BEAM PER PLAN WHERE OCCURS PRE-FABRICATED GIRDER TRUSS 2x6 BLKG @ 16"OC WHERE TRUSSES ARE SPACED GREATER THAN 24"OC CONT DBL TOP PLATE SHTHG PER PLAN PRE-FABRICATED TRUSSES PER ARCH 20'-8" MAX BEAM PER PLAN AT CANOPY, ALIGN W/ OUTSIDE FACE OF SHTHG, CONN TO HSS COL PER 10/S202 PRE-FABRICATED TRUSS BLOCKING BETWEEN EACH TRUSS. DESIGN TO TRANSFER 500lb SHEAR LOAD TOP TO BOT T.O.PARAPET HEADER PER PLAN 2x CONT NAILER W/ 5/8"Ø WTS @ 16"OC STRAP PER PLAN OVER 4X6 FLAT BLKG TO ALIGN W/ STRAP BEYOND DRIVE THROUGH BUMP OUT EA DIRECTION 15/32" PLYWD SHTHG W/ 0.131"Øx2 1/2" NAILS @ 6"OC EDGES & 12"OC FIELD CANTILEVER CANOPY CONNECTION PER MFR DBL TOP PLATE SIMPSON CLIP EA TRUSS PER PLAN NOTES DBL TOP PLATE DESIGN PARAPET AS PART OF TRUSS PARAPET WALL BEYOND DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING PER PLAN 2x FLAT BLKG AT EA STUD TRUSS PER PLAN DBL TOP PLATE H8 ANCHOR AT EA STUD TO FLAT BLKG PANEL EDGE NAILING STUD WALL & SHTHG PER PLAN T/SHTHG PER PLAN T/PARAPET PER ARCH 20'-8" MAX PLATE NAILING PER SHEAR WALL SCHED 2x6 LEDGER W/ (2) 0.148"Øx3 1/4" NAILS EA STUD 4'-0" LSTA15, STUD TO STUD AT PARAPET (2) 2x6 CONT 1/4"Øx5" SDWS SCREWS @ 8"OC H10A EA STUD TO PLATE 2x6 AT EA PARAPET STUD 4 ' - 0 " (3) 1/4"Øx3" SDS SCREWS A35 EA STUD TO PLATE 2x6 STUDS @ 16"OC 15/32" PLWD SHTHG W/ 0.131"Øx2 1/2" NAILS @ 6"OC EDGES & 12"OC FIELD 1 1 TOP CONNECTION PER 10/S202 PL 1/4" EA SIDE W/ (2) 1/2"Ø THRU BOLTS BEAM PER PLAN 3/8" BEARING PL BEAM WIDTH +1" COLUMN PER PLAN 3/16 TYP 1 1 / 2 " 3" 3" GAP 1/2"2 1/2"1 1/2" TOP PLATES CONT AT SIM BEAM PER PLAN AT SIM BEAM PER PLAN (OMIT AT SIM) T/PLATE 11'-10" 10'-0" T/STOREFRONT PL3/8x8 1/2 x BEAM WIDTH +1" 1/4 1/4 3/16 HSS CANOPY SUPPORT BEAM, PER PLAN HSS COL PER PLAN CAP PL1/4 EA END 1/4" BENT PL x 3" 1/ 4 " TYP 5 1 / 2 " TOP PL 3/8" SHAPED W/ 5/16"Ø PRE-PUNCHED HOLES DBL TOP PLATE (4) 1/4"Ø x 3" SDS SCREWS TOP OF HSS CONNECTION TO TOP PLATE3/4" VERIFY W/ ARCH TOP PL 3/8" SHAPED W/ 5/16"Ø PRE-PUNCHED HOLES ELEVATION 1/4 3-SIDES EL E V A T I O N 3" CL 1 1/2" 1 1/2" GAP 1/2" CAP PL1/4 TOP PL 3/8" SHAPED W/ 5/16"Ø PRE-PUNCHED HOLES TYP 5 1 / 2 " 3" 1/ 4 " 1 1/2" 1 1/2" CANTILEVER CANOPY CONNECTION PER MFR B/STL 10'-0" AT DRIVE-THRU 7'-2" AT ENTRY T/PLATE 11'-10" (TYP) STUD WALL & SHTHG PER PLAN SHTHG PER PLAN PREFAB TRUSSES PER PLAN, TYP A34 CLIP W/ (8) 0.131"Øx1 1/2" NAILS TYP EA END 2x4 BRACE @ 6'-0"OC PLATE ATTACHMENT PER SHEAR WALL SCHED DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING PER PLAN AT SHEAR WALL BELOW TRUSS MFR SHALL DESIGN TRUSS FOR SHEAR TRANSFER LOAD AS REQD PER PLAN OR CONTINUE SHTHG T/SHTHG PER PLAN GIRDER TRUSS PER MFR 5/8"Ø THRD ROD TRUSS MFR TO PROVIDE BLKG FOR TRUSS HD CONN (2) 2x6 EA END OF GIRDER TRUSS PER PLAN HDU5 SHTHG PER PLAN GIRDER TRUSS PER MFR 5/8"Ø THRD ROD TRUSS MFR TO PROVIDE BLKG FOR TRUSS HD CONN HDU5 SHTHG PER PLAN BEAM PER PLAN PL3/8x4x4 WASHER (2) 2x6 AT TRUSS BRG ©Copyright D'Amato Conversano Inc. All Rights Reserved This document, and the ideas and designs may not be reused, in whole or in part, without written permission from D'Amato Conversano Inc. D'Amato Conversano Inc. disclaims any responsibility for its unauthorized use. www.dci-engineers.com CIVIL / STRUCTURAL ® 341 W Tudor, Suite 105 Anchorage, Alaska 99503 P: (907) 519-7600 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Issue Record: Consultant: Drawn:Checked:Project Manager: # 01.2024 DCI Project No. 23101-0192 COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH HARLAN R. FAUST, ARCHITECT. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 1/ 2 4 / 2 0 2 4 1 0 : 0 6 : 5 4 A M C : \ _ l o c a l r e v i t \ S t r u c t - 2 3 1 0 1 - 0 1 92 - R 2 1 _ j s i z e m o r e @ d c i - e n g i n e e r s . c o m . r v t 080123 STRUCTURAL WOOD FRAMING DETAILS S202 01/12/2024 PERMIT SUBMITTAL JSS JJRJJR RE X B U R G I D S H E L L NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D . & T A M A N A D R . RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"4 TRUSS AT PARAPET WALL SECTION SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"8 TRUSS AT PARAPET WALL SECTION SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"7 TRUSS AT DRIVE THROUGH CANOPY SECTION SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"12 PARAPET - EXTERIOR WALL PARALLEL TO TRUSS (06062M)SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"9 WOOD BEAM TO HSS COLUMN SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"10 CANOPY SUPPORT BEAM AND COLUMN SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"2 INTERIOR WALL PARALLEL TO ROOF TRUSSES (06074M) SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"6 HOLD-DOWN AT GIRDER TRUSS TO STUDS SCALE: 1" = 1'-0"5 HOLD-DOWN AT GIRDER TRUSS TO BEAM 1 SECTION 15055 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL A. SECTION REQUIREMENTS 1. Comply with the requirements of the Building Code and the local authority having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Building Attachments: Powder actuated type, drive pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval for fire protection systems. C. Mechanical Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval for fire protection systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install piping free of sags and bends. B. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. D. Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast iron pipes for wall sleeves. E. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations with through-penetration firestop systems. F. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. G. Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas piping. H. Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in water piping. I. Provide full ring escutcheons at plumbing penetrations through walls or ceilings. Tightly seal escutcheons to the adjacent surface. 3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. B. Install powder actuated drive pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured. Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick. C. Install mechanical anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured. Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick. D. Support fire protection system piping independent of other piping. E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. END OF SECTION 15055 SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: None. B. Quality Assurance: Labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Preformed Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, with factory applied, all purpose, vapor retarder jacket. B. Polyolefin Pipe Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I, except for density. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F. B. Insulate fittings, valves, and specialties. C. Seal vapor barrier penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections. D. Coat glass fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. E. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of the roof flashing. F. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. G. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire rated walls and partitions. H. Fire Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire rated walls and partitions. Seal around penetration with through penetration firestop systems. I. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at the underside of the floor assembly and at the floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with through penetration firestop systems. J. Glass Fiber Insulation Installation: Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound. K. Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following piping systems: 1. Domestic cold, hot, and recirculation water pipes. 2. Exposed sanitary drains and water supply pipes for public hand sinks. 3. Refrigerant piping. L. Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Fire protection piping systems. 3. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. 4. Chrome plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled. 5. Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. M. Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials and thicknesses: 1. Domestic Hot and Recirculation water pipes: 1-inch preformed glass fiber pipe insulation. 2. Domestic Cold Water: 1/2-inch preformed glass fiber pipe insulation. 3. P-Trap and Fixture Supplies for public hand sinks: ADA-compliant pre-formed insulation. END OF SECTION 15080 SECTION 15110 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES A. End Connections: Threads shall comply with ANSI B1.20.1. Flanges shall comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron valves and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. Solder-joint connections shall comply with ANSI B16.18. B. Ball Valves: Rated for 150 psig saturated steam pressure, 400 psig WOG pressure; 2 piece construction; with bronze body, standard (or regular) port, chrome plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl covered steel handle. C. Plug Valves: Rated at 150 psig WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern, square head, and threaded ends. D. Swing Check Valves: Class 125, cast bronze body and cap; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc. E. Valves for Copper Tube: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam service. F. Valves for Steel Pipe: Threaded ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use gate and ball valves for shutoff duty and ball for throttling duty. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install accessible valves for each fixture and item of equipment. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level. END OF SECTION 15110 SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated minimum pressure requirements for water piping are as follows: 1. Service Entrance Piping: 100 psig. 2. Domestic Water Piping: 80 psig. B. Comply with NSF 14 "Plastic Piping Components and Materials." C. Comply with NSF 61 "Drinking Water System Components -- Health Effects." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND TUBES (See Material Schedule on sheet P010 for where these materials are to be used) A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 2.2 FITTINGS A. Wrought Copper, Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.22. B. Cast Copper Alloy, Solder Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18. C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B 16.24, Classes 150 and 300. D. Copper Unions: ASME B 16.18, cast copper alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball and socket joint, metal to metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder joint and threaded ends. Threads complying with ASME B 1.20.1. E. Copper and Copper Alloy Press-Connect Pressure FittingsCopper Press Fittings: ASME B16.51 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, lead free. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements. C. Solvent Cements: As recommended by manufacturer. D. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated. B. Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping system. D. Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated. E. Install ball valves in each hot water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable plumbing code and as recommended by pipe manufacturer. B. Support vertical piping at each floor. 3.3 INSPECTING AND CLEANING A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 15140 SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Pressure Requirement for Soil, Waste and Vent: 10 feet head. B. Comply with NSF 14 "Plastic Piping Components and Related Materials". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND TUBES A. PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, plain ends. 2.2 FITTINGS A. PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311; socket type; drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer. B. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 15150 SECTION 15198 - NATURAL GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Quality Assurance: Comply with NFPA 54 and the Plumbing Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND SPECIALTIES A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S (Seamless), Grade B, Schedule 40, plain ends. B. Fittings: a. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150. b. Cold Press Mechanical Joint Fitting System: Viega MegaPress C. Manual Valves: Comply with standards listed or, if appropriate, to ANSI Z21.15. D. Gas Stops: AGA certified, bronze-body, plug type with bronze plug, for 2-psig or less natural gas. Include AGA stamp, flat or square head or lever handle, and threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1. E. Gas Valves: 150-psig WOG, cast-iron or bronze body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered-plug type. F. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion resistant pressure regulators. Include atmospheric vent, elevation compensator. Regulator pressure ratings, inlet and outlet pressures, and flow volume in cubic feet per hour of natural gas at specific gravity are as indicated. G. Line Gas Pressure Regulators: Inlet pressure rating not less than system pressure. H. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy. I. Strainers: Bronze body, Y-pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include stainless-steel screens with 3/64 inch perforations and a pressure rating of 125-psig- minimum, WOG working pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section. B. Install shutoff valve, downstream from gas meter, outside building at gas service entrance. C. Install gas stops for shutoff to appliances with NPS 2" or smaller low pressure gas supply. D. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. E. Install gas piping at uniform slope of 0.1 percent upward toward risers. F. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, gas pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated. H. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. I. Install gas valve upstream from each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas-pressure regulators are installed in series, valve is not required at second regulator. J. Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances with shutoff valves and unions. Install gas valve upstream from and within 36 inches of each appliance using gas. Install union or flanged connection downstream from valve. K. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4, "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and Purging", and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 15198 G G PLUMBING SYMBOLS PLAN NOTE: SEE PLAN NOTES LISTED ON THE SAME SHEET FOR NOTE MEANING ELBOW UP ELBOW DOWN DOMESTIC COLD WATER CONNECT TO EXISTING REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BACKFLOW PREVENTER WATER METER EQUIPMENT TAG: SEE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE ON SHEET P600 FOR EQUIPMENT INFORMATION VALVE XX-# GAS (ON ROOF) GAS METER GAS X WM GM GW CLEANOUT SANITARY VENT GREASE WASTE SANITARY WASTE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE (E) EXISTING EXT'G EXISTING FCO FLOOR CLEANOUT GCO GRADE CLEANOUT GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR PLUMBING ABBREVIATIONS PLUMBING MATERIAL SCHEDULE ALLOWABLE MATERIALAPPLICATIONCATEGORY ABOVE GROUND, CONCEALED PVC PLASTIC DWV PIPE AND FITTINGSSANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPE BELOW GROUND PVC PLASTIC DWV PIPE AND FITTINGS ABOVE GRADE TYPE L COPPER TUBE WATER SUPPLY PIPE CONCEALED SCH. 40 STEEL PIPE, MALLEABLE IRON THREADED FITTINGSNATURAL GAS PIPE EXPOSED SCH. 40 STEEL PIPE, MALLEABLE IRON THREADED FITTINGS, PAINTED Trueman Blvd.Suite 2504635 Hilliard, Ohio 43026 Phone: Fax: (614) 751-9610 (614) 552-5240 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Drawn: Issue Record: Consultant: Checked: Contact: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 SH E L L R E X B U R G NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D & T A M A N A D R RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 EEP 2302050 PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS P010 CEJ Edgar Palma (720) 629-5752 Epalma@nationalengineering.com 01/23/2024 PERMIT SET PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES A GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO PLUMBING SHEETS. B PLUMBING WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLUMBING CODE, LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENT STANDARDS, AND THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. SEE ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR THE PREVAILING CODES. C PIPING LAYOUTS ON DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC. EXACT LOCATIONS ARE TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AND THE WORK OF OTHER TRADES. D CONCEAL PIPING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WATER SUPPLY PIPES SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL. E PIPING IN EXTERIOR WALLS SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE INSULATION AND THE INTERIOR WALL FINISHING MATERIAL. F PLUMBING FIXTURES, ACCESSORIES, AND MATERIALS PROVIDED FOR DOMESTIC WATER SHALL BE LEAD FREE. G THE TERM "FURNISH" MEANS SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO THE PROJECT SITE, READY FOR UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, INSTALLATION, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "INSTALL" DESCRIBES THE OPERATIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE INCLUDING THE ACTUAL UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, ERECTING, PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING, WORKING TO DIMENSION, FINISHING, CURING, PROTECTING, CLEANING, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "PROVIDE" MEANS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY FOR THE INTENDED USE. H PRIOR TO CONNECTION TO ANY EXISTING SEWER SYSTEM PERFORM A DIE TEST TO VERIFY THE TYPE OF SYSTEM AND THE DIRECTION OF FLOW. REPORT ANY DEVIATION FROM THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TO THE TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. I PROVIDE SANITARY AND GREASE WASTE PIPES AT A MINIMUM SLOPE OF 1/4" PER FOOT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. Signed On 01/23/2024 5:05:47 PM GM WM 1 G GI-1 3 4 5 6 8 9 13 9 10 11 12 RD-2 RD-1 DN-1 10 11 12 RD-2 RD-1 DN-1 7 2 0" 7' - 0 " 9' - 6 " 12 ' - 5 " 13 ' - 1 1 " 24 ' - 1 1 " 14 GW GW GW 3' - 8 " 1' - 3" BFP-1 GW GW WH-1 WH-1 7' - 2 " 15 15 GAS PIPE SHALL PENETRATE EXTERIOR WALL ABOVE LAY IN CEILING. PAINT EXPOSED GAS PIPE TO MATCH EXTERIOR WALL FINISH. PAINT GAS PIPE TO MATCH EXTERIOR WALL FINISH. G 10 ' - 6 " SLOPE EXTERIOR HORIZONTAL STORM DRAINAGE CONDUCTORS A MINIMUM OF 1/2" PER FOOT (TYPICAL) SLOPE EXTERIOR HORIZONTAL STORM DRAINAGE CONDUCTORS A MINIMUM OF 1/8" PER FOOT (TYPICAL) RD-1 3"ø 4"ø SLOPE EXTERIOR HORIZONTAL STORM DRAINAGE CONDUCTORS A MINIMUM OF 1/2" PER FOOT (TYPICAL) RD-2 3"ø DN-1 NOTES: MAKE NECESSARY ARRANGEMENTS WITH WATER COMPANY TO INSTALL NEW WATER SERVICE PER LOCAL CODES & WATER COMPANY REGULATIONS AND PAY ALL CHARGES. SERVICE SHALL BE SIZED PER THE PLUMBING PLAN & INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE OF WATER COMPANY REGULATIONS. ANCHOR METER, BACKFLOW PREVENTER, AND PIPING TO THE WALL OR THE FLOOR. CERTIFY THE BACKFLOW PREVENTER PER THE WATER COMPANY'S REQUIREMENTS. FUTURE FLOOR DRAIN PROVIDE FULL-SIZE DRAIN FROM REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BACKFLOW PREVENTER TO FLOOR DRAIN. DRAIN THROUGH AN AIR GAP. WATER METER FINISHED FLOOR BFP-1 PROVIDE INSULATION ON INTERIOR COLD AND HOT WATER PIPING, CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE, AND STORM PIPE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION REGARDING INSULATION. INSTALL ITEMS PER SPECIFICATIONS AND MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. MAINTAIN VAPOR BARRIER ON COLD WATER AND CONDENSATE PIPING BY MEANS OF SEALANT AND TAPE. FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE-DEVELOPED INDEXES SHALL NOT EXCEED 25/50. SEAL EXPOSED ENDS OF FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ADHESIVE MASTIC. PROVIDE PREFORMED GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION WITH PRE-MOLDED PVC JACKETS, SLEEVES, AND FITTING COVERS ON EXPOSED WATER PIPE SO THAT EXPOSED WATER PIPE IS COVERED ENTIRELY WITH PVC INSULATION COVERS. MITER THE INSULATION AT TEES AND ELBOWS SO THAT THERE ARE NO GAPS AT JOINTS. PROVIDE ONE-PIECE PRE- MOULDED PVC FITTING COVERS. INSULATE VALVE BODIES. LEAVE UNIONS FREE OF INSULATIONS. PROVIDE INSULATION ON PIPES WITHIN WALLS AND CHASES PROVIDE A ONE FOOT LENGTH OF NONCOMPRESSIBLE INSULATION AT HANGERS FOR PIPE 2" AND LARGER TAPE JOINTS OF FIBERGLASS INSULATION EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE RE: ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS 1/8" = 1'-0"P100 PLUMBING SUPPLY PLAN1 PLUMBING SUPPLY PLAN NOTES 1 REFER TO CIVIL UTILITY PLANS FOR CONTINUATION OF WATER LINE TO CONNECT TO WATER MAIN. 2 PROVIDE WATER SERVICE ENTRY PER DETAIL 5/THIS SHEET. CONTAIN ALL WATER SERVICE PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IN HATCHED AREA AS SHOWN. 3 PROVIDE A 1,600 MBH NATURAL GAS SERVICE TO A NEW GAS METER ON THE EXTERIOR WALL OF THE BUILDING AT THE LOCATION SHOWN. REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION OF THE GAS LINE TO THE CITY MAIN CONNECTION. 4 PROVIDE A 2-1/2" GAS LINE FROM THE GAS METER THROUGH THE EXTERIOR WALL PER DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET. 5 NATURAL GAS DELIVERY PRESSURE AFTER THE METER SHALL BE 7" W.C. PER TENANT'S WORK LETTER. PROVIDE A NATURAL GAS REGULATOR IF GAS COMPANY CANNOT SUPPLY A DELIVERY PRESSURE OF 7" W.C. TO THE BUILDING. COORDINATE A MUTUTALLY AGREEABLE LOCATION FOR THE GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR WITH TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. 6 PROVIDE A 4" SANITARY SEWER LINE WITH A MINIMUM 48" INVERT ELEVATION STUBBED INTO THE BUILDING AS SHOWN. REFER TO THE CIVIL UTILITY PLANS FOR CONTINUATION OF THE SANITARY SEWER LINE TO THE MAIN CITY CONNECTION. 7 PROVIDE A 4" GREASE WASTE LINE WITH A MINIMUM 48" INVERT ELEVATION STUBBED INTO THE BUILDING AS SHOWN. 8 PROVIDE GREASE INTERCEPTOR, GI-1, PER LOCAL REQUIREMENTS. SEE CIVIL UTILITY PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF GREASE INTERCEPTOR. 9 SEE CIVIL UTILITY PLANS FOR CONTINUATION OF SEWER LINE. 10 SEE CIVIL UTILITY PLAN FOR CONTINUATION OF 4" STORM SEWER. 11 PROVIDE 3" STORM DRAIN CONDUCTOR FROM PRIMARY ROOF DRAIN RD-1 DOWN IN WALL TO 4" STORM DRAIN BELOW GRADE. INTERIOR HORIZONTAL STORM DRAIN CONDUCTORS SHALL BE SLOPED A MINIMUM OF 1/2" PER FOOT. 12 PROVIDE 3" STORM DRAIN CONDUCTOR FROM SECONDARY ROOF DRAIN RD-2 TO DOWNSPOUT NOZZLE DN-1 MOUNTED AT 24" AFG. INTERIOR HORIZONTAL STORM DRAIN CONDUCTORS SHALL BE SLOPED A MINIMUM OF 1/2" PER FOOT. 13 PROVIDE A 2" SEWER VENT TIGHT TO THE EXTERIOR WALL FROM THE GREASE INTERCEPTOR TO THE BUILDING AS SHOWN. 14 MEASURE DOMESTIC WATER PRESSURE DOWNSTREAM OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER WITHIN BUILDING. IF PRESSURE IS LESS THAN 60 PSI COORDINATE WITH OWNER TO PROVIDE PRESSURE BOOSTER. IF WATER PRESSURE IS GREATER THAN 80 PSI PROVIDE LINE-SIZE PRESSURE REGULATOR SET AT 80 PSI UPSTREAM OF BACKFLOW PREVENTER. 15 PROVIDE HOSE BIBS, WH-1, AS SHOWN. Trueman Blvd.Suite 2504635 Hilliard, Ohio 43026 Phone: Fax: (614) 751-9610 (614) 552-5240 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Drawn: Issue Record: Consultant: Checked: Contact: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 SH E L L R E X B U R G NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D & T A M A N A D R RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 EEP 2302050 PLUMBING SITE PLAN P100 CEJ Edgar Palma (720) 629-5752 Epalma@nationalengineering.com 01/23/2024 PERMIT SET 1/4" = 1'-0"P100 GAS METER SECTION2 1/4" = 1'-0"P100 ROOF DRAIN SECTION3 1/4" = 1'-0"P100 OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN SECTION4 N.T.S.P100 WATER SERVICE ENTRY DETAIL5 N.T.S.P100 PIPE INSULATION DETAIL6 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TAG FIXTURE FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY MANUFACTURER MODEL DESCRIPTION QUANTITY CONNECTION SIZE BFP-1 RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER GC GC CONBRACO 4ALF-207 LEAD FREE REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTER WITH AUTOMATIC DIFFERENTIAL RELIEF VALVE AND AIR GAP FITTING 1 DN-1 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLE GC GC WATTS RD-950 STAINLESS STEEL DOWNSPOUT COVER WITH PERFORATED HINGED STRAINER 2 GI-1 GREASE INTERCEPTOR GC GC CUSTOM -- 1,500 GALLON PRECAST GREASE INTERCEPTOR 1 RD-1 ROOF DRAIN GC GC WATTS RD-103 EPOXY COATED CAST IRON ROOF DRAIN WITH FLASHING CLAMP WITH INTEGRAL GRAVEL STOP, SELF-LOCKING POLYETHYLENE DOME, AND NO HUB OUTLET 2 RD-2 ROOF DRAIN GC GC WATTS RD-103-W EPOXY COATED CAST IRON OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN WITH FLASHING CLAMP WITH INTEGRAL 4 IN. (102MM) HIGH INTERNAL STANDPIPE, SELF-LOCKING POLYTHYLENE DOME, AND NO HUB OUTLET 2 WH-1 FROST PROOF WALL HYDRANT GC GC WOODFORD MODEL 65 AUTOMATIC DRAINING, FREEZELESS WALL HYDRANT WITH ANTI-SIPHON VACUUM BREAKER. PROVIDE WITH STEM LONG ENOUGH TO REACH INSIDE THE THERMAL ENVELOPE OF THE BUILDING. 2 10 3" 4" 3" 3" 1-1/2" Signed On 01/23/2024 5:06:10 PM SECTION 16011 TEMPORARY & PERMANENT ELECTRICAL SERVICE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground fault current interrupter. B. RMS: Root Mean Square C. SPDT: Single Pole, Double Throw 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Tenant, Architect, or Engineer and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Tenant's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Engineer. 5. Testing agencies. 6. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Permanent Service: Coordinate with building Tenant and utility company to establish permanent service upon completion of the project. Contractor shall pay for all permits, aid-to-construction charges, and related fees associated with the new service. 1.3 NOTIFICATION A. Coordinate with Tenant to provide 72 hour written notification to other tenants of any power interruptions. Notification shall state the estimated time and duration of the electrical outage. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's 'Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 3. Comply with OSHA standards and regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. B. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 12S-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. C. Main panelboard with disconnect. D. Temporary lighting. E. 120 volt receptacles with overcurrent protection. F. Enclosures. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, and overload- protected disconnecting means. 1. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. B. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. 2. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage. Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas. 3. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. 4. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 1 DO-foot (30-m) extension cord can reach each area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet. C. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp (or equivalent) every 50 feet (15 m) in traffic areas. 3. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, parking and traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. END OF SECTION 16011 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Wiring Methods." B. Material: Copper. C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 2.2 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Use only copper conductors. B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. C. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. D. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. END OF SECTION 16060 SECTION 16100 - WIRING METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Summary: Building wire and cable and associated splices, connectors, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less, and twisted-pair cable; and raceways and boxes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRES AND CABLES A. Connectors and Splices: Wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, and type and class for application and for service indicated. 2.2 RACEWAYS A. Wireways: Screwed cover type, with manufacturers standard finish. B. Outlet and Device Boxes: Sheet metal boxes, except use cast-metal boxes at exterior, interior exposed, and interior damp locations. C. Pull and Junction Boxes: Sheet metal boxes, except use nonmetallic boxes with gasketed covers at exterior and interior damp locations. 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, steel enclosure with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. Finish inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. B. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wires and cables according to the NECA's "Standard of Installation. B. Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet. C. Conceal wiring, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. D. Boxes and Enclosures: In damp or wet locations use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel. E. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceway and suitable for use and location. For intermediate metal conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. F. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1 -inch concrete cover. G. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical. H. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 18 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. J. Install raceway sealing fittings where required by the NEC and at wiring entrances to refrigerated spaces. Locate at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. K. Stub-up Connections for Equipment: Extend conductors to equipment with rigid metal conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 3 inches above the floor. L. Install a separate green ground conductor in surface metal raceway from the junction box supplying the raceway to receptacle and fixture ground terminals. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. C. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows: 1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. 3. Colors: As follows: a. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. D. Color-code System secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows: 120/208V 277/480V 1. Phase A: Black Brown 2. Phase B: Red Orange 3. Phase C: Blue Yellow 4. Neutral: White Gray 5. Ground: Green Green END OF SECTION 16100 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: None. B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DEVICES A. General: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Color: Per Material Schedule on sheet E010. C. Receptacles: Heavy- Duty grade, NEMA WD6, Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated. D. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles: integral duplex receptacle; for installation in box without an adapter. Feed-through type, with a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet E. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. F. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type. G. Wall Plate: Per Material Schedule on sheet E010. H. Floor Service Fittings: Modular, above-floor, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. Mount devices flush with long dimension vertical unless otherwise indicated. C. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. D. Install wall plates when painting is complete and paint is cured. END OF SECTION 16140 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: None. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with NEMA PB 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirement, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: a. Square D Co. b. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. c. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. d. Siemens Energy & Automation. B. Recessed, NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 1. Load Center Capacity: as shown on drawings. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. 3. Doors: With concealed hinges, flush catches, and tumbler locks, all keyed alike. 4. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. C. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, plug-in type, Single-handle for multipole circuit breakers. Appropriate for application, including Type SWD for repetitive switching lighting loads and Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. D. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination contactors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. Provide typed, permantently-mounted English and Spanish circuit directories showing the panel schedules as installed in each panelboard. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Future Circuit Provisions at Flush Panel boards: Stub four empty 3/4-inch conduits from panelboard into accessible or designated ceiling space. D. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups, bundle and wrap with wire ties according to NEC guidelines. E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. F. Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated In NETA ATS. END OF SECTION 16442 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: None. B. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Coordinate ceiling-mounted luminaires with ceiling construction, mechanical work, and security and fire-prevention features mounted In ceiling space and on ceiling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during re-lamping and when secured in operating position. C. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set units level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure. B. Support for Recessed and Semirecessed Grid-Type Fluorescent Fixtures: Install ceiling support system rods or wires at a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture, located not more than 6 inches from fixture corners. C. Support for Suspended Fixtures: Support according to manufacturers' recommendations. D. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 16500 AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE C CONDUIT (E) EXISTING EXT'G EXISTING G GROUND GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPT IG ISOLATED GROUND JB JUNCTION BOX NL NIGHT LIGHT GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS J ELECTRIC PANELBOARD JUNCTION BOX X/Y/Z DISCONNECT SWITCH: X = SWITCH RATING Y = FUSE SIZE (NF = NON-FUSED) Z = NUMBER OF POLES PLAN NOTE: SEE PLAN NOTES LISTED ON THE SAME SHEET FOR NOTE MEANING# A-6 HOME-RUN TO PANELBOARD AND CIRCUIT NUMBER SHOWN CONDUIT CONCEALED BELOW THE SLAB CONDUIT CONCEALED ABOVE THE CEILING, IN A WALL, OR IN A RACEWAY ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS OTHER RECEPTACLE - SEE PLAN FOR RATING AND TYPE NEMA 5-20R DUPLEX RECEPTACLE NEMA 5-20R 1-PLEX RECEPTACLE ELECTRICAL MATERIAL SCHEDULE ALLOWABLE MATERIALAPPLICATIONCATEGORY #10 AWG AND SMALLER SOLID CU, TYPE THHN/THWN OR XHHW CONDUCTORS #8 AWG AND LARGER STRANDED CU, TYPE THHN/THWN OR XHHW CONDUITS ON DRYWALL IN DINING ROOM WHITE DEVICE WITH WHITE COVER PLATE WIRING DEVICES ON HOT ROLLED STEEL, RICHLITE, OR OTHER BLACK FINISHES BLACK DEVICE WITH BLACK COVER PLATE IN KITCHEN, OFFICE, OR NON-PUBLIC SPACES GRAY DEVICE WITH STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE IN RESTROOMS WHITE DEVICE WITH WHITE COVER PLATE IG OR IG/GFI RECEPTACLES GRAY DEVICE WITH STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE OUTDOOR, ABOVE GRADE, EXPOSED OR CONCEALED INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT CONNECTION TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT (EXPOSED WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS) LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT INDOOR, EXPOSED ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING U.N.O. INDOOR, CONCEALED ABOVE GRADE CONNECTION TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT (EXPOSED INDOOR DRY LOCATIONS) FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING, FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, OR METAL CLAD CABLE INDOOR, WITHIN 1-1/2" OF ROOF DECK INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT LOW VOLTAGE, INDOOR, ABOVE GRADE LOW OR LINE VOLTAGE, BELOW GRADE RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40 PVC) ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING Trueman Blvd.Suite 2504635 Hilliard, Ohio 43026 Phone: Fax: (614) 751-9610 (614) 552-5240 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Drawn: Issue Record: Consultant: Checked: Contact: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 SH E L L R E X B U R G NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D & T A M A N A D R RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 EEP 2302050 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E010 CEJ Edgar Palma (720) 629-5752 Epalma@nationalengineering.com 01/23/2024 PERMIT SET ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES A GENERAL NOTES APPLY TO ELECTRICAL SHEETS. B ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ELECTRICAL CODE AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. SEE ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR THE PREVAILING CODES. C WIRING SHALL BE (2)#12, #12 G IN 3/4" C UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. D INDIVIDUAL CONDUIT HOME RUNS SHOWN SHALL NOT BE CONSOLIDATED. E INSTALL CONDUIT CONCEALED ABOVE THE CEILING, IN WALLS, OR IN RACEWAYS. F THE TERM "FURNISH" MEANS SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO THE PROJECT SITE, READY FOR UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, INSTALLATION, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "INSTALL" DESCRIBES THE OPERATIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE INCLUDING THE ACTUAL UNLOADING, UNPACKING, ASSEMBLY, ERECTING, PLACING, ANCHORING, APPLYING, WORKING TO DIMENSION, FINISHING, CURING, PROTECTING, CLEANING, AND SIMILAR OPERATIONS. THE TERM "PROVIDE" MEANS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY FOR THE INTENDED USE. Signed On 01/23/2024 5:06:10 PM J J 2.2 2.6 2.6 2.3 2.1 3.0 3.8 4.1 3.9 3.7 3.3 2.9 2.7 2.8 2.5 2.6 3.0 3.4 3.7 4.0 3.7 2.9 2.1 1.4 1.0 0.6 2.2 2.2 2.1 1.8 3.4 4.3 4.9 5.0 4.9 4.8 4.5 4.2 4.0 3.5 3.7 4.2 4.5 4.7 4.7 4.2 3.3 2.4 1.6 1.1 0.7 3.1 3.0 2.9 2.6 2.1 3.5 4.5 5.2 5.4 5.4 0.5 4.0 3.9 3.6 2.7 3.4 4.4 5.0 5.2 5.3 7.5 9.4 9.2 4.5 4.8 4.3 3.2 3.2 4.2 4.8 5.0 5.2 8.5 13.2 13.5 5.0 5.0 4.4 3.1 3.0 3.8 4.4 4.7 4.9 7.8 11.0 10.7 5.0 5.0 4.0 2.7 2.8 3.4 3.9 4.3 4.6 6.5 7.6 6.7 4.8 4.8 4.0 2.5 2.4 2.9 3.3 3.7 4.2 6.6 8.3 7.6 4.8 4.6 3.6 2.4 2.1 2.4 2.8 3.0 3.6 7.1 11.5 11.7 4.6 4.3 3.2 2.4 1.7 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.9 6.1 9.6 9.6 4.7 4.3 3.3 2.3 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.3 4.1 5.2 4.9 1.7 2.1 4.9 4.6 3.6 3.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.8 2.2 2.7 2.9 2.8 1.6 2.3 3.1 2.7 2.0 1.7 1.8 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.5 4.2 4.8 5.1 4.8 3.8 3.2 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 2.1 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.0 1.8 1.7 1.9 2.3 2.7 3.1 3.7 4.3 5.6 5.5 4.5 3.6 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.1 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.6 6.1 6.2 5.5 4.2 3.4 2.8 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.2 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.4 2.8 3.1 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.1 6.9 6.4 5.1 4.1 2.5 2.5 2.7 2.4 2.2 2.1 2.2 2.5 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.7 3.9 3.9 4.1 4.5 5.0 5.6 7.6 7.2 6.0 4.8 3.1 3.6 4.1 3.9 3.6 3.3 2.8 2.7 2.9 2.9 2.7 3.1 3.7 4.1 4.7 5.0 4.8 4.6 4.5 4.8 5.2 5.8 6.5 7.2 7.7 7.8 6.9 5.6 4.6 3.8 2.7 4.1 4.8 4.9 4.7 4.5 4.0 3.7 3.8 3.8 3.8 4.4 4.9 5.2 5.6 5.6 5.3 4.8 4.6 4.6 5.0 5.5 6.1 6.7 7.3 7.6 7.3 6.3 5.3 4.5 3.2 4.3 5.0 5.3 5.1 4.9 4.7 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.6 5.0 5.2 5.6 5.9 5.8 5.2 4.7 4.3 4.3 4.5 4.9 5.4 5.9 6.5 7.0 7.1 6.6 5.9 5.0 3.6 4.2 4.9 5.1 4.9 4.8 4.7 4.5 4.7 4.6 4.6 4.9 5.1 5.4 5.7 5.5 5.0 4.4 3.9 3.8 3.9 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.8 6.3 6.6 6.5 5.9 4.8 3.4 4.1 4.7 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.3 4.3 4.4 4.4 4.3 4.5 4.7 5.0 5.4 5.2 4.7 4.1 3.6 3.4 3.4 3.7 4.2 4.8 5.3 5.8 6.1 6.0 4.0 4.5 4.6 4.4 4.2 3.9 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.1 4.4 4.8 5.0 4.9 4.5 3.9 3.4 3.1 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.6 5.6 4.7 3.5 2.5 3.7 4.2 4.4 4.3 4.0 3.7 3.7 3.8 3.7 3.9 4.2 4.6 4.7 4.6 4.2 3.7 3.3 3.0 3.5 3.9 4.4 4.9 5.1 5.1 4.5 3.3 2.1 3.5 4.0 4.2 4.2 4.0 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.8 4.1 4.3 4.4 4.4 4.1 3.7 3.3 3.0 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 4.9 4.9 4.5 3.2 1.8 3.3 3.8 4.0 4.1 4.0 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.1 3.8 3.4 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.9 4.4 4.8 4.8 4.4 3.1 1.9 3.1 3.5 3.9 4.0 4.0 3.8 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.8 3.8 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.2 4.0 3.6 3.2 3.2 3.4 3.8 4.3 4.8 4.8 4.4 3.1 1.9 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.1 4.2 3.9 3.7 3.6 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.3 4.1 3.7 3.3 3.1 3.4 3.9 4.4 4.7 4.9 4.4 3.2 1.8 2.6 3.2 3.8 4.2 4.4 4.0 3.7 3.6 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.9 4.2 4.4 4.5 4.3 3.9 3.4 3.2 3.5 4.0 4.5 4.8 5.0 4.4 3.3 2.3 2.4 3.1 3.9 4.4 4.5 4.1 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 4.0 4.2 4.5 4.7 4.6 4.1 3.5 3.2 3.6 4.1 4.6 5.0 2.3 3.1 3.9 4.6 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.3 4.2 4.3 4.3 4.2 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 4.7 4.2 3.5 3.1 3.0 3.2 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.1 5.5 5.3 4.4 3.1 1.8 1.0 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.3 2.3 3.1 4.0 4.7 5.1 4.9 4.7 4.6 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.7 4.8 5.0 5.2 4.9 4.2 3.5 3.1 3.0 3.1 3.4 3.8 4.4 5.1 5.5 5.5 4.8 3.4 1.8 0.9 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 2.2 3.1 4.0 4.8 5.2 5.0 4.9 4.7 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.4 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.0 4.2 3.5 3.0 2.9 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.3 4.8 5.1 5.1 4.5 3.3 1.7 0.8 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.2 2.1 3.0 3.9 4.6 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.0 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 4.0 4.5 4.7 4.9 4.7 4.1 3.4 2.8 2.6 2.7 3.0 3.4 3.9 4.3 4.5 4.4 3.8 2.7 1.4 0.7 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.2 2.5 3.3 3.9 3.8 3.5 3.2 2.8 2.5 2.7 2.7 2.5 2.8 3.2 3.5 3.9 4.0 3.5 2.9 2.5 2.3 2.4 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.7 3.7 3.6 3.0 2.1 1.1 0.6 0.3 0.2 0.2 E4 2 3 1 X9 X9 10 ' - 0 " 10 ' - 0 " E2 E4 E4 E3 E2 PL1 PL2 1 4 4 TO TENANT'S FUTURE PANELBOARD LOCATION 1 PL2 4 1 PL2 4 1 PL2 4 X6X6 X7 FULL CUT-OFF LIGHT FIXTURES WITH FLAT GLASS LENS 10' COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD. GROUT BASE PLATE TO CONCRETE BASE RE-BAR TIES CONCRETE VERTICAL RE-BAR ELECTRICAL CONDUITS MIN 30" BELOW GRADE GRADE ANCHOR BOLTS 1" CHAMFER BASE COVER PLATE WIRING ACCESS HANDHOLE 2' - 0" 2' - 6 " 5' - 0 " REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LIGHT BASE DETAIL REQUIREMENTS. Trueman Blvd.Suite 2504635 Hilliard, Ohio 43026 Phone: Fax: (614) 751-9610 (614) 552-5240 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Drawn: Issue Record: Consultant: Checked: Contact: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 SH E L L R E X B U R G NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D & T A M A N A D R RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 EEP 2302050 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN E105 CEJ Edgar Palma (720) 629-5752 Epalma@nationalengineering.com 01/23/2024 PERMIT SET 1/16" = 1'-0"E105 SITE LIGHTING PLAN1 ELECTRICAL SITE LIGHTING PLAN NOTES 1 PROVIDE SITE LIGHTING PER DETAIL 3/THIS SHEET. TYPICAL. 2 INSTALL LED DRIVERS FURNISHED WITH THE X9 LED STRIP LIGHTS ON WALL AT 12'-0" AFF IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE WIRING FROM LED DRIVER TO THE X9 LIGHT FIXTURES AS SHOWN. 3 PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX NEAR FUTURE ELECTRICAL PANEL FOR EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONNECTION BY TENANT. 4 PROVIDE (2) #10, #10 G. IN 3/4" C FROM POLE LIGHT FIXTURES TO J-BOX WITHIN BUILDING. LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TAG QUANTITY TYPE MOUNT FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY MANUFACTURER MODEL LAMP(S) VOLTS WATTS SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS E2 2 EXTERIOR REMOTE EMERGENCY LIGHT VARIOUS GC GC EXITRONIX MLED1-B-WP (1) SPECIAL LED 4 1 LOW VOLTAGE REMOTE EMERGENCY LIGHT POWERED BY REMOTE-CAPABLE EXIT SIGN WITH MOUNTING PLATE E3 1 EXTERIOR REMOTE EMERGENCY LIGHT VARIOUS GC GC EXITRONIX MLED1-W-WP (1) SPECIAL LED 4 1 LOW VOLTAGE REMOTE EMERGENCY LIGHT POWERED BY REMOTE-CAPABLE EXIT SIGN WITH MOUNTING PLATE E4 3 WHITE EXIT SIGN WITH EMERGENCY LIGHT - STANDARD RED LETTERS VARIOUS GC GC EXITRONIX CLED-U-WH (1) SPECIAL LED 120 2 90 MINUTE BATTERY BACKUP WITH INTEGRAL EMERGENCY LIGHT, REMOTE HEAD CAPABLE X6 2 EXTERIOR FLOOD LIGHT SURFACE AT 11'- 6" GC GC RAB LIGHTING WPLED18NW INTEGRAL LED 120 18 PROVIDE WITH WALL-MOUNT KIT. X7 1 EXTERIOR FLOOD LIGHT SURFACE AT 11'- 6" GC GC RAB LIGHTING WPLED10NW INTEGRAL LED 120 10 PROVIDE WITH WALL-MOUNT KIT. X9 3 LED CHANNEL LIGHT SURFACE GC GC PARADIGM LED AMC-2410-S W/ OPAL LENS AND END CAPS FLEXSR-45-30-67-24 120 FURNISHED W/ REMOTE-MOUNTED NEMA 3R LED DRIVER. SEE PLAN FOR LENGTHS. 1/16" = 1'-0"E105 SITE PHOTOMETRIC PLAN2 SITE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE TAG QUANTITY NUM. OF FIXTURES PER POLE LAMP WATTAGE & TYPE VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION COLOR FURNISHED BY INSTALLED BY MANUFACTURER MODEL # OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES POLE TYPE POLE SIZE POLE HEIGHT POLE COLOR POLE MANUFACTURER POLE MODEL # PL1 1 1 168W LED 120 V TYPE III BLACK GC GC HUBBELL ASL2-320L-170-4K7-3 LAMP & ASL2-HSS-360-BLT SQUARE STRAIGHT STEEL 4" 20' - 0" BLACK HUBBELL SSS-20-40-90 PL2 1 1 168W LED 120 V TYPE IV BLACK GC GC HUBBELL ASL2-320L-170-4K7-4W LAMP & ASL2-HSS-360-BLT SQUARE STRAIGHT STEEL 4" 20' - 0" BLACK HUBBELL SSS-20-40-90 N.T.S.E105 LIGHT BASE DETAIL3 SITE LIGHTING INFORMATION: AVERAGE: 3.9 FC MAXIMUM: 13.5 FC MINIMUM: 0.2 FC MAX/MIN: 67.5:1 AVERAGE/MIN: 19.5:1 READINGS TAKEN AT GRADE. VALUES CALCULATED USING VISUAL 2020 Signed On 01/23/2024 5:06:10 PM J J JJ J J J M 400/ 400/ 3 PROVIDE (4) 500 KCMIL CU IN 3-1/2" C. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS W/ ELECTRIC COMPANY. PROVIDE 400A METER AND FUSED DISCONNECT ON EXTERIOR WALL AS SHOWN ON SHEET E115. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRIC COMPANY. PROVIDE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM AS SHOWNWATER SERVICE ENTRY 1/0 CU BUILDING STEEL CONCRETE- ENCASED ELECTRODE 1/0 CU #4 CU PROVIDE (4) 500 KCMIL CU, #1/0 G. IN 3-1/2" C. FUTURE 400A 120/208V 3P PANEL BY TENANT PROVIDE (4) 500 KCMIL CU, #1/0 G. IN 3-1/2" C. PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMER WITH 120/208V 3-PHASE 4-WIRE SECONDARY. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS AND LOCATION W/ CIVIL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY. 3 5 1 LOOP 1 67 8 40 0 / 4 0 0 / 3 M 2 9 10 4 111 2 6 5 87 1 VEHICLE DETECTOR LOOP - 6'x4' WITH 4 TURNS (EMX PR-46-XX). VERIFY LENGTH OF LEAD-IN WIRE PRIOR TO ORDERING TO ALLOW WIRE TO REACH VEHICLE DETECTOR WITHOUT SPLICING. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATIONS. FUTURE DEVICE OR CONDUITTAGDESCRIPTION FUTURE CONNECTION OR CONDUCTORS RESPONSIBILITY 2 1" CONDUIT FROM VEHICLE DETECTOR LOOP LOCATION TO LOW VOLTAGE J- BOX. GC 3 1" CONDUIT FROM ANNOUNCE SIGN LOCATION TO LINE VOLTAGE J-BOX. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION. 4 1" CONDUIT FROM CLEARANCE BAR LOCATION TO LINE VOLTAGE J-BOX. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION. 5 1" CONDUIT FROM SITE DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE AND/OR MONUMENT SIGN LOCATION(S) TO LINE VOLTAGE J-BOX. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATIONS AND NUMBER OF ROUGH-IN LOCATIONS. 6 1" CONDUIT FROM SITE LIGHTING FIXTURE(S) TO LINE VOLTAGE J-BOX. SITE LIGHTING FIXTURES CAN BE DAISY-CHAINED. GC 7 LINE VOLTAGE J-BOX - MINIMUM 6"X6"X4" J-BOX ON INTERIOR WALL OF BUILDING AT 11'-0" AFF. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION. GC 8 LOW VOLTAGE J-BOX - MINIMUM 6"X6"X4" J-BOX ON INTERIOR WALL OF BUILDING AT 11'-0" AFF. SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION. GC GENERAL NOTES A. WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE COMPLIANT WITH THE NEC AND REQUIREMENTS OF THE AHJ. B. CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTIONS BELOW GRADE, EVEN WHERE WITHIN CONDUITS OR ENCLOSURES, SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS. C. PROVIDE PULL STRING IN EMPTY CONDUITS. D. SEAL ENDS OF CONDUITS STUBBED UP ABOVE GRADE TO PROTECT FROM THE ELEMENTS. 43 FUTURE FUTURE N/A FUTURE FUTURE FUTURE GC GC GC GC 109 9 1" SPARE CONDUIT FROM LOW VOLTAGE J-BOX TO LANDSCAPING AREA. SEAL CONDUIT FOR FUTURE USE. FUTUREGC 10 1" SPARE CONDUIT FROM LINE VOLTAGE J-BOX TO LANDSCAPING AREA. SEAL CONDUIT FOR FUTURE USE. FUTUREGC Trueman Blvd.Suite 2504635 Hilliard, Ohio 43026 Phone: Fax: (614) 751-9610 (614) 552-5240 Project No. Contents: Revisions: Drawn: Issue Record: Consultant: Checked: Contact: # COPYRIGHT 2024 THIS DRAWING IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE AND AS SUCH REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. PERMISSION FOR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS LIMITED AND CAN BE EXTENDED ONLY BY WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH NATIONAL ENGINEERING, LTD.. MATTIS PARTNERS 1000 2ND AVE SUITE 2420 SEATTLE, WA 98104 TELEPHONE: 206-641-9500 SH E L L R E X B U R G NW C U N I V E R S I T Y B L V D & T A M A N A D R RE X B U R G , I D 8 3 4 4 0 EEP 2302050 ELECTRICAL SITE POWER PLAN E115 CEJ Edgar Palma (720) 629-5752 Epalma@nationalengineering.com 01/23/2024 PERMIT SET 1" = 10'-0"E115 POWER SITE PLAN1 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN NOTES 1 PROVIDE A 1" CONDUIT FOR THE VEHICLE DETECTION LOOP AT THIS LOCATION PER DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET. SEE TENANT'S ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR THE EXACT LOCATION OF THE VEHICLE DETECTION LOOP. 2 PROVIDE A 400A, 120/208V, 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE ELECTRICAL SERVICE TO THE 400A CT METER CABINET AND THE 400A MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH PER DETAIL 3/THIS SHEET. SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR CONTINUATION OF WIRE. 3 PROVIDE A 1" CONDUIT FOR THE ANNOUNCE BOARD AT THIS LOCATION PER DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET. SEE TENANT'S ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR THE EXACT LOCATION OF THE ANNOUNCE SIGN. 4 PROVIDE SERVICE CONDUCTORS PER DETAIL 3/THIS SHEET FROM THE 400A MAIN DISCONNECT SWITCH TO TENANT'S FUTURE PANELBOARD LOCATION AS SHOWN. COORDINATE FINAL PANELBOARD LOCATION WITH TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 5 PROVIDE A 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL STRING TO CLEARANCE BAR PER DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET. SEE TENANT'S ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR THE EXACT LOCATION OF THE CLEARANCE BAR. 6 PROVIDE A 1" SPARE LOW VOLTAGE CONDUIT AT THIS LOCATION. SEE DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. 7 PROVIDE A 1" SPARE LINE VOLTAGE CONDUIT AT THIS LOCATION. SEE DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. 8 PROVIDE INTERIOR J-BOXES AT 11'-0" AFF FOR LINE VOLTAGE AND LOW VOLTAGE SITE WIRING. SEE DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. 9 PROVIDE TWO 2" CONDUITS FROM TELEPHONE DEMARCATION POINT TO OFFICE LOCATION. REFER TO THE CIVIL UTILITY PLANS FOR CONTINUATION OF CONDUIT AND EXACT LOCATION OF THE TELEPHONE DEMARCATION. COORDINATE TELEPHONE CONDUIT STUB-IN LOCATION WITH TENANT'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. 10 PROVIDE A DUPLEX GFCI RECEPTACLE WITH WEATHERPROOF WHILE IN USE OUTLET COVER FOR IRRIGATION CONTROLLER. PROVIDE CONDUCTORS TO A BOX NEAR FUTURE PANELBOARD LOCATION. 11 PROVIDE A 1" CONDUIT FOR THE SITE DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE AND/OR MONUMENT SIGN AT THIS LOCATION PER DETAIL 2/THIS SHEET. SEE TENANT'S ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR THE EXACT LOCATION OF THE SITE DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE AND/OR MONUMENT SIGN. N.T.S.E115 SITE CONDUIT DETAIL2 N.T.S.E115 MAIN DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM3 Signed On 01/23/2024 5:06:10 PM